Informatics Practices I

CONTENTS
(x)
-3 Software... 35_4g
3. I Introduction............,
.......... 35
3.2 Software and its Role ........ 35
Software..
3.3 Types of
........... 35
3'4 Software ..........."............... 35
3.4.ISystemSoftware ...................35
3.4.1.1OperaringSystem(OS) %
Chapter - 4 Operati S1'stem 49_66
(x)
4.5 Process Managemgnt """' 57 -
4.5.i Process Concept """""""""' 58
4.5.2 Process Implementatiotr.:......'........ """""" 58
4.5.3 Process Scheduling """"""" 58
4.5.4 Types ofScheduler """""""' 59
4.5.5 SchedulingAlgorithms...'............... """""' 60
4.5.5.1FCFS .""" 60
4.5.5.2 Shonest-Job-First Scheduling (SJF S) """"""""""' 60

4.5.5.3 RoundRobin Scheduling """"""""" 6l
4.5.5.4Scheduling and Perfonoance Criteria.'.... """""""" 62
4.6 Types of Operating System """""""""' A'
4.6.i Sing1eUser............... """"""4
4.6.2 Multiprogramming """""""" A
4.6.3 Multiprocessing """""""""' 63
4.6.4 Tirne sharing """"""""""""' 63
4.6.5.RealTime """" 63
Solved Exercises..... """"""" 64
Review Questions ............ ""' 66
Chapter - 5 Language.. ...67-14
5.6.4 Pascal @
Chapter - 6 Windows
(x,)
-__-______7
7. I Introduction.........
7.2 Notenad ........... lO7
.-
8. I Introduction................. 129
8.2 What is Word Processing ? .................. 129
8.3 Advantages of Word Processing Package MS-\Vord 129
8.4 MS-Office 130
8.5 WORD2000 ................ 130
8.6 Stafting MS-Word 130
8.7 Creating Word Documents .............. 132
8.7.1 To start a new word document.................. 133
8.8 Saving Word Documents .............. 133
8.8.1 Saving an Existing File in its Current Location ............... 134
8.8.2 Savingwith a DifferentName, Forrnat orLocation... 134
8.8.3 Saving to a Different Location 134
8.8.4 Saving in a Different Format ........... l3s
8.9 Opening a Document 135
8.9,1 To Open an Existing Document 135
(xiir)
.-------------7
8.9.2 Using the I\,lost-Recently Used Eile List ............:............................................,.......

136
S.l0ClosingyourDocument ..................... 136
8.1 1 Moving Around in a Document...................
........... 137
8.1 l.l To Scroll the Contents of the Document Window.
...... I3l
8.11.2'IousetheGoToCommand,.............. ....".............."..... l3g
8.12 Printingthe Entire Document
............. l3g
8.13 Specifl,ing Whatto Print ............
138
8.13.1PrintingMultipIeCopiesofaDocument.............................................................. ,rS
S.l3.2ToCoilareorNotToCollate ................... 139
8.13.3 Printing Selected pages of a Document ...................... 139
8.i3.4 Printing Odd or Even pages ................... 140
8.i3.5 Printing Thumbnails .......... 140
8.l3.6ScalingaDocLrmeltttoaDifferentpaperSize ............. I40
8.14 Previewing Documenr
........................ l4l
8.14.1 Printingfrom Print previe*. .................... l4l
8. i4.2 Changing Margins and lndents in print preview
........ l4l
8.14.3 Editing in print preview
..... 142
8.14.4 Zoonting In and iv.Ioving Around
.......... 142
8.14.5 Vier,ving Multiple pages at or.lce .............
..................... 143
8. t4.6 Shrinking a Document to Fit a page .............
............... 143
8.15 Quitting Documents...
..................... ........................ 144
8.15.1 To Quita W,ord Application
................... 144
Solved Exercises
................. r 44
Review euestions
............... 146
r - 9 Editing Wortl Document .................; 147_lj0
9.3 SelectingText ................. ..................... l4i

9.4 Inseting & Deleting Texr...."......... ..:.... l4g
9.4.1TolnserlText ..,................... l4g
9.4.2To Delere Text
...... l4g
9.5 Editing Selected Text .............
.............. l4g
9.5.1ToDelereSelectedText....,.... ............... .. i;S
9.5.2To Replace Selected Text .............
............ l4g
9'6 cut, Copy and Paste .
......................... r49
9.6.1TheClipboard ..................... 149
9.6.2To Copy Text rvith Copy & paste
,....",...... 150
9.6.3 To Move Text with Cut & paste
150
9.6.4To Copy Text rvith Drag-and-D1srp Editing
.. .................................... f SO
9.6.5 To Move Text with Drag-and_Drop ErJiting.
.......".......... 150
9.7 Using Smart Collect and paste . . ... ............. l,sg
9.8 Reversing & Repeatin-e the Recent Changes
............ l5l
9.8.1 To Undo the Last _Action
..,..............."...... l5l
9.8.2 To Undo Multiple Actions
....................... l5l
9,8.3 To Rer,erse the Last Undo .....".....
............ 152
9.8.5 To Repeat the Last Action ....................... 152

9.9 Font Formatting ........... .................. ........ 153
(riv)
.-
9.9.1 Changing the Font and Font Size .....'.'..... 153
9.9.2 Choosing Font Styles, Underlining, Color and Effects ..........'.... 154
9.9.3 Selecting Font [Jndertin ing ............ 154

9.9.4 Setting a Font Color.... 155
9.9.5 Setting a Custom Font Color.... 155
9.9.6 Setting Text Effects 1s6
9.9.7 Changing Case ......... 157
9.9.8 Character Spacing .... 157
9.9.9 Animating Texts ....... t58

9.9.10 Drop Caps ............. 158
9. 10 Paragraph Formatting t59

9. I 0. I Paragraph alignment ..................' 160
9. 10.2 Indenting Text l6l

9.10.3 lndenting with the Ruler ta
9.10.4 Spacing between Lines "........... 162
9.10.5 Spacing Before and A,fter Paragraphs ......'.............. t63
9.10.6 Line and Page Breaks 163
9. 10.7 Tabs 1&

9.10.8 Creating Tabs with the Tabs Dialog Box ............. 165
Solved Exercises r66

Review Questions r68
Chapter - 10 flsing Grammar and Spell Check........ l7l-177

l0.l Introduction.............. ......................... l7l
10.2 Automatic Spelting and Crammar Checking -........... 171
10.2.1 Enabling or Disabling Automatic Spelling and Grammar Checking ....................... 172
l0,2.2CheckingSpeltingthroughtheSpellingandGrammardialogbox......................... 173
.............
10.2.3 Spelling Checking Selected Text ........"""""" 174
10.2.4 Reproofing a Document you've Already Checked ....' 174
10.2.5 Controlling Spelling Settings .......'.'..""' 174
1 0.3 Using the Grammar Command .................. ........,...,...,..,.,.. |74
10.3.1 To CheckGrammarasyou I.vpe.......'..... ..................." 175
l0.3.2ChoosingwhichWritingStyletoApply............".... '.........'.'.....'..... 175
10.3.3 GettingandExplanationforaGrammarRule ..."""""" 176

10.4 Using Word Count """" 176
Solved Exercises ..-....--.,...,.. 176

Review Questions ............... 177
Chapter - 11 Mail Merge and Word Wizard . .....178-192

I 1.1 Introduction .............. ...'......'......'.'..... 178
I 1.2 Basic Concepts of Merging Documents .'..........'.... 178
I1.3 CreateaMasterDocuntent ..........'..... 119
I1.4 To Create a Main Document ..........'... 179
I I .5 Working with Data Source '........"...'... 180
I 1.5.1 To Create a Data Source ............,.'.'.'...... l8l

I L6 Attaching an Existing Data Source .......... 181
11.6.1 To lirsert a Merge Field ..... lA

I 1.7 Get Ready to Merge ...'.. 182
I L8 To View Merged Data on Screen ........ 183
(xv)
ll.9Wizardand Template ..... lg4
ll'lOUsingwizard .............. rM
11.10. I UsingWizardtoCreateaLetter.........
........................ lg4
11.1 I Using Template
........... lgg
il.l l.l SelectingTemplateforaNew Document ................... lgg
ll.1l.2 CreatingaTemplate............. ................. lgg
I L 12 Copying Sfyles with the Help of Organ izer ..............
.................. 190
11.12.1 Steps to Copy a Style frorn One Document to Another
.................. 190
solved Exercises
................. I9r
Review Questions
........)..... r 92
Chapter - 12 Industries and Business Com
12.3 Application of Business Computing inIndustries ..,.....,.............. 194

12.3.1 Computerized Financial Accounting ...... lg4
l2.3.2Purchase systeln ............... l%
12.3.3 Sales systenr ...... .............. l%
12.3.4 Sales analy'sis ................... lg7
12.4 General Ledger System ...................... 197
12.4.I Accounts Receivable ..,................
.......... lSl
12.4.2 Accounts payable
............. lW
Solved Exercises .....
............ l9g
Review Questions
............... l9g
UNTT 2 : IM'RODUCTION To PROGRAMMING
13' l Introduction """ """"'

....................... r99
13.2 Stages of Program Developrnent ............... 199
13.3 Modular Approach ....... 200
13..1 Characteristics of a Good prograrr ..................
........2A1
13 5 St_vlistic Guidelines
.......201
1"3.5.1 Blank Spaces and Blank Lines ............
...................,.... 201
1.j.6 Documentation .....'...'.
.........,"..,......,..203
I 3.7 Robustness................
........................ 203
13.8 Program Debugging
......203
13.8.1 Syntaxenor.............
..........2M
13.8.2 Run_time error ..........
......... 2U
13.8.3 Logical error.............
13.9 Some Common Operational Erors ..........
.........2M
................205
13.9.1 Divide by zero
................... 205
13 9.2. Representational error.............
.............. 205
13.9.3 Logarithm of negative number
...............205
13.9.4 Arrayoverflow.........
Solved Exercises.....
.........205
Review Questions
............ Z0S
............... 206
(xvi)'
- 14 Probtem Solving M.thndqlogy 207-275
Chapter 1tq E"htiqtg
14. I tntroduction .............. """"""" """"" 201
14.2 Steps of Probienr Solving """""""' "' 207
t4.3 tJnderstandirrg the Problenl """" """ " 201
l4.3.l ProblenrDeflnition ""'""'""""24i
14.3.2 Reqrrirements Analysis ""' 20tt
14.3.2.11nput........'..". """"' 208
l4.3.2.2Proccss '""" """ " "' 20u
l4.3.2.3OutPut " """'209
14.4 ldentification of Operations " ' '."' 209
14.4.I Relational Operators ' ""' 24{)
14.4.2 Logical Opcrators """"" ll0

'
l4.4.2.lLogicalAND.........' ' ''"" ' ?'n
)l r
14.4.2.2 Logical OR ... '... '.. '... '
14.4.231-ogicalNO'l " """" '-Zll
I4.5.1 Dr,v Run'.............

14 5.2 In<jepenclent [nspectiotl ...'...-..,..." """"' 2l'2
14.5.3 Structurecl Wall<-through .-..'.'. ""' "" """""""""212
Looping ""' 2i2
14.6 tJsing Control and
Solvcd Exercises """""".'"' 21 4
Review Questions """""""' 2 t5
- 15 Starti Visual Basic ......... 216-230
15.1 Introduction..........,... " "' " 216
" ' " """"'

15.2 Why' Use Object-Oliented Progratnnriug ? "" ""' ""' 216
l5.3 TheObject-Oriented Programriiing (OOP) Paradignl """ """" """""' 217
l5.4 Event Driven Programming ..... "" 218
15.5 fiistory cf Visual Basic ..... """ "" 218

15.6 What is Visual Basic ? """""" "" ' 219
15.7 Stafi with VB ............... """"""""""""' 219
15.7.i UsingWindorvs Erplor:er """""""""" 220
15.7.2 Using Stail Run Option "'""""""" " 220
15.7.3 Using Program |lenu ........ " ' ?'O
15.8 Conceats olVB Procicts """ ' 22
15.8.1 StandardExE..........
""""22i
l5.8.2ActiveXEXE....... ....' ' """' " "'224
)24
15.8.3 ActiveX DLL .... ........
15.8.4 ActiveX Conffol '7'O
225
15.8.5 Data Project..........
i 5.8.6 L-,HTMLApplicaticn """' 225
15.8.7 IIS Application '' 225
l5.S.SActiveXDocumentDLLandEXE "..."." "' "" " "' '225

15.8.9Addin """""""""""' ' 225
ls.8.l0vBApplicationWizarci """"""""".?26
Solved Exercises """"""""':'O
""""""""' 228
Review Questions
(n'll)
ter - 16 Visual Basic User Interlhce 1,j LZS3
16.1 Intloduction..............
16 2 overviervof tDE
.........231
' .. .....,. ...231
15.2.5 Form l-a1,6u1 Windo.,i, ... ..244

16.2.7 Fonr .. . 244
Windorv
16.2.8 Irnrnediate
16.3 Opening and Closing Windor,r,s ' )-45
16.4 ' i;,;,.;:::,: Docking .;

Windows, ;.'^^;-;-.. Windor.vs """'
;
24s
...................245
16.5 (A Simple Screen) ,,..............246
16.6 ......................... 252
.......2s2
Review Questions ............ ... 253
Chapter - 17 Variables, Constants and Dotn frygq ZS4_2g4
.,..."2-\U
rl?/ln^-l-: r,,r
r .+. I Declarine All t.o :al Variables
as Static
17.-5 Constants ... ..... .,......,,259
17 < r --^,.+:-^^ \/ ""...,...259
( rllii )
17.8.6 The Boolean Data TYPe 214
17.8.7 The Date Data Type ......'.....- 210
17.8.8 The Object Data TYPe 214

27C
17.8.9 Convefting Data T;'pes ....".'.'.
17.8.10 The Variant Data TYPe 21t
17.8. I I The Empty Value ................ :tl
211
11 .8.l2The Null Value ..........'.
I 7.8. 13'l-he Drror Value........".'...'...

212
272
17.9 Arrays
2,12
17.9. I Declaring Fixed-Size Arra,vs
212
17.9.2 Setting Upper and Lower Bou
213
I 7.9.3 Multidinrensional Arrays "'....
I 7 l0 D,vnarnic Arrays
:/ )
)f l
1 7. I 0. i l-"o create a dynart ic array ..........'.
1ft
17 .10.2 Preserving the Contents of Dynamic Arrays -:.ti
214
I I Commeltts ...............
I 7.
215
17.12 PRINT statement
215
11 .12.1 Print Using Comrna '.........
?15
17 .12.2 Print Using Semicolon
11 .12.3 Print LJsing
'fab furrction 216
11 .12.4 PrintaBlankLiue .... ....'..... """""' :216

Solved Exercises '!"""""!"" ,7i
'
Review Questions """""""' !'8i
Chapter - 18 ramming Fundamentals Using VB Controls .'.........'... 285--337
I 8 I tntroduction ............... .............. 28-5
18.2 ......'..,....
Event-Dliven Progranrming with VB "' " " 285
18.3 Printingal,ineofTextontheFortr """"' " 285

l8.4Mernoq"ConcePts '""" ""292
18.5 Picture Box Control " """ " ' 296
18.6 F-rame, CiheckBox and OptionButton Controls "" """" 291
18.7 ListBoxC'.ontroi ........... """ 303
18.8 ComboBoxCotttrol "" """"' 307
i8.9'l-inrerControl ............ """" """' 310

l8.l0DriveListBor,lfirListBoxandFilel-istBoxControls "" li3
18. i 1 Line Control arrd Shape Control "" """ 316
t 8.12 Learning the Basic Properties """"" 322
Solved Exercises """"""""' 324
Revierv Questions """""""' 335
Chanter - 19 Nlenu Bditor in VB """ 338-358
JJO
338
i9.2 Starting Menus
339
19.3 Menu Edrtor Dialog Box Options ,...
340
19.4 Menu Basics ..........
19.4.1 Usingthe L.istBox inthe MenLr Editot..'.....'..
i40
1Aa
19.4 2 Separating Menu Itetns .....'.'....
19.4.3 Assigning Access l(e.vs and Shortcui i(eys .........'
343
I 9.5 Creatin-e Submenus
(;rn)
19.6 Adding Code for IVIenus .. ............,.... j45
19.7 Creatitga Menu Control Ana1, .."......." ...................34g
tr9.8 Menu Editor Pop-up Ivlenus .............. 350
Solved Exercises
........,"....... 354
Review Questions ""....".....
... 357
- 20 Control Statements in VB 3Sg_453
20.1 Introduction.............. ......... 359
20.2 A1gorit1uns.............,.....
........ 359
20.3 [ntroduction to Control S',atements
.. ... J6l
20.4 Selection (IflThen Selection Staternent)
..................3&
20.5 iflThenlElse Selection Statement
....... 365
2C,6 While/WenciRepetition Statement.....
..........."......... 371
20.7 Do While/Loop Repetition Statement .....................373
20.8 Do Until/Loop Repetition Statement
.......................316
20.9 ForAiextRepetition Statement
...........311
20. l0 SelectCase Statement.................
..... 3g5
20. i 1 Doil-oop While Repetition Staternenr
................... 391
2}.l2DolLoop UntilRepetition Statement .....................3%
20.13 Exit Do and Exit For Statements ..................
.......... 395
20.14 InputBox Funcfion
,..... 3n
Solved Exercises
,................ 400
Review Questions ............
.., 4lg
Chapter - 21 Common Dia
21.1 Introduction.......... .,.....,..............434
2l.2CommonDialogControl .... ..... ................436
21.2.1 ShowOpen& ShowSave Method
..........436
21.2.2 ShorvFont& ShowcolorMethod
..........441
21.2.2 Showprinrer & ShowHelp Method........
...................... Us
21.3 Dialog Boxes .............
......................... 447
21.4 CLrstom Controls
............ 457
Control
2l .4.1 Imagelist
.................. 45g
21 .4.2lmageComboControl
..,.....460
21.4.3 ToolbarControl
.....4&
21.4.4 SratusBarConrrol
............. 46g
21.5 MediaPlay,er Control
..................... 411
21.5.1 AMultimediaMClCorrtrolCDplayer
......413
Sofved Exercises
.........."...... 476
Review Questions ........,.-.
",. 477
UNIT 3 : RELATIONA L DATABASE N{ANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Chapter - 22 Database C and ADO Controls ......... 479__504
223 Advantages of Database Management System ...... 4g0

22,4Disadvantagesof DBMS ................... . ...
... ......4g1
22.5 Qomp.snents of Database .............
.. .......4g1
22.6ThreeViews of Data
....... 481
(rx)
22.7 Datatndependence ....... q2
12.8 Different Data Models ..".................... 482
22.E.1,TheRe[ational DataModel ..................." 483
22.9 Keys ...."... 4M
22.l0lniegrityRules........... ......485
22. 10. i lntegrity Rule I (Entity lntegrity) ......... 485
22.rc.2lntegrityRule2(Referentiallntegrify) .......................485
22.I 1 Normalization ... ... ",.. ......................... 485
22.ll.l FunctionalDependency .............'.........485
22.l1.2FirstNormalForm... ......... 486
2 I .3 Secorrd Normal Fonn
1. 1 .. . .... 486
22.ll.4ThirdNormaiFotnr............ ...'......'.......' 487
22.I1.5BCNF .........487
22.12FrortEnd..............". ..... ...... 488
22.13 BackEnd .................. ........................ 488
2\]4[tddlew'are ............... .....................,' 488
22.I5 Micrcsoft ADO Data Control and Mocrosoft DataGrid Control .'........ .'...'..'. 488
22.15.1Accessing Database Using ADO.. .......490
Zz.ls.2DataGridControl .......,........ ..................494
22.l6DataList and DataCombo Control ......................... 495
Solved Exercises '..'.'.'......... 501
Review Questions .""..".....' 503
Chapter - 23 Introduction to Oracle 505-509
23.1 Introduction.........,.... ........"............... 505
23.2CliertlServer System ....- 505
23.2.1Two-Tier S1'stems '.'.."..'....... 506
23.2.2Three-T'ierSystems ..-........ 506
23.3 Oracle8 andOracle8i ..... 507
23.4 OraclelnternetPlatform ..'......'........... 507
23.5 Why SQLFit in ? .............. '....'........... 507
23.6 Role of SQL and SQL * Plus in RDBMS .............. ..'.'..."....'......'... 508
23.7 Whatis User ? ........."........ ...'.....'....'...... -508
23.8 Users. Roles and Privileges..... ..........' 508
Solved Exercises ....'...........' 508
Review Questions .......,.... ... 509
Chapter - 24 Starting with SQL ...................... ..... 510-536

24.i lntroduction.............. .....'.."'..'..... .'... 510
24.2Overview ofSQL .""""" 510
24.3 Featuresof SQL """ "" 510

24.4 Classification of SQL Staternents """' 510
24.5 StartingsQl ...."....... '...' 511
24.6RulesforSQlCommands '.... """""" 513
24.7 Executing SQL Statements ................ .-......'....'.'....., 513
24.8 Database Objects .......'.. 513
24.9Database ObjectNaming R.ules .......'. 513
24.10 DataDefinition Language (DDL) ..." 513
24.IISQLDataTypes .......'..514
(.'xi)
24.I2CreatingaTableUsingSQLCREATECommanci. ......,......".."...._. 514
24. i3 Describingthe Structure ofthe Table.. .................. 515
24.14 Tables in the Oracle Database ......,... 516
24.15 Querying the Data Dictionary ......,... 516
24.l6The Integrity Constraints ..........,...... 5lz
24 .16 "1 Constraint Guidelines ... ... 512
24. I 6.2 The NOT NLILL Constraints .................. 517
24. | 6.3 The DEFAULT Constraint 5i9
24.1 6.4 The IINIQUE Constraint 519
24. I 6.5 The PRIMARY KEY Constraint ......... 519
".......
24.16.6 The CHECK Conslraint 519
24. I 6.1 The FOREIGN KEY Constraint ................. 90
24.16.8 The Table Constraints 520
24. 17 Viewing Constraints 9t
24.17 .l Viewing the Columns Associated with Constraints .................. 5D
24.18 Adding a Constraint 523
24. 19 Dropping a Constraint .,................ 5n
24.20 Disabling Constraint .............
524
24.2 I Enabling Constraint
94
24.22 Alter Tabie ......... .
94
24.22.1The ADD Clause 95
24.22.2 The MODIFY Clause ..........
525
24.22.3 Dropping a Column ............. 526
21 23 Drop Table Command....
a.t I t Data
97
Manipulation Language (DML) 527
2.4.21.1 The INSERT INTO ...............
5n
24.25 The Delere Command ...............
98
Solved Exercises
529
R.eview Questions
533
Ctrra ter - 25 SQL SELECT Statement ............. . 537_578
25 I Introduction..........
537
25 2-Making A Query
537
25.i SELECTCommand
s37
25.3. I FROI\4 Clause .........
538
25.3.2 WHERE Clause ....,.,........................
25.4 Using Special Operators in Conditions
w
v3
25.4.1The IS NU[,L Clause ,.........
il3
25.4.2 TheDISTINCT Clause ..........,..
il4
25.4.3The ALI- Clause
545
25.4.4 The BETWEEN Clause ..........
fl5
25.4.5 The IN Clause
%
25.4.6The LIKE Clause ............... y7
25.4.7 Using NOT with Special Operators
........ 54g
25.4.8 Defining a ColumnAlias ...............
......... yg
25.5 Using Concatenation Operator
.......... yg
25.6 The UPDATE Comnrand
...."............... 551
25.6.1 Using Expression in UpDATE
551
25 6.2 UPDATE with lVtultiple Column
552
(xxii)
-
25.6.3 UPDAl'ErvithNLILLClause .......".. ........ 553
25.7 The Group F'unctior1s............... .......... 5-53
25.7.1 The AVG Function ............ 554
25.'i.2The MAX Function ...........,...... ............. 554
25.7"3 The MIN Function ............ 554
25.7.4'lhe SUM Function ..,............... .............. 554
25.7.5 The COUNT Function .... .............. ......... 555
25.7.6 Restricting DISTINCT clause with Function ............... 555
25.7.7 Aggregate Function in Expression ......... 555
25.7.8 Using NVL Function with Group Functions ................ 555
25.ETheGROLPBYClause ...................;....556
25.9'fhe I{AVINGCiarrs..i .........."..... .......... -s58
25.10 Nesting Group Functions "."...,........ ............,.......... 559
25.11OrderingtheDatabase......................:................ ........................559
25.l2Formatting Query Output .,............... 5A
Solved Exercises ................. 563
Chapter - 26 SQL Functions 579-605

26.1 Introduction.............. ......................... 579
26.2 Single Row functions ................... ...... 579
26.2.1 Character Functions. ......... 579
26.2.l.l SELECTClauseswithStringFunctions........... ........................585
26.2.2 Number Fnnctions ....................... 586
26.2.3 Workingwith Dates ........... ..........,......... 589
26.2.3.1 Arithmetic with Dates .................... 590
26.2.3.2 Date Functions ................... ........... 590
26.2.4Conversion Functions ................ ........... 593
26.2.5DECODE Function and its Usuage ........ 599
26.3 Nesting Functions ........ 600
Revielv Questions ............... 603
Chapter - 27 Multiple Tables and Sub-Queries 606-633

27.1 Introduction.............. ......................... 606
21 .2Tables and Column Names ............ ..... 606
27.3 Relating Multiple tablos ........... .......... 606
27.4\Yhatis Join ? ............... fi7
27.5 Cartesian Product ......... ffi7
27.6 Types of Join ................ 608
27.6.1 Equi-join ...".,...... ....,................. 608
27 .6.1.1Additional Search Conditions Using die AND Operator ......... 610
27,6.1.2 UsingTable Aiiases ...................... 610
27.6.1.3 Joining I\4ore than Two Tables ...... 6ll
27.6.2Non-equi-join.......... .............613
27.6.3 Outerjoin .",............ ........... 614
27.6.4 Selfjoin .................. ........... 616
27.7 Sub-Queries .............. ......... 616
27.8 Cuidelines for Using Sub-Quelies ...... 617
(-rxlli)
.---------------7
27.9 Types of Sub-Queries ................. ...,... 6lj

27.9.1 Single Row Sub-Query and its Execution ................... 618
21 .9.2Mlltiple R ow Sub-Query and its Execurion ..".."."....... ...................... 619
27 .9.3 .ld'altiple Column Sub-Query and its Execution ......"........... ............". 621
27.10 Creatirtg a Tabie i.Jsing a Sub-Query .........,........... 621
27.11CopyingRowsfiomAnotherTable......".,... ...........622
27.12Deleting Rows Based on Cr-rndition from Another Table ........... ..................... 623
27.13 Updating R.ows Based on Another Table...."....... ....................... 624
27.14The LINION clause ........... ................ 624
27.15 Insefting Date Values into Tabie ...... A5
2l.l6Use of Substitution Variatrle to [nsert \hlues ........625
27.11 Daiabase Transactions ............,... ......................... O7
27.17.1COI\4MIT ..............."........ 62',7
27.17:2RALLBACK ..............".....621
Revie'rv Questions .......,....... 631
Cha-pter - 28 Creating Views and Privileges.............. 634-642
28.1 Introduction.............. ......................... 634
28.2Database Objects .-........634
28.3 Database Object Narning Rules......... ...................... 634
28.4 SimpleViewsandComplexViews .......64
28.5 The CREATE VIEW Cornmand .......... 635
28.6 Retrieving Data liom a Vierv ......."."..... 635
28.7QueryingaVierv.....;............... ............ 636
28.8 Modifuing a View .......... ..................... 636
28.9ComplexView............ .........................636
28. 0 Rules for Performing DML Operations on a View .....
1 .................. 637
2 8. I Drppping Views ... ...
1
". .. ..................,... 637
28,l2What is User ? .,................ ...............637
28.13 Creating Users, Granting and Revoking Privileges ..................... 637
28.14 Referencing Another User Table ...... 63g
28.15 The Creating and Dropping Synonyms ,................ 63g
28.l6RenaminganObject .........................639
2 8. 7 Truncating a Table
1
...... 639
28,18 Adding aCommentto aTable .......... ffi
Solved Exercises ...,......."..... 640
Sample Froject - Nlath Test........... .643-650
Introduction ......................... &3
Source Listing of Math Test Project." ........ il6
fonnl(MathTest.frm) ............ &6
Executing Math Test Project ..................... 650
Appendices ................ .......651-651
Appendix A - SQL xPlus Editing Commands ................" 651
Appendix B - SQL xPlus File Commands ....................... 651
(xxiv)
-
Chapter - 1
Evolutisn cf Csmputers
1.1 lntroduction
Computer is definerj in the Oxford dictionary as"'An cnrtontatic electroni.c appdrotus frr nruking culct.rlrt!ior'rs
or controlling operalions tiiut cn'e ex7tressible in tnuilerictti or logica! terins".
What is Computer ?
In simple words computer is detined as an electronic device to do arithmetic or non-arithrnetic operations-
process data with the help of ihe prograitls to soive thc given problem. Ccmputer is an eiectronic rnaclrinc. with
sonre pechanical facilities and is mainly used for Data Processing. It performs the arithmetical ancl logical
operations on the input daia and gives the desilerl ouiput. But in between the inpLrt and output therc is
sometbing called processing. lvhich carries out calculations otr data in the i-orm ol-nlttttbers. It takes rarv data
and processes it to give resriit" Input data is fed into tlre conlputel'through input dc'vice (ke1'board ctc ) attd
output is received through outpui device (printer, scteen e/c,).
Beingarnachine,cciinputerwill notperformindependentl;,orcreatively. ltwilldoonly,whatisinstructed
io do in a specific term. lt is based on a conlplex technology, but works on a sirnple principle as lbllou's :
Fig. 1.1 Simple tnputlOutput System.
The basic function peifonned by a computer is the execution of prograrn. A prograrr is a seqttence of
in
instructions, which operates on data to perform ceftain tasks. ln today digitai computer data is repleserrted
binary form using 0 and I rvhich is called binary digits or bits. In general computer eight bits are used to
represent a character internally. T'his allows LLp to 28 - 256 different iterns to be represented uniquely.-fhis
collection of eight bits is called a byte.
1.2 History of Computers

Essentiatly there are three kinds of calcLrlating devices' vz., Manual,
Mechanical, and Automatic. The eariiest devioe that qualifies as a digital
computer is the "abacus" also ktlown as "l;tlroban"
Abacus. Abacus is a frame with bead s strung on wire or rods'
Arithnietic calculations are pet'tbrtned by rianipulating the beads'
This is supposed to be developed by the Chinese during 5000 B C. and
lool<s as shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2 Chinese Abacus'
(1)
Saraqwati lnformaties practices (Xl)
It consists ot'wooden frarne with beacls strung on wires and rocls with a horizontal bar dividine
each wire
into trvc portions - heaven anC eaith. lnstead o{. l0 beads on each
wire as in the Russian abacus. the Chinese
abacus has i'ive treads on the heaven sidr: iulc hl/o on the eafih side. A bqad on
the heavqn side had a po\ryer
of i and a bead on the ear"th side a power of 2. The calcrilations were perfonLred by mpvinq
the beads tor.l,ards
the horizontal bar.
Na;:ier's Eones. Napie r's Eorres were rieviced by a Scottish rnatiiernatician John Napier
, in l6l ?. This is a
sef of eievcn botres - each bone has four tace-s 'arith numtrers itrscribed on
them in such a way that hy piacing
the bones side by- side, product-t end quotients oilarge numbers c.an be oblained. lncj,ler:iailyNapierinventej
the k:garithnls u'hich g,ave .way to the invontion uf the sliCc mle.
Otlghtred's Slitle Rule. Irlai:ie'r''s Iogariilims becanic- the basis for another famoin lnvQntion, na5rel1,, ,,Slicie
Rule". The siide rule was inr..ented br, Wiliram Cughtre,J, a tsritish mathematician, in 1620
A.D. A sunple sli,lc
rule consists of, two graduated scales. one of which slides unon the other. 81, suilabty aligning
one scale
against the other we can obtairi products quotients or other functions.
Iig. 1.3 Stide Rute.

Pascal's Arithmetic Engine. In 1542 A.D., i'amous French mathematician Blaise pascal
invented a device
called "Arithmetic Engine". This was the first successful rnechanical calculator. It
had a complex arrangement
of wheels and gears, and windows for display of numbers"
Leitrnitz Stepped Reckoner. In 167 I A. D., the German nrat!-rematician Gottlried Vbn
Leibnitz invented a
calculatirl3 tnachitte called "steppecl Reckoner". -fhis machine could acid, subtract,
multiply, tiivirie and fincl
square roots,
Babbage's Anall'tical Engine. ln 18i5 A.D,, Charles Babbage, an Engiish mathematician,
designed on
paper all "Analyical Engine". He coulcl not actually produce it because
the technology of that time was not
advanced enough. Babbage's analytical engine has a great significance in
th, ristory, #computers because it
had in its design all the fundamental concepts of the modern digital cornputers.
Due to this reason, Charles.
Babbage is known as "Father" of modern digital computer.
In the eariy' lgth centuqv. a Irrench rran. Joseph Jaquart. invented a loom that
used punched cards to
automatically'colltro. From that dai', punched cards are used to transmit information
to and flom some colnputers.
Jaquard's idea of storing a sequence of instructions on the cards is also
conceptually similar to modern
computer programs.
A major breakthroughofthe lgth century occuredwhenHerman Ftrollerith, young
a mathemarician employed
by ihe Census Bureau of the tJSA, used punched cards to tabulate the
USA Census of 1g90. During the
early of the 20th century IBM (lnternationaI Business Machines Corporal.ion)
and
other m.arrutacturers
produced a varief; of computing devices for business use. The
best of these devices rvas Mark-l deveioped in
1944 b1 liowards Aiken in collaboration witlr IBM. Although a0 awesome piece
of technology, the slowness of
the N{ark-I's electromechatrical components made it quickly absolute in
ihe face of a more advancea technologv
in electrorrics. Nevenh:less, this;riachine wes the best knorvn computer
built befbre 1945 and it may be
regarded as the first rcalization olBabbage's analytical engine.
1.3 Generations of Computers

The term generation is used to general!y characterise fhe rrrajor develcpments
in rhe ccrmputer inclustry. llence,
there is no clear'cttt separating line bet',1'een the ge nerationr. T*o g.rrrutions
mav ovsrlap in iheir tenures and
technclogies Basicaliy, the term gerreratit-rn was used to distinguish between
diftbrent hardrvar.e t..frr"f"_oi...
1.3.1 First Generation of Colnputers
EckertandMauchlycJevelopedthefirstelectroniccoinputerENlAC(ElectronicNumericai
Integrator apdCalculator)
irl 1946 in the USA. lt rrsed high-spced vacuuin,tLrbes as srvitching devices
and had a ver1. small r-riemorv. The
Evolution of Computers
ENIAC took about 200 mrqo-secoiids to add iwo digits anci about 2400 ruicro-seconds to fessor,
John V Neumann proposed *re corceptof stored prograrnrning i.e.. the storage I in the
memory of the cornputer alon-s with the data. Using this principle, Professor Marvi:ive Wrlkes der,eloped a
computer in 19u19 kncwn as EDSAC (Electronic Deiay Storage Automatic Calcuiator).
1It used rnercury cielay lines for storage. The first cominercial productiorr of stored electronic computers
wasUNIVAC (UNfVersaL Autornatic Conrputer). During thispeuod.computer pro,+.uruning was mairrl.y cione in
the machine language. Assenibiy ialrguage was introduced during the early fifiiest
Charactenstics of First Genelalion cf Cornputers :
3 Coutinuous l-ttiLintenarrr:e rcquired. -"

U Pulched-card and paper-tace secondary storage.
I Dump primary storage
tr l\lachine and symboiic ianguage pro-gramnring.
D Different computers for sgientrfic and business
applications.
tr Batch processing"
tr Generated considerable heat.
3 Poorreliability.
tr Limited intenral slor'age capacity.
f, First commerciai computer to be use'd.
tr Slow inputioutput opetations. "'-
E Computer programmed with rnachine language.
Examples of first generation oomputels include
ENIAC, EDV,A.C, EDSAC and LTNIVAC I. Fig. 1.4 Vacuurn tubes.
1.3.2 Second Generation of Cornputers

($econd generation of computers emerged arounC 1959 rviththe usage of transistors instead of vacuum tubes.
fransistors made of germanium semiconductor material were higtrIfi:eliable as compared to tubes
since they had no filarnent to burn.\Thus switching circuits for computers made with transistors were
about 10 times more reliable, 10 t{mes faster despite one tenth po*"., occupied about one-tenth
space and were 10 times cheaper when compared with computers incorporating vacuum tubes{Another
major breakthrough during this period uras the inyention of magnetic core for storage. They were
used to construct large random access nemories. Magnetic disk storage was aiso developed during
this period. The higher reliability of computers and iarge memory availability led to the
development of hig[iEvel languagcs like FOR.TRAN, COBOI-, ALGOL, SNOBOL erc. Good batch
processing operating syStems emerged dutiug tlie second generafion. Comrirercial applications iike
Payroll, Inventory Control, Ploductiorr Flanning and General Ledger System were developed.
Chalac..teristics of Seconil Generation of Computers :
3 Trirnsistor circuit used core element.

a, Magnetic-core primary' st1.)ra gc.
a Secondary storage 0r tapes.
D Greater reliability and speed.
D Transistors replaced vacuum tubes.
tr Reduced generated heat.
D Smaller and rnore reliable.
o Faster than first generation comDuters
E Required less power to operate.
o Development of magnetic ilisk storage. F ig. 1.5 'ltansistors.
Saraswati lnf ormatics Practiees
tr lJigh-level procedural ianguages FoRlian and coBol were userj.
n Con:puters programnted in high level languages.
Examples of secorid generarion compurers include IBI!{-700 and 1401, ATLAS
and ICI- i g0 | .
1.3.3 Third Generation of Computers

Thc ihird generation of computers began in 1965 with germanium transistors being
replaced by silicon
transistors. The conirol circuits comprised small-scale integrated circuits, consisting
oflransistors, resisto-pS
and capacitors, grown on a single chip of
s il icon, e lirninating wired interconne cti on s
betweeir components. Thus, a desired circuit
could be fabricatecl on a tiny piece of silicon
rather than assembling several discrete
Silicon wafer
cornponents into the same circuit. Hundreds
or even thousands of transistors could be
fabricated on a single wafer of silicon. In A Gate
addition, these fabricated transistors could
be connected with process of meialisation to
form iogic circuits on the same chip. trtrtrtrtrtr Gate
Fig. 1.6 Wafer, Chip and Gate.

An integrated circuit is constructed on a thin rvafer of silicon that is diviCed into a matrix
of small areas (of
sizes of the order of a few square miltimeters). An identical circuit pattern
is fabricated on eacii of these areas
and the wafer is then broken into chips, as shor.r,n in Fig. i.6. Eachof
these chips consists of several gates, a
useful logic component and a number of input and output connection points. Each
of these chips can be
packaged separately in a housing to protect it. In addition, this housrng prol,ides
a number ofpins for connecting
these chips rvith other devices or circuits. The pins of these pu"tug"i can
be provided i1 iwo ways.
tr In two parallel rows with 0.1 inch spacing between two adjacen,,ins in each row. The package
is
called Dual In-line package (DIp).
O In case, more than hundred pins.are required then, Pin Gid Array (pGA), where pins
are arranged in
anay of rows and columns, rvith spacing between two adjacent pin of 0. I inch.
Integated Circuit
0.1 inch
Fig. 1.7 (a) A 24-pin Duat In-line package (DIp).
'.{ this g.n.j1r,:I: size of main memory reached about 100 megabytes.:The combined effects of'high
memorv, porverftll CPt-i and large disk memories led to the development of T'irne
Shared operating Systerns.
high level languages were developed dui ing this period like FORTRAN
Uorher
'Man) lmportant on-line s)'stems like airline reservation, IV COBo L-lg.pLll etc.
dynamic production contro-I, interactive qucry
ahd inte-grated data base managernent systerns emerged on the globai software
sccnario.
0.1ineh Integrated Circuit

Chip
ooo
ooo
a*o
QOO
ooQ
ooo
QOOOr)OOOOOGOO
Or).IOOOOC C,OOOL)
ooLjcoo60( Pin
Fig. 1.7 (b) 144-pin Pin Grid Array (PGA) packages.
and othcr electronic components on a silicon crystal.
s).
C Magnetic disk secondary storage.
O Qa-line. real time processing.
fL"M ulti-programming operating system.
O Easter than previous generation computers.
El-'inaproved input and output devices.
EL-- Concept of multi-programining was used.
C[. 4etter storage devices (tapes).
Examples ofthird generation computers include IBIVI/360/370, NCR 395 and Burroughs 86500.
1.3.4 Fourth Generation of Computers

ifne tountr generation ( 197 I - | 985 ) of compute
Yery Large Scale lntegrated circuits (VLSlc)
advent of microprocessors led to two distinct adva
was the development of personal colnputei:s through
a low cost. high capacity backup peripheralsi
The other aclvancement of development/was the decentralisation of computer organisation. Individual
micropl'ocessor controlled the terminals and peripheral devic CPU to concentrate on
processing activities.{Disk nremory became very large. A s ent in software was the
developrncntofthe rnosiEtnbitious language ADA. Another deve d of interactive graphics.'
Charpeteristics of Fourth Generation of Computers : '

tr luarye scale and very large scale integrated circuits.
EI-. Dramatic rise in hardware costs.
O - $etni-conductorprimarirstorage.
EI Development of nricrocolxputer cr personal computer'
3 Increased costs of software.
tr Developnrent of electronic spreadsheets.
E' Data base management systerns.
El--' ,Application developrnent by trsers.
El-*-iJ ser-fr iendly software.
n Distributed data processing.
6_5a
n Ci"aphics ierminals.
O L-ttirrpacl size tlur f,aster speecls cf processing.
D hXicroprocessor useC.
1 .3.4.'! Semiconduetor Mernories
lnitially, the IC technology was used for constructing the prccessor, but soon, it was realised that the
same
technoiogy could be used for coristructic.,n of,memory. Ihe first memory chip rvas constructed in
1970 and
could hold 256 bits. Although the cost of this chip was high, yet gradually, the cost of semiconductor
memory
came dowtr 1'lre n'iemory capacity per chip has increased to iK, 4K, I6K,256I( and finaily, to 1M bits.
1.3.4.2 Microprocessors
As a large nurnber uf cornponents was
inserted inro a single chip, ferver chips INTEI-
u,ere neededto construct a single 8080
processor. Intel achier,'ed the
breakthrough of puiting all the
components on a single chip in 1971.
16 bit cPu
The single chip processor is knovl.n 32 bit cPU
i 6 bit data
as a nticroprocessot.. Th.e Iniel 4004 bit data
16
u,as the first tnicroprocessor, it was a (PC/Ar)
prirnitive 80286
icroprocessor designed for
rn
a specific applicar-ion. Intel 8C80, which 16 tritCPU 32 bitcPU
80386
carne in i974, u,as the fir.st generai- 8 bit data AT/386
pLrrpcse tntcroprocessor. It was the path (t[Jtr,{ PC)
32 bitcPU
first 8-bir microprocessoi: Motoi-ola is
another rrartr.r lacturei' in th is fi eld. 12 bit I 64 bit
Fig. 1,8 lntel microprocessor fami!v.

Motorola's 68000 is a32bitrnicroprocessor. P6, which was announced by Intel 1995, can process
64 bit of
data at a tirre. Fig. 1.8 gives the farnilies oilntel microprocessors.
1.3.5 Future Generations of Computers

Computer scientisis and engineers are now talking about developing fifth generation
computers that can
think The errphasis is now shifting from developing reliable. faster and smaller but dumb rnachines
to more
irrtelligent trachines. An effective fifth-generation computer rvould be highly
complex ancl intelligent electronic
device conceiveci r,vitli the idea of intelligence (called Artificial Inteiligence
or AI) rvithout goingthrough
the various stages of,technical developrnent.
Although the semicondtrctor memor), technologies were cieveloped, yet the VLSI technology
is still
evolving and more pou'erful nricrclprcrcessors and more storage rpu.* u.. being added
into a single chip. The
colltcirllorary colnputers are characterised as fbur th generation computers. Some researchers
classiflz them as
fifth generation computers. The boundary betra,een fourlh generation and fifth generation
is still very blurred
therelore. rnany reasearchers still believe that we are in the fourlh generation.
Chalactcristics of Future Ceneration ol.Conrpulers :
m Organic cirips,
n Decreasing costs of softr,r,are
C Decreasing costs of harclware
tr Vast itnprovements in the price-perfonxance ratto.
A Persor,al computers to be used.
O Large data storage facility.
D Artihciallntelligence.
f, High speed processing.
tr Under development in the USA, Japan and the UK.
1.4 Characteristics of a Computer
The main characteristics of a computer are:
Speed. Computer executes one instruction at a time. It can add and subtract numbers, compare characters to
detennine matching and copy nurnbers and characters. There is nothing new in these operations. But the
significant point is the computer's speed whjch is measured in clock cycles Le., Hertz (Hz). The time
required by the computer to execute such instruction is from few microseconds to a few nanoseconds.
Accuracy. In addition to the speed, computers are very accul'ate. The circuits in a computer have electronic
parts which do not have wear and tear. Performing their millions of operations per second, these circuits
can run errorless for days together. lf the input data is valid and the program is correct and reliable, then the
computer will always produce an accurate result.
Storage and Retrieval. Both data and program can be stored in a corlputer, ifthey are required for future use.
Wherrever required, both may be quickly retrieved and used by the user for future references.
Repeated Processing Capability. Computer processing involves manipulating the symbols that represent
things required by the user. People have been using character, number and the other symbols for thousands
of years and computer processing simplifies this human task by providing the necessary speed and
accuracy.
Tirne Factor. Response time is greatly reduced while the total time spent in various decision making activities
is reduced to aminimum.
Permanent. In a computerised system a very large amount of data can be stored for future reference. It also
redtices paper work as all the information is stored in the computer itself.
Quick Decision. Problems are handled more easily by using various operations research models, wtrich
enables the user to take quick decision as the time for retrieval of information is very fast.
Secrecy. In a computerised system more secrecy is observed as compared to manual s)'stem. Also chances ot'
leakage of classified information are reduced.
Above all, the computer provides fast access to information and generates reports in no time.
1.5 Hardware and Software
Cornputer data processing involves equipments that can perform the tblloiving function: data preparation;
input to the computer; computation, control and primary storage; secondary storage and output from the
computer. Equipment, which is connected directly to the computer, is termed as "on-line" whereas equipment,
which is used separately and is not connected, is called "ofl'-line".
Soffrvare
Fig. 1.9 Computer hardware and software.
Saraswati lnforrr*atlcs Practices (Xl)
Software is a set of instnictiorts that directs the computer- to orocess informatir-rn. These instructions are
cailed prograrns. R/ithor-rt snftware , the c-.omputer cannot work. A conimonll'used annlogy is that the computer
hardware is the engine, while tire ooftware is the fuel that allows the engine to opelate. Without software the
hardware would be useless. There are trvo types of software available for computer : systern softu,are and
application softwa-re.
1.6 Functional Units of Computer

Computer is also a type of system because it is a group of integrated parts, vrhich is used to solve any general-
purpose probiem by executing the suitable prclgram. The organization"q of computer system components are
showninF-rg. LI0.
Main memorv
Operationai register
Arithmetic
Lcgic Unit
Control Unit
Input / Output
Unit
Fig. 1.10 Functional units of computer.
1.6.1 lnpuUOutput Unit

Computer uses input devices for data entry purpcses. Some input devices aliow direct communication between
user and computer. While others require data to be recorded on an input medium such as magnetizabie material.
Devices connected directiy to a computer ar-e said to be on-line devices. mouse, and iight pen, touch screen are
all on-line devices.
Fig. 1.11 Input devices.
Similar to input device, outpui devices are also the interface between user and the computer. These
devices take machine coded output results trom the processor and conterl them into a form that can be used
by human beings. In personai computer display screens and printers are the commonly used output devices.
Lar-eer and faster printers, magnetic tapes and l.uge disk units often accept the output of larger systems.
Fig. 1.12 OutPut devices.
1.6.2 CPU
Central processing unit is the heart of any computer system. It consists of
primary
memory unit, arithmetic logic unit and control unit.
Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU)

The arithmetic logic units in computers are capable of performing addition, subtraction,
division and muliiplication as well as some "logical operations". The control units tell
the arithmetic-logic unit which operation to petform and then see that the necessary
numbers are supplied. The arithmetic element can be compared to the calculating
machines.
An arithmetic logic unit is a digital circuit that performs a set of arithmetic micro
operations of a set of logic micro-operations. The ALU has a number of
selection
lines to select a particular micro-operation in the unit'
Fig. 1.13 Components of CPU.
ControlUnit(CU)
control section controls all hardware opefations, i.e., those of input output
units, storage an ite insffuctions
from main stora ' interPrets the
insffuctions and giving signals
(or commands) to the appropriate hardware devices'
Fig.1.14 Controlunit.
Memory
used to store the information that will
The memory or storage section of the computer consrsts of the devices
of the computer is also used to hold both intermediate
program. Memory devices are constructed so that it is
n.th- met rory. The time required to obtai' information
type of device used to-store the information' Comtloa
magnetic disks'
storage devices are integrated circuit memories, magnetic tape,
and
in any digital computer since it is needed for storing the
Also, the memory unit is an essential
"o.npon"it directly with the cPU is called the
programs that are ex,ecuted by the cPU. The memory unit that communicates
auxiliary memory' Only programs and data
main memory and devices that provide backup stoiage are called
currentlv used by the processor reside in main memory'
Memory"unu"diuid"dintotwocategoriesi.e.,HmaryMemoryandSecondaryMemory.
10 Saraswatilnformatics practices (Xl)
1.7 Main Memory
Memory also called primary storage, is where data and instructions are stored during processing by the
microprocessor. The mernory or storage section of the computer consists of the devices used to store the
information that will be used during the computations. The memory section of the computer is also used to hold
both intermediate and final results as the computer proceeds through the program. Memory devices are
constructed so that it is possible for the control unit to obtain any information from the memory. The time
required to obtain information may vary somewhat, however, and is determined by the type of device used to
store the information. Common storage devices are integrated circuit memories, magnetic tape, and magnetic
disks.
Also, the memory unit is an essential component in any digital computer since it is needed for storing the
programs that are executed by the CPU. The memory unit that communicates directly with the CpU is called the
main memory and devices that provide backup storage are called auxiliary memory. Only programs and data
currently used by the processor reside in main memory.
There zrretwo types of memory read-onlymemory (ROM) and random-accessmemory (RAM).
1.7.1 Read Only Memory (ROM)

A read-only memory @OM), as tire name implies, is a memory unit that performs the read operation only; it does
not have a write capability. This implies that the binary information stored
in a ROM is made pe:.;nanent during the hardware production of the unit
and cannot be altered by writing different words into it. while a RAM is
a general-purpose device whose contents can be altered during the
computational process, a RoM is restricted to reading words that are
permanently stored within the unit.
Fig. 1.15 Read Only Memory.

Read Only Memory is a type of memory chip that we can read only and cannot write on it. ROM provides
pemanent storage for program instructions. The most important ROM chip in any computer is ROM
BIOS
(Basic InpuVOutput System). ROM is most often used in microprocessors that
always execute the same
program' such as BOOT STRAP LOADER. A ROM is prepared by the manufacturer and cannot
be altered once
the chip is mad-e. Another disadvantage of RoM is that they are slow. When the microprocessor requisite
data
from ROM memory the data is almost available immediately, it takes time for chips to respond. The
ROM
memory is again classified as :
tr PROM (Programmable Read Only MemoryJ. A control memory in which stored information can be
altered, but not as easily as in ordinary memory. In some PROMs, the contents may be erased by
prolonged (minute's) application of ultraviolet light, and then rewritten. Once operations to be
performed have been written into a PROM chip, they are pernanent and cannot be altered.
D EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory). This type of ROM can be erased and
programmed with the help of special equipment. An EPROM has a window on its top, which if
exposed to ultraviolet light, allows data to be erased. Most EPROM's have a label covering the
window.
D EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programm.abte ROM). This type of ROM is required to be removed
from its socket to be erased and reprogrammed.
tr [lash EPROM. This is the latest type of ROM, which is becoming very popular. By running a special
program' a manufacturer can make changes to the flash EPROM while it remains in the pC.
1.7.2Random Access Memory GAM)

RAivI chip is made with metal-oxide semiconductor (MoS). We can select any location on
this chip randomly
and can use it to store directly, retrieve data and instructions. A memory unit is a collection
of storage registers,
together with the associated circuits needed to ffansfer information in
and out of the registers. Memory registers can be accessed for
information transfer as required and hence the name random-access
memory, abbreviated RAM.
Fig. 1.16 Random Access Memory.
A memory unit stores binary information in-groups Row addresses Array of storage cell circuits
of bits called words. Each word is stored in one memory
register. A word in memory is an entity of n bits that
0 00m ffiffiffimffiffiffi
move in and out of thc memory unit. A word of eight bits 1 0m1 mffiEHK$ffi
is sometimes called a byte. A memory is a group of 0's ] MIO EEEfrf;EE
and 1's and may represent a number, an instruction code, 3 mll &88ff1ts#
alphanumeric characters, or any other binary-coded 4 0100+EffiBSrX&
information. RAM Chips is classified as (a) Dynamic
s -4tIXEEnffi
0101
RAM and (b) Static RAM.
Dynamic RAM
6 01104illEsHnffi
7 0111
The storage cell circuits in dynamic RAM chips contain Write/read
a transistor that acts in much the same way as a mechanical circuitry to
on-off light switch and a capacitor that's capable of control data
storing an electric charge. Depending on the switching input/output
O*O-O-Q-
action of the transistor, the capacitors either contains no -Oi*OOi-
charge (0 bits) or hold a charge (1 bit). In figure the right 5555oooo
-r-l*
side shows 64 bits arranged in a section of a chip. 0r234567

Fig. 1.17 An addressing block of RAM'
Since the charge on the capacitor, tends to "leak off', provision is made to
periodically "regenerate" or
refresh the storage charge. A dynamic RAM chip thus provides volatile storage
i.e-,the data stored is lost in
the event of a power failure.
Static BAM
Static RAM chips are also volatile in nature, but as long as they are supplied
with power' they need not require
it takes more transistors and other devices to store
special ."g"r".uto. circuits to retain the stored data. Since
and take up more space for a given storage capaclfy
a bit in a static RAM, these chips are more complicated
applications, while Dynamic RAM's are used
than dynamic RAM's. Static RAM's are thus ur"d i., specialized
to the volatile nature of these storage elements' a
in the primary storage sections of most computers. Due
in larger computer systems.
ba:kup unintemrpted power system (uPS) is often found
1.8 SecondarY Storage Devices

the information contained in temporatl
Secondary storage devices provide a facility for permanently storing
common type of secondary storage
memory. There are several types of secondary storage devices' The most
(for example, a business letter) or a
device is a disk. The disk is the permanent storage rnedium for either data
disk, hard disk, CD-ROM'Zip dive' etc '
software program (for example, a word processor;. For example, floppy
memory, is measured in Kilo Bytes
The amount of data a disk can hold is called disk capacity. Disk capacity, like
(KB), MegaBytes (MB) and GigaBltes (GB).
a^
tz Sara
Solved Exercises
QI. What is computer ?

Ans' Computer is an electronic device to do arithmetic or non-arithmetic operations- process
data with the help
ofprogram
Q2. Explain two parts of CpU.
Ans. CPU two parts ;
has
(a) ControlUnit (CU)
Control section controls aii hardware operations, l.e., those ofinput output
units, storage and ofthe
processor itself. It fetches the requisite instructions from
main storage, store it in a number of
special registers, interprets the instructioris and courses the instructions
to be executed by giving
signais (orconrmands) to the appropriate hardware devices.
(D) Adthmetic Logic Unir(ALU)
The arithmetic logie units tn computers are capable of performing addition,
subtraction, division and
multiplication as well as soire "logical operations".
Q3. What is Pascal's Arithrnetic Engine ?
Ans' In1642A'D.,famousFrenehmathematicianBlaisePascal inventedadevicecalled,ArithrneticEngine,,.
This rvas the first successfiti rnechanical calculator. It had a complex
arrangement of whee ls and gears,
and windows for display of numbers.
Q4. What are the main characteristics of a computer ?
Ans' Main characteristies of a computer are speed. accuracy, reriability
etc,
Q5. which teci,nology is used in the second generation of cornputeis ?
Ans, The transistcr is used in second generatiJn of computers.
Q6. Give some characteristics of first generation colnputers.
Ans' First selleration compuiei's used vacuum tubes and had a very small
menrory. It used mercury tleiay lines
for storage.
Q7. Give tr,vo nrajor innovations in first generation computers.
Ans' The two ntajot' innovations of first generation computers are Computer
- programs stored in the computer
rneinory and Vacuurn tubes fo internal processing.
Q8. Cive trvo lrajor innovations in second generation computers.
Ans' The trvo major innovations of second generation computers
are
transistors in place of vacuurn tubes and Magnetic core memory.
- Use of solid-state device such as
Q9. Cive two rnajor innovations in third generation computel.s.

Ans' l'he two lrajor innovations of third generation computers
lnput-output devices.
are - Integrated circuitry and Faster
Qt 0. Define microprocessors.
Ans' Microprocessor is a coinplete processor constructed
on a single chip using VLSI technology.
Intel and Motorola ate two popular Microprcrcessors.
Qll" Distingirish between har<Jware and softwaie.
Ans' Hardware' he different devices artached to the cornputer vrhich
can be touched are called harcware.
Software' Software is a set of instructions that directs the computer
to process information.
Ql2. What is hardware ?
Ans' AII physicai, electrical, eiectronic components of the cornputer
systern are ret-erred as hardware.
QI3" Distinguish between hardrval.e and softlvare.
''{ns' Hardware'' he different rle vices attached to the computeq rvhich can 'be touched, are-called hardware.
software' software is a set of instructions that direets tlie cornputer proccss
to infonnation.That is, the
term software is used to dcscl'ibe progranr sets neecled tc
operate an inforrnation processlng system.
T'hese programs (also called softw'ar e) give life
to the circultry of cc;li;rruier hardware. lt consists of a
seqtlenee of instructions ancl decision r.,,1.. that direct
the cornputer in e,tecuting a tasl<.
-9iven
Evolution of Computers 13
Ql4. What are the functions of computer ?

Ans. The basic function performed b),a conrputer is the execution of users'instructions. It works as a data
processor that processes data to form information. This undergoes the input-process-output cycle. It
takes some data or instruction as input, process it according to given instruction and gives output as
instructed.
Ql5. Define the components of the computer systom.
Ans. Components of computer described below :
CPU-The Central Processing Unit also calied, as Processor is the main part of computer, which processes
data ol instructions given by user.
CU-Control Unit is the part of CPU, which controls and supervises the task performed by computer.
AlU-Arithmetic Logic Unit is the part of CPU, which performs the arithmetic and logic operations.
Input Units-This is the part of Computer, using this we can feed data or instructions to the computer. For
example, keyboard, mouse e/c.
Output Units-This is the part of Computer, using this we aan take computed results. For example, VDU.
Printers, Plotters etc.
Primary Mernory-The main mernory holds the data and instructions as well as intermediate outputs
during processing. This is temporary in nature and has limited capacity.
Secondary Memory-This is permanent memory of computer. It can store large volume of information
permanently. This is also known as auxiliary memory.
Ql5. Explain the vari6usfunctions of ALU.
Al's. tis unit of computer system performs arithmetical and logical operations on which much of computer
program is based. Special math processors are available on the computer, which supplement the main
arithmetical unit to perform scientific notation. In the arithmetical operations, addition, subtraction,
multiplication, division, exponent and logical operations or comparison are performed.
Ql7. What is the expanded form of RAM ?
Ans. RAM stands for Random Access Mernory.
Ql8. tn which era the Abacus was developed ?
Ans. The Abacus was developed 5000 BC.
Ql9. Give at least three examples of input and output units each.
Ans. Input units are keyboard, mouse, joystick etc. and Output units are printers, plotters and VDU.
Q20. List the main components of the computer system.
Ans. The miin components of computers are{PU, CU, ALU, Primary l{emory Input Devices, Output Devices,
and Secondary Storage.
Q2l. What is RAM ?
Ans. RAM is Random Access memory. RAM chip is made with metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS).
We can select any 1<.rcation on this chip randomly and also we can use it to store directiy, retrieve data and
instructions.
Q22. Give some chardteristics of first generation computer.
Ans. First'genel?ttion computer used vacuum tubes and had a very small memory. It used mercury delay lines
for storage.
Q23. How many parts of primary memory are there ? Write names.
Ans. There are two parts of primary memory-RAM and ROM.
Q24. Define RAM.
Ans. RAM is the pait of primary memory. In this memory any cell can be accessed from any desired random
location. Information can be read from and wriften into in RAM.
Q25. Definetheterm ROM.
Ans. This is the part of primary memory. In this memory information can only be read from. No write operation
can take place in ROM.
14 Saraswati lnformatics practices (Xl)
Q26. What is PROM ?
Ans. PROM is Programmable Read only Memory that can be programmed once.
Q27. What do you mean by EpROM and EEpROM ?
Atts' FPRoM is Erasable Programmable Read only Memory that can be erased as well as reprogralnmed.
And
EEPROM is Electrically Erasable programmable Read Only Memory.
Q28. Name two types of RAM.
Ans. Dynamic RAM and Static RAM.
Q29. Write the types of ROM memory ?
Ans. There are three types of ROM pROM, EPROM, and EEpROM.
-
Q30. Which memory is volatile in nature ?
Ans. RAM is volatile memory.
Q31. Make comparison between Static RAM and Dy,namic RAM.
Ans. Static RAMs take up more space for a given storage capacity than do dynamic RAMs. Static RAMs
are
used in specialized applications while dy^ramic RAMs are used in the primary storage sections
of most
computers' The static RAM is easier to use and has shorter read and write cycles compared
to dynamic
RAM.
Q32. What is the difference between RAM and ROM ?
Ans. RAM ROM

It. Stands Random Access Memory 1. Stands Read Only Memoy
12. Keeps operaring system. application 2. Contains programs booting up computer
prograrns, data in use
3. Data can be modified (changed and 3. Data cannot be modified (read-only)
erased)
4. Volatile (loses data when computer is 4. Non-volatile (retains data when computer is
turned off) turned off)
5. Cheaper 5 More expensive
6. Higher amounts recommended 6 Amount can be ignored and generally not usable
upto 64-256 MB) in application programs.
Q33, Explain the function of ROM, W memory a_nd ar*iliaryrn.rnory.
Ans' RoM and R/W memory i e., RAM is the paft of main memory ofihe computer system. RoM stores some
progral-ns, which are executed if one is using the computer system.
Programs like checking the serviceability
of the sub systems referred to as diagnostics programs, programs which enable h-andling
of a few
peripheral devices for input/output like, keyboard, monitor etc.
In the Random Access Memory the use is free to read, write or execute instructions.
User can load what
he wants in the Read/Write memory. This is volatile in nature.
The auxiliary memory is used to keep information, data or instructions (programs)
for future reference.
This memory (magnetic disks, magnetic tapes, or optical disks) is permanent storage
device. The contents
of this memory do not get destroyed unless done so deliberately. rnir can also Jo.. u large amount of
information. And this is easily transportable.
Q34. Defi ne microprocessor.
Arts' Microprocessor is a complete processor constructed on a single chip using
VLSI technology. Intel and
Motorola are two popular Microprocessors.
Q35. What is the difference between
(a) Volatile memory and non-volatile memory ?
(D) Static and dynamic memory ?
Ans' (a) Volatile memory requires power all the time. It is temporary storage and normally faster than non-
volatile memories.
Evolution of Computers 15
Non-volatile memory does not require power, once the data are stored. lt is a permanent storage and
comparatively slower than volatile memory.
StaticMemory DynamicMemory
(l) Loses its signal. (,) Does not lose the signal.
(ll) Periodic referencing of (,l) No referencing.
memory is needed.
Review Questions
1. What is computer ?
2. Differentiate between hardware and software.
3. Write down the functional units of a computer.
4. What do you understand by various computer generations and how they differ from each other ?
5. Why Computer is beneficial to us ?

6. What is Abacus ?
7. Explain the contribution of Charles Babbage in the development of computer.
8. Name few input/output units of computer.
9. What do you mean by CPU ? Name its parts.
10. What is the use of memory in computer ?
11. Write down the classifications of PROM ?
12. Name some storage devices that you use daily.
13. Give some characteristics of cornputer.
14. Describe functional units of computer.
15. What is the function of control unit ?
16. Givetwotypesofmainmemory.
17. What is hardware ?
18. Distineuish between volatile and non-volatile memory.
Chapter - 2
lnpUl, Output qnd Memory
2.1 lntroduction
the operations
ways. But for
ut, processor, and output

"r.."nrJirli?:r#
rage, secondary storage, arithmetic_logic,
control
ns of computer system components are shown
in
Primary Storage Unit
Arithmetic Logic Unit
Control Unit
Fig. 2.1 Basic Organization of the Computer.

2.2lnpul, Output and Memory Devices
one communicates with a computer system
via the I/o devices interfaced to it. The
data using the keyboard on a terminal and user can enter programs and
execute the programs to obtain results.
commonly called peripherals, connected to Therefore the vo devices
a computer system provide an efficient means of communication
and the outside world. rhe following ar.
:ffi,::J::!}[#"t tr,"iusic devices that form the computer.
O Input Devices
tr Output Devices
D Memory Devices
O Secondary Storage Devices
2.2.1 lnput Devices
one communicates with a computer system
via the I/o devices interfaced to it. The input
programs and put them into a form devices take data and
the computer can process. The most common
and a mousu and others arepunched_card, input devices are a keyboard
magnetic_tape readers, etc.
The input devices feed the necessary aia
into the machine. In most general-purpose computers,
constitute the program ,urt u" ,"uo into the
the machine along with alt tire iata to be
::tfflfffJlat used in the
(16)
Keyboard
The keyboard is the most cortmon and simplest input device. It allows you to communicate with the computer.
It consists of four main areas: the function keys, the typewriter keys, the numeric keypad, and special-purpose
kcys. The central area of the keyboard contains the standard typing keys (i.e. A, B, C, D, etc") and the spacebar.
The standard keys consist ofletters, numbers, and special characters such as the semicolon and the dollar sign.
Fig.2.2 shows a sample keyboard.
Function keys Numeric pad keys
Numeric
Caps Lock key Alphabet keys Shiftkey EnterkeY

Fig.2.2 A samPle keYboard.
The keyboard is the smallest input device on the computer system. It is merely a collection of momentary
switches. The outputs of the key switches are fed to electronic circuiqv known as the keyboard encoder, which
converts them into binary-coded values. The values are then fed into the computer, which interprets the key
pressed. Thus the uses of the keyboard keys change with the type of work you are doing.
Mouse
The mouse is an input device that is used in addition to the keyboard. It is a hand-
held device that controls a pointer on the screen. When you move the mouse around
the desktop, ihe rubber-coated ball on the bottom of the mouse moves.
'Ihe ball's
movement is translated into signals that tell the computer how to move the screen
pointer. On top of the mouse are two buttons that are used to make selections from
items on the screen.
Fig. 2.3 A typical mouse.
Optical Character Reader (OCR)
It can detect characters A, B, C, D and so on by shape. It can read up to 750 documents per minute or 1500
characters/sec. OCR is quite costly because the memory
requirements are very high. OCR also employs a set of printing
characters with standard fonts that can be read by both human ew{, *{ sx JW- g_ t1
and machine readers. The machine readers are done by light
w*p exg,?{,v &* VU x.
sianning technique in which each character is illuminated by
a light source and the reflected images of the characters are
#b* XWSq&Va t* *(
analyzed in term of light dark pattem produced. Keyboard vfii ; ?t** &* *w t{f,
devices are used to give the required print quality. OCR has ***
the potential of reading even handwritten documents
straightway.
Fig. 2.4 Optical charactcrs.
The optical character readers have slightly irregular typeface as shown in the Fig. 2.4.
They can read the
characters printed by computer printers, cash registers, adding machines and typewriters.
Some readers can
also read handwritten documents. Fig. 2.3 shows some handwritten characters that
can be read by recognition
devices, most optical character readers can be used to sort out lbrms as well as to read
data into computer
storage.
Optical Mark Reader (OMR)

OMR is being used to read the answer sheet by means of light. It can read up to 150 documents per
minute.
Optical marks are commonly used for scoring tests. The optical mark reader when on-line to the
computer
systems can read up to 2,000 documents per hour. Seemingly this rate is slow but the fact
that transcription has
been eliminated, the overall time is less than those of the conventional file media.
OMR can also be used for such applications as order writing, payroll, inventory control, insurance,
questionnaires, etc. However, it is to be noted that designing the documents for OMR
is rather a tough task.
They should be simple to understand otherwise errors may result more perhaps than would occur
in using
traditional source document and keypunching from them.
Magnetic lnk Character Reader (MICB)

This system uses special ink to print characters. Special magnetic devices can decode these
characters" This
system is widely used b1' banks for processing cheque. Cheque numbers are printed
with ink containing
magnetizable particles of iron oxide. Amount may also be written with the same ink.
It can read up to only 2400
documents/min. MICR employs a system of printed characters which are easily
decipherable byiuman beings
as well as a machine reader.
There is usually special printing font to represent characters. In this font, each
character is basically
composed of vertical bars. The characters are printed in special ink, which contains
a magnetizable material.
r6ffi
Magnetic Inks
rJlury Hutrber
Fig. 2.5 MICR in bank cheque.

This method is primarily used in banking industry, and most cheques are now processed
under the MICR
approach' The data printed across the bottom of a blank cheque are recorded in MICR
from the characters
representing the bank on which the cheque is drawn, the customer's account
number and the amount of the
cheque' The cheque themselves are prepared off-line. When they are originally printed
by a printing press, the
MICR about the bank identif,rcation number as well as the data about the customer's bank
account number are
printed simultaneously. The cheques then are turned over to the proper bank customer
for use. once the
cheques have been cashed or deposited in a bank, an operator uses-an off-line
encoding machine to encode,
the amount on the cheque's bottom-right side in magnetic ink.
MICR data are used for input purposes. Unlike other media, (floppy disk and magnetic
tape), MICR can not
be used for output purposes.
The Joystick
Joystick is a screen-pointing/cursor control device' A joystick is an input
device that is used to move the cursor or other objects on the monitor.
It is
usually used with video games. A button on the top of the joystick sends
commandstothecomputer.Manyjoysticksalsohaveadditionalbuttons
for sending different commands.
Fig.2.6 Joystick.
Light Pen
Light Pen is used as a pointing device. A person can point the pen and
p"ifor. drawing of a lini or curve on the screen. It may be noted that light
pen will
pen does not emit light. The light sensitive diode at the tip of the
sense the light coming from the screen. The light pen is also
useful for
graphics work. For example, the user at the computer-aided design
(CAD)
terminal can "draw" directly on the screen with the pen'
Fig.2.7 Ll.;ightPen.
Touch Screen
screen is a computer screen, or visual display unit, which responds
to the touch of a finger or other
A touch
or icons' The user touches the
pointer. Usually u numblr of choices are displayed on the screen as pictures,
that choice' The touch screen
icon that represents their choice, and the computer displays information about
screen' which has been touched'
works by sending a signal to the computer. This gives the location on the
malis, airports, and amusement
Using a iouch screen is quick and simpG. The Touch screen is used in shopping
parks.
Voice/Speech lnPut
2.8 Microphone' voice inPul

GraphicsTablets
An interesting me
tablet. The tablets,
many tiny wires w
into the computer
entered' As it
thu
elecrical circuits in the grid and ' Original drawings may also be
printed out' Digitisers are also used
progresses, the drawing is displayed e stored or
chips'
aircraft or computer
in commercial designing and in eng such as those that develop
Scanner
Scanners provide
Internet pages or
page scanners, an
full color graphics.
per inch (DPI) that the scanner reads' The
The resolution of a scanner is measured by the number of dots
sulting scan
in mind co
olution, the
when your
to be stored. And, if you'll be printing, it makes no sense at all to scan a large image at 500-600 DPI'
20
Saraswati I nforrnatics practices
printer will only handle 300 DPI. Aciditionally,
if you are going to place ttre image on a rveb page, a 200 DpI image
will be more than adequate.
Hand Scanners
Page Scanners ?ig.2.9 Scanner.
Page scarmers are also known as personal scanners.

They come in a variety of styles. but all are the same
they are sheetfed scanners. Page scanners offer in that
a resolution oiuto*izbo DpI, and some even exceed
Additionally, some of the higher priced models of page this.
scanners also double as facsimile machines and
printers! one definite disadvaatageio pug. scaners
are their inability to scan bound materials.
scanned must be in a separate page format. Materials to be
Flat Bed Scanners

Flatbed s
e types of scanners' Flatbeds allow a user to lay
anything s- Bound materials present no real difficulty to
virtually
scanners. flat bed
ds are the overall best solution for imaging and
capabilities. graphical
SmailCards
vou u€ rc4u laler rnto tne

computer for the user,s bank _ perhaps
via an ATM - to update the usei,s bank
records. In France and Britain, smafi
cards are used to pay bills (while keeping
current bank balances on file on the
card), buy merchandise, make phone
calls, buy postal money orders, get
snas**lo"uot ^**''
t*19"?.
results of examinations from the fl- to"
university, store emergency medical f - ilCL kI) '-
( tL --
information and to perform other
common activities. Electronic card
readers have been installed in stores,
restaurants, post offices, phone booths,
banks and so on.
Fig.2.10 Get smart ! The microchips on the Ieft

side of the smart card can keep
permanent records, which are updated each
time the cardis used-.
lnput, Output and Memory 21
'fhe cards are being used to some e):rent in the United States for example by the US Nav.v, and for
-
purchasing procedures, they incorporate a keypad and a display unit along rvith memory and processing
capabilities. Other manufacturers are already talking about a "supersmaft card" that rvould be a "key" that
usel's n'lust ernplol, to gain access to speciai computer systerns. Even today, we would be able to use our
"unintelligent" bank car:C with its rnagnetically encoded strip to pay for gasoline and groceries at some service
stations and superrnarkets, by electronicalll, transferring the funds. The purchase amount is autornatically
deducted frorn your bank balance without any fufther action fi'om your end.
Bar Code Readers
Bar Code Readers are electronic readers (similar to pens in shapes) that read the values or quantities printed on
the products and put in the form ofveftical bars. The bars are ou groceries, cosmetics, paperback novels and
so on. Bar codes are recorded on the products by the manufacturers and usually, carry the inventory stock
number (also called the product number). The ccding scheme called, lJniversal Product Code for recording the
data, is based on the rvidth of the bars and the spaces between thern.
-
Begin/end code
NUTRACHEW
0 1
cRa.xooL.a.eRAs
llll
IVlanufacturers idenfi fi cation numbet
Fig. 2.1I A bar code machine sucir as Universal Product Code used in supermarket.
Trvo types ofinput scanning devices are useC to read the bar codes. The first is a hand-held scannerthat
the clerk passes over the tag rvith the bar code. The wand has a scanning device that analyses the light and dark
bars for width and spacing, translating this ciata into electrical signals for the computer. The second is found
rtrost often in.the supermarkets and is built into the device at the top of the counter along with a computerized
cash register. Thc firnction of the scanning device is sinrilar to the hand-held wand; however, in many cases, the
light source of the former may be a laset'.
Bar code readers have proved to be very valuable as data entry devices tbr two reasons :
1. Thepriceandproductinventorynunrbeisdonotneediobekeyedin,eliminatinganychancesformany
feeding errors (quantity of items, however. is keyed in). The sales data and inventory status stored on
flle are kept on a current status.
2. A complete history can be created and stored for each bar coded item for delivery services.This means
that the parcels can be traced.
[{owever, tvhen you are checl<ing out at the supermarket, keep an eye on the computerised price and item
description display on the register. As we mentioned earlier, the product nutnbers are recorded in the bar codes
on tlre items you buy but the corresponding price files must be updated at the supermarket. If someone forgets
to enter Today's Speciat50 Percent Reduction in Cat Food Prices in the store's computer, you would end up
paying the old price.
Biometric Sensor
This is the security device that verifies personal characteristics such as fingerprints, hand size, or signatures.A
t iometric sensor, fingerprint sensor to be specific, also known as the fingerprint reader, is a fingerprint image
(ilpture elevice, the verl frcnt end of the biometric fingerprint identification/verification module. The fingerprint
22 Saraswati Informatics Practices (Xl)
sensor captures the fingerprint images, matches the uniqueness of each print read by the sensor and compares
it to the one stored in its module or local system database. Types of fingerprint sensors are Static Capacitive
Type 1, Static Capacitive Type 2, Dynamic Capacitive, Optic Reflexive, Optic Transmissive with Fiber Optic
Plate, Acoustic (Ultrasound), Pressure Sensitive, Thermal Line, and Capacitive and Optical Line. All the types
of the fingerprint sensors are generally known as optical, semiconductor, and ultrasound sensors. Among all
the senscrs, semiconductor sensors are considered to be low cost, optical sensors are considered to have a
high degree af stability and reliability, while ulfrasound sensors are very precise and fraud-free though expensive
toimplement.
It is true that a lot ofthe technical specifications for a fingerprint sensor are very configuration-dependent,
as well as application-specitic. For example, False Rejection Rate and False Acceptance Rate, two of the most
important fingerprint security benchmarks, vary according to different applications and configurations.
DigitalCamera
Digital cameras are very much like the still more familiar 35mm film cameras. Both contain a lens, an aperture, and
a shutter. The lens brings light from the scene inio focus inside the camera so it can expose an image. The
aperture is a hole that can be made smaller or larger to control the amount of light entering the camera. The
shutter is a device that can be opened or closed to conffol the length of time the light enters.
F ig. 2.12 Digital camera.

The big difference between traditional film cameras and digital cameras is how they capture the image. The
key difference between a digital camera and a hlm-based camera is that the digital camera has no film. Instead,
it has a sensor that converts light into electrical charges. Instead of hlm, digital cameras use a solid-state device
called an image sensor, usually a charge-couple device (CCD). On the surface of each of these fingernail-sized
silicon chips is a grid containing hundreds ofthousands or millions ofphotosensitive diodes called photosites,
photoelements, or pixels. Each photosite captures a single pixel in the photograph to be.
When you press the shutter release button of a digital camera, a metering cell measures the light coming
through the lens and sets the aperturr and shutter speed for the correct exposure. When the shutter opens
briefly, each pixel on the image sensor records the brightness of the light that falls on it by accumulating an
electrical charge. The more light that hits a pixel, the higher the charge it records. Pixels capturing light from
highlights in the scene will have high charges. Those capturing light from shadows will have low charges.
When the shutter closes to end the exposure, the charge from each pixel is measured and converted into
a digital number. The series of numbers can then be used to reconstruct the image by setting the color and
brightness of matching pixels on the screen or printed page.
2.2.2 Oulput Devices

Like input units, output devices are instruments of interpretation and communications between humans and
computers. These devices take machine-coded output results from the processor and convert them into a form
that can be used by people or a machine input in another processing cycle. In personal computer systems,
display screens and desktop printers are popular output devices.
Monitor
displays instructions
The computer screen, or monitor, is how the computer communicates with you.fthe monitor
you ,".rd to the computer and the information and results from the computer back to yoq lt relays
program
messages or instruciions called prompts and displays results of calculations, graphs,

and text input' The
screen can be either a monochrome screen display or a color screen display. A monochrome
screen
"o-pu1",
uses only one color-usuaily white, green, amber, or black - to display text on contrasting
background' Colot
screens commonly display 256 colors at once from a selection of over 256,000 choices.
By far the most poput* input-output devices used today for interactive processing and for the on-line
to enter data into a
entry of data for batch processing is the visual display terminal (VDT). A keyboard is used
processor, and a video display unit - called a monitor - is used to display the
keyed data and to receive messages and processed information tiom the
Most VDT monitors use a cathode ray tube (CRT) that looks like a
"oinprrt"r. picture tube.
television
Most VDU monitors use a cathode ray tube (cRT) that iooks like a
andEGA.
Fig.2.l3 Monitor
Voice Output Systems

display screen
voice output systems are relatively new and can be used in some situations where traditional
than to take your
output is inappropriate. It is certainly more helpful to hear a warning that you are speeding
is similar to voice input. To input your voice you are using
eyes off the ioadlo check a display. This system
mike and in the voice output the speaker is used.
Printer
Printers are the primary output devices used to prepare permanent documents. Along
with the computer
to tell us what we have sent in as an input and what it has
screen, a printer serves as a midium for the compuier
is that the printer generates a pemanent hard copy of our
done in ."rponr" to the same. The only difference
work on paper.
Classifications of Printers :
at a time'
tr Character printers (dot matrix and daisy wheel) that print one character
tr Line printers that print whole line at a time'
O page printers (also catted image orinters, e.g. laser printer) that print whole page at a time'
The following are the basic methods of producing print :
tr Impact printing
D Non-Iinpact Pnnting
lmpact Printers
An impact printer makes
A printer in which printing is the result of mechanically striking the printing medium.
may produced by a print hammer character'
contact with the pape. to pioduce an image/character. The impact be
or by print hammer hitting paper and ribbon
like that of a typewriter key striking a ribbon against the paper a
against a character. For example, dot matrix, daisy wheel, line printers'
24
Dot Matrix Printer

It is made of separate pinlike (needles) hamrners that
strike the ribbou agarnst the paper in computer determined
patteirls of dots' This type of printer is usually faster
than solid-font tyie, but the image quality is not as good.
Dot matrix printers are also caned seriar printeis.
The images *" ro.rr#t,'
DaisyWheel Printer
Daisy wheel printers are srower than dot matrix printers,
but produce high
quality output. This high quatity outpur is oiten calicd
Gtter quatly
printing because it is suitabie for businiss letters and
memos.
Fig. 2.14 A dot matli5printer
Line Printer
essarily printing one character at a time. It is generally

ofprint. The line printer prints up to 160 characters in
ine printers are used primariiy in the mini/mainf,rame
d printer and drum printer are the line printers.
Non-lmpact printers
Printers that do not strike characters against ribbon
or paper when they print, are non-impact printers.
of non-impact printers are : Examples
tr Ink-jet printers
D Laser printers
tr Thermal printers
lnk-jet Printer
It is a technique of spraying droplets of ink at paper
to form the
Ink-jet printer (a
non-impact) creates ar., i-age directly on paper
through as many as 64 tiny nozzles. It provid-es
a print qualiiy of
per inch.
Fig.2.16 An inkjet printer.

Laser Printer
Laser (Light Amplification by Stimulate Emission of Radiation) printer is a non-
impact printer that creates, by means of a laser beam directed on a photosensitive
surface, a latent image which is then made visible by a toner and transferred and
fixed on a paper. For example, photostat machine produce a laser type printing
technique.
The quality of laser printer is 600 dots per inch both horizontaly and vertically;
some ofhigh speed models produce 1200 dots per inch.
Fig.2.l7 A laser printer.
ThermalPrinter
The thermal printer (a non-impact) is an altemative to the other serial printers. Heat elements produce dot matrix
images on heat-sensitive paper. Some fax machines use techniques to thermal printers to produce documents
on heat-sensitive paper. Ootpot on thermal paper drawn quickly when exposed to light, but the hardware is
often inexpensive. ..,:,;.::i
Plotters
A plotter is a specialized output device designed to produce high quality
graphics in a variety of colours. Pictorial output of data, which could
range from simple statistical histograms, pie charts, advertising kiosks,
etc. to detailed isometric drawings, could be generated using plotters'
Although other printers can be used for simple charts, yet plotters produce
high quality output that is unmatched. There are two basic types of plotters
those that use pens and those that do not. Drum plotters and flatbed
plotters use pens. Elecffostatic plotters do not use the same.
Fig.2.18 A typical plotter.
2.3 Secondary Storage

Secondary storage devices provide a means of permanently storing of the information contained in temporary
memory. There are several types of secondary storage devices. The most common type of secondary storage
is a disk. The disk is the permanent storage medium for either data (for example, a business letter)
or a software
or edited letter). The data and program information are stored on
program (for example, a word processor
spots. The disk can be an internal hard disk that is
circular metal or plastic disks as a series of electromagnetic
housed within the system unit, or im external floppy disk. In addition. the CD-ROM disk is another type of
in computer systems sold today. This type of disk is an optical disk
secondary storage device commonly found
that uses a laser beam to alter thQ surface of the disk to store data'
Characteristic of Secondary Storage

That is why data from
Secopdary memory is non-volatile : When the power is off, all contents of RAM are lost.
RAM is saves as files on secondary storage which is non-volatile and almost permanent (It wears out
eventually or becomes obsolete technology).
Size. Secondary memory is virtually infinite : when you run out of space on one disk,
you use another' On the
contrary there is a timitea amount of RAM that can be accessed by the CPU. Some programs will not run
on a particular computer system because there is not enough RAM available.
Access time, It takes few nano-reconds for the CPU to access RAM but it takes several milli-socqds
to access
secondary mentory. The reasons for RAM being faster are :
1. RAM chips are located on the motherboard electrical signals have to travel from
so the distance the
the CpU to RAM or in the opposite direction is much shorter compared to the distance between the
26
CPU anC secondaly storage devices. The shorter the distance, ttre faster the processing.
2' AIso working with the secondary siorage invoives mechanical operations
like spinning.
Cost' Secondary storage is cheaper than RAM in terms of cost per unit of data.
The amount of data a disk can
hold is called disk capacity. Disk capacity, Iike rnemory, is measured in Kilc,
By'tes (KB), Mega Bytes (MB) and
GigaBytes(GB).
The most corlmon storage devices are floppy disk, hard disk. tape drives,
cD-RoM, DVD and zlp dive.
All the storage devices use sinrilar techniques for reading
and writing data, because all use the same medium.
The surface of diskettes, hard disks and magnetic tapes are all coatel with
a rrragnetically sensitive material
(usually iron oxide), which reacts to a magnetic field.
2.3.1 Magnetic Disk

A magnetic disk is a circular platter of plastic, which is coated with magnetizable material.
One of the key
componen[s of a magnetic disk is a conducting coil named as Head which
performs the job of reading and
writing on the magnetic surface. The head remains stationary while the disk rotates
below it for reading or
writing operation.
For writing data on the magnetic disk current is passed through the head,
which produces the magnetic
field' This magnetic f,reld causes magnetic patterns to be recorded on the magnetic
surface. These recorded
magnetic pattems depend on the direction of the cur-rent in the head.
While ior reading the magnetic field
recorded on the disk suriace moves relative to the heacJ, resulting
in generation of electric c,rrrent of the same
polarity in the head. The capacities of magnetic disk range fro--ttvti (for
flopp1, disks) to hundreds of MB.
So far as the secondary merlory is concerned. the magnetic
disk stores the data in hard disk and floppy
disk.
2.3.2 Floppi'Disk
Floppy C transport data
from one
ivhich is ff1*,:i:::';
within a square plastic of cardboard jacket. The jacket gives handling
protection to the disk surface.
Floppy disks are typically 3.5, 5.25,or g inches in cliameter. Th"y .
come either in single or doubie density versions. They store data
either on one or tioth surfaces of a diskette.
Fig. 2.19 A 3.5 inch floppy disk.

Thus, there are basically four types of diskettes :
Tiee Size Capacity

Single sided single density 5,25 360KB
Single sided double density 5.N ].2MB
Double sided single density 3.5 1.44N{B
Double sided double density 3.5 2MR
The capacity of diskettes varies depending on their size (diameter)
and type (mode of data recording).
Basically, each disk is divided into number oftracks and each track
is again divided into sectors. A sector is a
small portion in a tack which stores <lata in form of binary dtgits, i.e.,6 and 1. Thus, the capacity of a single
sided single density of 3.25 inch diskette may only be little over
100 Kilobyte, while the capacity of a double
sided double density disketre may be almosr 1.2 GB.
Hard disks and floppy disks have a top surface and a bottom surface. Information is generally stored on
both surfaces. Concentric circles divide each side of the disk surface into tracks . The size and number of tracks
is machine dependent; this is determined by the blend of installed hardware and software. High density floppy
disks have more tracks than low density floppy disks.
The read/write process in the floppy disk is done using through floppy disk drive. Generally, floppy disk
drives in computers are named as A:, B drive.
Sector 0
Sector I
Sedor N
L
Fig.2.20 Tfacks and sectors inside a disk.
The portion of a single track in a single sector is called a block. The size of the block is also machine
dependent.
Block 0
Block 1
4+
Read -Wfie
t i r-' /, ,f ' AnrVHead
ik - j',;
!.\'----'{.,.'
r \ \- -' / ,'
Block 3 -
(c) (d)
Fig.2.2l Blocks in a disk.

Information is generally transferred to the disk by read/write heads that physically rnove across the
surface ofthe disk until the head is above the desired track (d).
Advantages ofusingfloppy disks :
tr they allow to copy files from one computer to another;

D they are quite cheap.
Disadvantages of using floppy disks :
tr they have a limited capacity (graphics files often don't fit in a disk);
tr they are relatively slow;
tr they are less reliable than hard disks so proper care should be taken to prevent loss of data.
It is important to take proper care of your disks to minimise the danger of losing data.
2.3.3 Hard Disk
A hard disk is physically composed of a series of flat, magnetically coated
platters stacked on a spindle. The spindle turns while the heads move
between the platters. After that in a cyclic movement data becomes reading/
writing onto the platters.
A disk is divided into tracks, cylinders, and sectors. A track is that portion of a disk which passes under
a single stationary head during a disk rotation, a ring 1 bit
wide. A cylinder is comprised of the set of tracks described
by all the heads (on separate platters) at a single seek
position. Each cylinder is equidistant from the centre ofthe
disk. A track is divided into segments of sectors, which is
the basic unit of storage.
The hard disk is a permanent fixture containing one or
more circular metallic disks that are used to store data files
and software programs. A hard disk can store more
information than a floppy disk.
Fig.2.23 R.ead/write movement in a hard disk.

When there is more than one disk, each one is
called a platter. There are 1 to 12 platters in a hard
Rotation
disk.
The read/write process in the hard disk is done
using the hard disk drive. Generally, hard disk drives
in computer are named as C:, D:, E: drive.
Fixed disks have much greater capacity than
floppy disks. Originally microcomputer hard disks
held 10M, but today's hard disks capacities are
measured in gigabytes. The increased capacity is
in part because ofthe metal surface, in part because
they are sealed inside a case and in part because
the disks are multi-layered. I
The disadvantage of storing everything on a it

hard disk is that data, if not programs, is often
Platter --*
required to be transferred between computers. In
Surface
consequence, floppy disks retain value as a means
of moving data. But on the otherhand modern files
are often bigger than a floppy disk can hold. So t
new technologies like zip drive and jaz drive Cylinder
appeared in the market.
Fig.2.24lnternal structure of a hard disk.

2.3.4 Magnetic Tape
Magnetic tapes are mounted on a reel, a cartridge or a cassette of tape to store large volumes
of backup data.
These are cheaper and since these are removable from the drive, they provide
orti-it"d storage capacities.
Since the recording is like that in a tape recorder used in audio systems, video system
and comf,uter tape are
types of magnetic tape used as storage device. Magnetic tape comes in a reel, or
in a cartridge tr cassette.
Material:
D iron-oxide coating (density upto 6,250 bpi)
tr chromium-dioxide coating (density upto 3g,000 bpi)
Data representation :
tr Data recorded in the form of magnetic spots that

represent binary ls and 0s.
lnput, Output and Memory -29
tr 8 or 9 tracks running along the tape (18 in an IBM 3480 tape cartridge).
tr Each character occupies one vertical column, called a frame.
A typical 10.5 inch reel of magnetic tape is 2,400 feet long and is able to write 800, 1600 or 6250 characters
of this length. The magnetic advantages of magnetic tapes are : unlimited storage capacity, high data density,
low cost, rapid ffansfer rate, easy ofhandling, portability, etc.
2.3.5 CD-ROM (Compact-Disk Read Only Memory) Disks
Computer storage device developed from the
technology of the audio compact disc. It consists of a
plastic-coated metal disk, on which binary digital
information is etched in the form of mictoscopic pits.
This can then be read optically by passing a laser beam
over the disk. CD-ROMs typically hold about 650
megabytes of data, and are used in distributing large
amounts of text, graphics, audio, and video, such as
encyclopaedias, catalogues, technical manuals and
games.
Big.2.2fi Aqpical CD'drive and CD'ROM.
Standard CD-ROMs cannot have information written onto them by computer, but must be manufactured
from a master, although recordable CDs, calted CD-R disks, have been developed for use as computer disks. A
compact disc, CD-RW, that can be overwritten repeatedly
by a computer has also been developed. The compact disc,
Focused beam
with its enorrnous storage capability, may eventually replace
i
the magnetic disk as the most common form of backing
store for computers.
The technology is being developed rapidly. A
standard CD-ROM disk spins at between 240-1170 rpm
(rotations per minute), but faster disks have been
introduced which speed up data retrieval to many times
the standard sp-eed, Research is being conducted into high-
density CDs capable of storing many gigabytes of data,
made possible by using multiple layers on the surface of
the disk, and by using double-sided disks. The first
commercial examples of this research include DVD (Digital
\trsatile Disks) players and DVD-ROM cornputer disks
launchedin 1997.
Fig, 2.27 CD writing technologY.

2.3.6 The Development of DVD
CD-ROM's disadvantage is that a single disk cannot hold a full-length Hollywood movie due to the graphics
presentation. This has helped to prompt the developmerrt of DVD, which has enough storage capacity to hold
iour films on a single dist. OvO works exactly like CD-ROM but packs more data bits into the same area. It then
doubles this enhanced capacity by putting two layers of data on the disk, one on top of the other. The storage
capacity can then be doubled again by the simple expedient of using both sides of the disk.
DVD's first use was for playing back movies (originally the name stood for digital video disk), but it is now
being adopted by the computer industry. Applicatior:s that require more than one CD - and some games have
been produced with up to eight disks - can be put on one or two DVDs.
2.3.7 Wrile Once Read Many (WORM)
has been fixed onto the surface of a woRM disk

they cannot be changed.
making a permanent record of data. It can be a feasible
alternative to magnetic
For example, many banks use woRM disks to

store a record of each day's transactions. The transactions
are wntten to an optical disk and become a permanent
record that can be read but never altered.
2.3.8 ZIP Drive
For many years! users wanted disks that not only_provide
sufficient capacity,but also the removability and
ruggedness of floppy disk drives, ones that would
be similar to hard aisl drives but easier to instau and with
user-friendly data management software tools. Iomega's
ZIP drive and disk is the storage solution that offers
personal computer users exactly those features.
It was shown to the public for the first time in Las vegas at the
Comdex 94 computertrade show.
Appearance and Specifications
It is an external drive only. There is currently no internar

model available
but it is being considered by Iomega development.
The advantages of a
Fig.2.28 A Zipdive.
Zip drive are :
D portable
D easy to use
D fast.
Zip disks come with the capacity of 100 M or 25 M
and you can double it using a compression software
STACKER (althoughlomega doesn'trecommend like
it). The avlrage seektime is 29 milliseconds for l00Mb
and 16 milliseconds for 25 Mb disks. disks
a Zip disk (e,s., MS_WINDOWS 3.1

own or loss in quality. Though thezlp
our hard drive.
Fig. 2.29 AZip floppy disk.
2.4 Representing Characters Bits in memory
Disks are used to store information' All information
on computers are stored in files. The size of a file
measured in bytes'As You know that the is
data gets stored in
and bytes. -".nory. The data gets stored in the form of bits
D BIT' BIT stands for Binary Digit. Binary digit can take only two values,
means the switch is oFF and the value I
i.e.,0 andl. The value 0
means that the *lt"t i, oN. The small switch in
computer the
stores these values.
O Byte. A collection of 8 bits makes one Byte, i.e.,l Byte = 8 bits.

il KILOBYTE. Acoiiectionof 1,024 BYTES makes aKILOBYTE orKB.
n MEGABYTE. A collection ofone nrillion BYTES makes a MEGABYTE or MB.
Nowadays the nremory chips are coming in a capacity of megabytes such as 32}l{8,64 MB, 128M8,256
MB etc.
D GIGABYTE. A collection of 1024 MB makes a GIGABYTE (GB). Nowadays the Hard disks are coming
in a capacity of gigabyies such as lOGB, 20 Gts, 40 GB, 80 GB etc.
Solved Exercises
Ql. What is a system ?

ArD. A system is a group of parts that are integrated for the purpose of achieving some objectives.
,42. Wnat are the main components of an input system ? Explain the function of each.
Ans. The main input components are-keyboard, rlouse, Joy Stick, MICR, OCR, OMR. Key'board is an input
device, which is used to feed textuai information of instruction into the computcr mernory.
Mouse and Joy Stick are other input devices, which used to give graphical information to the computer
and conveniently used for selections of menu items.
MICR is the recognizer which is used to input information written with special characters (fonts), special
ink (magnetic ink), and for special purposes l.e., in banking industries for cheques validation.
OCR is another recognizer used to recognize any kind of information written with any' font, any ink even
images, pictures or graphics.
OMR stands for Optical Mark Recognizer, used to recognize special type of marks. This is used for
checking multipie answer type of questions, in which either a box can be crossed or a circle can be fiiled.
Q3. What is MICR ? Where is it mostly used ? What is the major advantage and disadvantage of I'.4ICR ?
Ans. MICR stands for Magnetic Ink Character Recognizer. This device can read special characters written
using special magnetic ink. The MICRs are mostly used in banks.
The major advantage of N,llCR is accuracy and its speed. The major disadvantage of MICR is that the
number of characters that can be recorded with present techniques is very limited. Also, the characters
/ cannot be read repeatedly without losing their magnetism.
*..1Q4. Wtrat is the difference between OCR and OMR ?
Ans. An Optical Character Recognizer is used to read characters of any type or font that are printed on
conventional paper with conventional ink.
The Optical Mark Recognizer is used to transcribe marks that are marked with a dark pencil or ink on a
special preprinted form. For exan,ple, a.nswer sheet of a multiple choice question paper where a choice of
answer can be reflected by shading the appropriate box.
An OCR also comprises of a logicaI system that attempts to determine which of the possible characters is
being examined.
Q5. What are the advantages and disadvantages of OCR ?
Ans. The main advantage ofan OCR is the accuracy ofthe documents can be ensured. The disadvantages of
an OCR are-limited number of characters offered by it, and their high cost.
Q6. Define the term input and output.
Ans. Input is the process to feed data or instructions into computer for further processing. And the output is
the process to get result processed by computet.
An input unit takes the input and converts it into binary form so that the computer can understand it.
Output unit is the unit/device attached to the computer for the puryoses of getting results.
Thg' output devices receive result from the CPU in the form of binary and convert them into user readable
form. For example, VDU, Printel Ploffer etc.
Q7. How many types of computers are there on the basis of performance ?
32 Saraswati tnformatics practices (Xl)
Ans. Performance wise digital computers are divided into micro, mini, mainframe and super computers.
Q8. How many types of printers are available ?
Ans. There are two types of printers-Impact and non-impact printers.
Q9. Define Impact printers.
Ans. Impact printers pro uce output by mechanical c ntact between the print head and the paper and ribbon.
Ql0. Define non-impact printer,
Ans. In non-impact printers, there is no mechanical contact between the print head and paper. It produces
output with the help of laser beam and inkjet or toner.
Qll. How many types of plotter are available ?
Ans. There are two types of plotters-drum plotter and flatbed plotter.
Ql2. What is head of the disk ?
Ans. Head is conducting oil in a disk, which performs the job of reading or writing of data on a disk uslng
magnetic effects of electricity.
Ql3. Narne main keys ofkeyboard.
Ans. Keyboard consists of four main areas-the function keys, the typewriter keys, the numeric keypad, and
special-purpose keys.
Ql4, Cornpare and contrast the laser and dot matrix printers.
Laser Printer Dot Matrix Printer
(r) High cost. O Lowcost.
(li) Form character using laser beam. (ir) Use dot matrix to print.
(ili) Non-impact printer. (ilr) Impactprinter.
(rv) High quality printing. (rv) Low quality ourput.
(v) Noiseless operation. (v) Noisy.
Ql5. What rst nce beNyeen lmpac
lmDact and non-im pact pnnter'r
Ans. Impact printers operate like a typewriter, pressing a typeface against paper and ink ribbon. Impact printers
often use a daisy wheel or a dot matrix printer mechanism. Non-impact printers use thermal, electrostatic,
chemical, and inkjet technologies. For example, thermal-transfer printers are ribbons that hold the ink
in a
wax binder. As the hot pins in the thermal transfer print head press the ribbon against the paper, the wax
melts and the ink is transferred on the paper.
Ql6' What are the two categories of printers ? Which type of printer is found to be more speedy ?
Ans. The printer can be classified into following two categories :
(a) Impact Printers-In these types of printers, there is a physical contact between the paper and the
printer head and inked ribbon. These can further be classified as :
(l) Line printers, which can print a line at a time. These printers are expensive and speedy.
(ii)Character printers, which can print a character at a time. These printers aie low cost and slow.
(b) Non-hnpact Printers-In these types of printers, there is no physical contact between the paper and
the printer head. The printing takes place with some electromagnetic or thermal or laser techniquis,
The
non-impact printers are more speedy and better quality printing than impact printer,
Q17. What is the difference between flatbed plotter and drum plotter ?
Ans. In a flatbed plotter, the paper is fixed on a stationary horizontal plotting surface on which the images are
drawn with a pen (mounted on a carriage) capable of horizontal, verticil, leftward and rightward motion.
In a drum plotter, the output paper is mounted on a rotating drum capable of clockwise or anticlockwise
movement. The image is drawn with a pen that is capable of linear movement.
Q18. Suggest suitable device or media for the following :
(a) High quality print, (b) A high quatiry drawing,
(c) Quiet printing, @ Economicalprinting of small quantities of data.
Ans. (a) Non-impact printers like, thermal printers, laser printers, inkjet printers etc.
(6) Plotters (c) Laserprinters
(d) tmpact printers, For example, dot-matrix printers, daisy-wheel printers.
Ql9. Explain working of a dot-matrix printer.
.tns. tn ihe dot-matrix printer, an arrangement of tiny hammers strikes to produce the desired characters' Each
array of pins.
hammer prints a small dot on the paper. The printing head of dot matrixes contains a vertical
ribbon to form pattern of dots
As the head moves across the paper, selected pins 'fire' against an inked a
on the paper, Using this feature, a dot-matrix can e!r'en draw pictures, graphics etc,
Q20. What is MICR ? Where is it used ?
Ans. MICR stands for Magnetic Ink Character Reader. It is input/output device mostly used for reading
cheques in the bank.
Q2l. What is light pen ?
,Lns. Light penls used as a pointing device. A person can point the pen and perform
drawing of a line ol curve
on the screen.
Q22. Compare primary and secondary memory.
are permanent
Ans. The primary memory is volatile and has timited capacity whereas secondary memory devices
and can store large volume of data.
Q23. Def,ure:
(a) cylinder (b) track (c) block
Ans. Track. The number of invisible concentric circles called as tracks.
Cylinder. In the Hard Disk, which consists number of disk. Here the set of corresponding tracks in allthe
surfaces is called a cYlinder.
Block. Btock is the group of recorded on magnetic tape'
Q24. Define optical disk.
,lns. tn Opticat disks, information is stored in pits that are prepared by using a high-power laser beam'
Q25. Which disk is created using laser beam ?
Ans. CD-ROM is created using laser beam.
Q26. How many bYtes in a MegabYte ?
Ans. 104857 6 (1024x1024)b1tes are equalto one Megaby'te (MB)'
Q27. What is CD-ROM ?
disk, creating flat and
Ans. A CD-ROM disk is created by using a laser beam, which alters the surface of the
bumpy areas called,,pits" on the bottom of the disk. These areas represented data.
A CD-ROM drive uses
typical CD-ROM disk is 5'25
a lasli that projects a tiny beam of light onto the disk to read the data. A
inches in diameter and can store 650MB of data, the equivalent of 147 floppy
disks.
Q28. What is WORM ?

a feasible alternative to
Ans. WORM is an ideal medium for making a permanent record of data. It can be
magnetic tape for archival storage.
Review Questions
t. What are the basic devices of a computer system organization ?

1 What are the most common input devices ?
3. What is the use of mouse ?
4. Differentiate between OCR and OMR.
5, How MICR is important in banking industry ?
6. Define joystick and light Pen'
What is biometric sensor ?
8. What is digital camera ? )
9. Differentiate between film camera and digital camera'

10. How printers are classified ?
11. Differentiate between impact and non-impact printer. Cive some examples of each'
12. What is secondary memory ? Give some characteristics'
13. what are the basic types of floppy disks available in today,s market ?
14. ofa floppy disk ?
lS. , cylinder and platter.
16.
17.
18. Write about the new technolo gy Zip drive.
19. Write down the short notes on the following :
(a) oCR (D) oMR (c) MrCR
(@ BarCodeReader (e) JoyStick
(g) Graphic Tablets (ft) Scanner
U) Lightpen
G) Smarr Card
A HardDisk (k) FtoppyDisk (D ZipDrive
(m) ZapDrive (rz) CD-ROM
Chapter - 3
Compuler Softwore
3.1 lntroduction
A computer system has two parts hardware anC the software. The hardware is useless until we do not have
-
the associated software. The software is necessary to run the computer. There are different types ofsoftware
available. We will discuss differenttypes of software and languages in this chapter.
3.2 Software and its Role

Software is a set of instructior'.s that directs the computerto process information. These instructions are called
programs. Without software, the computer aannot work. A commonly used analogy is that the computer
hardware is the engine, while the software is the fuel that ailows the engine to operate. Without software the
hardware would be useless.
3.3Types of Software
There are two types of software available for computer .
tr System software
D Application software.
3.4 Software
What is Software?
Software is a set of instructions that directs the computer to process information. These instructions are called
programs. Without software, the computer cannot work. A commonly used analogy is that the computer
hardware is the engine, while the software is the fuel that allows the engine to operate. Without software the
hardware would be useless. There are two types of software available for computer - system software and
application software.
3.4.1 System Software
System software program coordinates the operation of the various hardware components of the computer. The
system software or operating system program helps the user to actually operate the computer system. This is
an interface between the user and the computer.
The operating system oversees the processing ofthe application programs and all input and output ofthe
system. Without the operating system, you can not use the applications software programs to operate. The
operating system controls computer system resources and coordinates the flow of data to and from the
microprocessor and to and from input and output devices such as the keyboard and the monitor.
System software is usually provided by the computer manufacturer. The various types of computer require
different types of system software programs in order to operate. Some of the most popular are DOS, Macintosh
operating system, OS/2, Windows 95, and UNIX.
The system software consists those programs that control and support the computer system and its
data processing applications. It includes the following :
(3s)
D Operating System tr Language Translators
A broad spectrum of the
above software isusually available from the manufacturer, but some software
available from software concerns. These generally charge extra for software but
are also
some manufacturers
furnish software without extra cost for those who purchase-or lease their equipment.
We willnow describe each ofthe aforesaid software in detail :
3.4.1.1 Operating System (OS)
Considerable tirne is ordinarily wasted in computer setup supervised by the
operator. During compilation/
assembly run time required to input the magnetic tape consisting of(the main prograo,
uni subroutines,
etc') ts substantial and would naturally be pinching. Likewise several application program (viz.,
s inventory
control, A/c receivables etc.) would be read into the CPIJ in turn every day or so. Ttris
too, wastes the working
time of the computer. Thus time reduction can be had by maintaining all the programs (including
utility
programs,assemblers,compiler, etc.)inthebackingstoragewhichmaybeofferrite*r.or,ror.commonly,
of hard disk but inter linked with main memory. The required p.ogru, can berecalled
into the CpU far
ntore quickly than inordinary systems where computer is especialiy setup for
each application run
or assembly compilation run etc.,saving considerable time on setups.
Operating system is an organized collection or integrated set of specialized programs
that controls the
overall operations of a computer. It helps the computer to supervise and manage
iti resources. operating
system calls ttre application program whenever needed, translaies the special
,.*i..
programs and managei
data needed to produce the output as desired by users.
3.4.1 .2 Language Translator
Assembler' Assernbler is used to conveft the program written in assembly language
into machine language.
Compiler. compiler translates a source program that is usually written in a high liveilanguage
by a programmer
intomachinelanguage.Thecompileriscapableofreplacingsinglesource programstatementwithaseriesof
machine-language instructions or with a subroutine. For iactr trlgtr level
language the machine requires a
separate compiler.
Interpreter. Interpreter translates each source program statement into a sequence
ofmachine instructions and
then executes these machine instructions before translating the next source language
statement. Interpreter is
also unique for each high level language, like computer, Basically the
function ortie complter and interpreter
are the same, the only difference is that compiler provides u r.purut.
object program but the interpreter does
not' At the time df using interpreter each and everytime, the source program
is needed. Another difference is
that interpreter translates the source program line wise i. e., it will not exicute
the next line unless the first one
has no error.
3.4,1.3 Application Software

Application software is a set of program designed-for specific uses or "applications,"
such as word processing,
graphics, or spreadsheet analysis. Application software can be custom-*iitt.,
but is usually purchased ready-
made.
Normally, to use an application program like FoxPro, you load the program into the
computer,s memory;
execute (run) the program; and then create, edit, or update a file or database
file. When you finish, you need to
save the work you have done on a disk. If you do not save your work
and you turn offthe computer, it is erased
from memory and everything you have done will be lost,
The operating system acts as a communication link between the hardware
and the application program. It
is responsible for loading the application software into memory
and then starling the p.ogru*. It also retrieves
data files and saves them to disk when directed. when you have finished
using the application software you
are returned to the operating system.
Application software's are divided into two parts :
O Packages tr Utility Program

3.5 Packages
3.5.1 Editor
to create, modify or
These are the interactive programs stored in the memory of the computer. They are used
There are three types of
add, and display .rr". *riit", program. Such a program may be compiled and stored'
editors as :
In this editor
(a) Special Text Editor. This editor is used to design or write a program in interactive mode.
userjust type its requirement and the program code is generated'
Text Editor. This editor is used to type only text matter. The text may be stored
for future reference'
O) Notepad are the popular
Also, the text may be modified or changed. Word processing, MS-Word and
text editors.
Fig. 3.1 Text editor NotePad'

move, eniarge and
(c) Screen Editor. This editor is used for designing. The user may design the object;
compact the object to give interactive look to the object'
3.5.2 Word Processors
as Word) is a comptlter prograr. that enables you to create, edit'
print and save
A Word processor (such
text into the computer by using a keyboard' As you
documents for f'uture revision and retrieval. You enter
stored temporarily in computer memory as you
type, your words are displayed on a monitor, or screen, and are
are creating the document rather than on paper.
is that a word processor
One of the major advantages of Word processor over a conventional typewriter
enables you to make chimges in a document without retyping the entire document.
,,t' 4
L(ri. li n"/: \I/j !
Fig.3.2 Wordprocessor of MS'Word.

38 Saraswatilnformatics practices (X!)
3.5.3 Electronic Spreadsheets
A spreadsheet is a matrix of rows and columns. The intersection
areas of rows and columns are called .cell,s.
ers, texts and user built formula and functions.
in Microsoft Excel to store and manipulate data. The
u record the past, analyze the present and predict the
ounting records and financial statements, as well as
i.:.;
-:l
C-i
*.' :--,**- ,.*

J-:J-, .{.t
Milr:,(;;_ '
-..-*.j
,,r-.,r., \',..r'.;
3.5.4 Database System

A Database is a collection of inter-related data stored together
with controiled redundancy to serve one or more
applications in an optional fashion.
Each item orpiece of information in a database is known
as a "field" and a group of related field is referred
byj a co|ec.tion of such records For example, rer us see an ,.employee,,
:X";::.jfl"
database of an i::..|i:::::',1:lh,*g
orgailization which contains details of the employees of various units.
DATABASE:EMPLO}TE
RAIVI SINGH LDC

SUNDERLAL UDC
RAJ KUMAR ASSISTANT
RAJNI LDC
once database of such kind is created, we can access the
information contained in a variety of ways. That
is, in employee database we can alrange the recorcls
sorted on name, designation, age, unit code etc. or we
even retrieve selective information based on some can
criteria.
So' a database ;s a collection of related information, which
is available to many users. A database can
handle business application such as
darabase is N,lgotiils, which is a d
example of
The database is managed by a so
used DBMS are ORACLE, sybase , "ommonly
rdware and
software that can be used to set up and monitor a
database.
Computer Software 39
3.5.5 Accounting Packages

The accounting packages are one of the most important packages for an office. Some ofthe features, which you
may be looking oo 3n BCCourrting paekages may be :
tr tax planner facility
D lacility tbr producing charts and graphs
O finding accounts payable
C simple inventory control facility
D payroll function
D on-line connection to stock quotes
tr creation of invoices easily
3.5.6 DTP packages
Desktop Publishing Packages are very popular in Indian context. Newer publishing packages also provide
ceftain inbuilt formats such as brochures, newsletters, flyers etc., which can be used directly. Already created
text can be very easily put in these packages, so as the graphics placements. Manl DTP packages for Englislr
and languages other than English are available. Microsoft Publisher, PageMaker, Corel Ventura are few popular
names. Desktop Publishing Packages, in generai, are better equipped in Apple-Macintosh computers.
3.5.7 Graphics Packages

While spreadsheets and database packages are very useful in doing analysis, the output of such analysis is
generally tables of numbers. The human brain is much more adapt at picking up patterrrs liom pictorial
representations. If it is true, as old saying, that a picture is worlh a thousand words, it is equally true that it is
rvorth a thousand numbers. Computer accessible data can readily be converted to graphic form on the screen
as well as on paper using dot-matrix printers or plotters. With plotters it is possible to have different colors.
Typical graphics software enables data to be plotted as :
tr Line chart
D Bar chart
tr Pie chart
3.5.8 Presentation Packages

Presentation packages are used to communicate ideas to those who might be unfamiliar with a situation or who
need a simple but highly effective overview ofa topic as a straight character-based (table-based) report. For
example, presentation packages might be used by a sales person to show a customer how several insurance
policies compare, by a marketing manager at a long range planning sessions to show the change in market share
between competitive products.
The data used in presentation package may come from different databases in the organization, from non-
computer sources in the orgauizalion, and from outside sources. Most illustrations are accompanied by
explanatory text, and so any graphics system must be capable of mixing text and graphics.
Sales-D-els-&L]{Pff -?[!]-
Jan Feh i,ilar Apr Tota-l Sales

Ranresh 1il80 987 1010 1:i:tl A2ST
Srtnny 1850 Egll 104U 't:')$tl 4230
Abhishek 1S20 SSfi I \tli] . {il* 4500'n
Ritu 'I:*iitl -d9[ 105CI t$S*J 4690

Santosh ltlilD 3gr1 i"Yls: $l,i.t5 4565
Sales DataforYear200l
s000
-3 auno
$ soco
&20fia
u, '"'-
fir 1il'!fi
fr
Jen Feb l,iiar A]rr Tc(ai
Q alac
$ales Person
Fig.3.4 A business presentation graphics over tabular report.

3.6 Utilities
Utility programs are those, which are very often requested by many application programs. A few examples are:
(a) Text editor. A text editor is a program that facilitates the creation and correction of texts. This editor
is used tcl type only text matter. The text may be stored tbr future reference. Also, the text may be
modified or changed. Wbrd processing and MS-Word are the popular text editors.
(b) Debugging tool. Debugging tool is a program that helps to locate and correct the errors that may
occur in the program due to the incorect use of the syntax of that language. A dynamic debugging
tool allows the programmer to control program execution using video terminal while his program is
being executed. Thus, by dynarnic tool, the user can easily detect and corect logical errors in the
program.
(c) File Compression. You can use Compression Agent to compress selected files using the settings
you specify.
With Compression Agent, you can save disk space by compressing files, or improve performance by
changing the level of con'rpression on your files. While files on your drive are being ,..o*p."rr"d, Compression
Agent updates information in a table to reflect how your disk space changes as files are moved from.one
compressioir method to another.
In11.1it.gn
.1l1.pn
T,,v1
riri'lrtl
Twl 1 12 prr'
'l+ ,,
T*r1 1-l-JE pir .i :?11..
Iur11
I l.l I -.1 ,t. prn6 '1
2/5159 0:1S
.l215193ti:l9Flr4
Pld 1.318.$ e 3{:; ?t,273
Il11-I5.pm5 ?.325.558 97z. 1[2_teE
I ll 1 ''t F. orn6 13/519$ 8:'19 PM 2.2fr6.729 s7Z \Z,fiAB ..1
Fig.3.5 Extracting compressed files using WinZip utility.

@ Disk Fragmentation. You can use Disk Defragmenter to reaftange files and unused space on your
hard disk so that programs run faster.
I You can also start Disk Defragmenter by clicking Start, pointing to Programs, pointing to
Accessories, pointing to System Tools, and then clicking Disk Defragmenter.
Fig. 3.6 Select drive dialog box for defragment.
Fig.3.7 Defragrnenting drive C.
3.6.1 Norton Antivirus

Virus is a program designed by a computer programmer (malicious hacker) to do a certain unwanted functir:n.
The virus program can be simply annoying like displaying a happy face on the user's screen at a certain time
and date. It can also be very destructive and damage some or even all the computer's programs and files'
The reasons could be "smash the machine" motivations, anti-establishment, criminal intent, e/c' Viruses
may cause data to be lost or comtpted. A virus is usually passed frotn computer to computer on floppy disks
or Internet.
Some popular viruses are : Scores, Brain, Lehigh, Friday the 13th, Raindrops, Happy Biithday 30th, Jerusalem
virus, Dark avenger virus, Yankee Doodle virus.
When we install Norton AntiVirus and accept the preset options, your computer is safe. As part of the
installation, your computer is scanned for viruses. Norton AntiVirus automatically checks :
(a) boot records for viruses at system startup,.
(b) programs for viruses at the time you use them.
Saraswati lnformatics Practices
(c) all local hard drives for viruses once per week.
@ monitors our computer for any activity that
might indicate the work cf a virus in action.
(e) files you download from the Internet
a floppy disks for boot viruses when you
use them.
To use Norton AntiVirus :
O Click Srart >> Programs >> Norton

AntiVirus >> Norton AntiVirus 2000 as
shown in Fig. 3.8.
The Norton AntiVirus window will appear as
showninFig,3.9:
Fig. 3.8 Starting Norton AntiYirus.

xt
f,r. n fr,ir,
1
$.can f*r $iril I
4#d@M*s$rMr (l*ls lier N:.r ts rd .ir'4')
..*;
}/-si 1i l!,)b,
srsSix(g&ith$iii&. ,rt, :a! l-: ai
Fig. 3.9 Norton AntiVirus first screen. ip6.arMr** d.er tqT@J (t rr J k <.r.rz
tte N & r-.n 4kEi * 14i$r 1ry \"/,zes

To scan dives : 9* * I wa lb-.h \u?6r
1. Select Scan for Viruses. Where the scan

options will appear as shown in Fig. 3.10: ', l&{$.w#4il rz:!fuke.': I * r'_ut*.**y."-:l
2 Select Scan All Hard Disks for Viruses from the list and
click Run Scan Now. You may also define a new scan
task to scan only selected hard drives by clicking Create
New Scan and following the instructions in the Scan
Task wizar-d. The Norton AntiVirus will continue to scan
all the drives including files and folder as shown in the
Fig.3.il.
J If Norton AntiVirus alert appears on the screen. it gives
information about the virus. There are two options
available to eliminate a virus : automatic and manual.
A
+. If you choose manually, the Probleurs Found screen
will appear which gives information about the viruses
fourrd. Now, you can :
Repair. It found the virus and repairs the
infected file.
Delete. It deletes both the virus and the infected
file.
Exclude. If you choose this option and the virus
is at work, the virus will not be detected.
Quarantine. It just freeze the virus infected file
but does not remove it.
Stop. It stops the current operation to prevent
you from using an infected file.
5. After repairing the virus, you will get the
scan results as shown in Fig. 3.12.
Fig. 3.12 Scan results.

3.6.2 Updating Virus
To prevent new viruses from infecting your computer, you must update your virus definitions files frequently.
If your computer is connected to a modem and you accepted the preset optious when you installed Norton
AntiVirus, LiveUpdate is already scheduled to update virus definitions files regularly. Yon can also schedule
LiveUpdates to occur more frequently or at any time you choose.
tr Click Next to update your files.
Once your system is updated with new files, restart your computer to avail the updated file'
.*i
, lfelce*tre !E: l-iveltgdat*
Li.slj0d;1-. [h+.tr ltr *!,J3let idt]-t!n ilrr3*rtr:l+Ct;;i! ;r.(]
cea iBrf!'!i:ih uliera lr'G{ rarri :.s rri:,lsii
Fig. 3.12 Scheduling I-iveUpdate for Norton AntiVirus'
3.6.3 Using Disk CleanuP

you can run Disk Cleanup to help you free up space on your hard drive. Disk Cleanup searches your drive, and
rhen lists temporary files, Internet cache files, and unnecessary progran files that you can safely
delete.
To staft Disk Cleanup :
. you can also start Disk Cleanup by clicking Start, pointing to Programs. pointing ter Acetssories,
pointing to System Tools, and then clicking Disk Cleanup.
44 sar
The follov;ing Fig. 3. 1 3 u,ill appezr :
Fig.3.13 Disk cleanup select drive.

After seiecting a drive {i.e., C drive), the disk cieanup wilt display a list of temporary Files in C drive as
shown in Fig. 3.14"
0.0il.dB ..
i: Fec-vcle Bin 0.0U i,i8 i,

i'. Temg,orar_u iiler il00h18;
Fig.3.14 Seleet files to clean from disk.
From the abcve figure -

- If ycu click !.'iex'Files button. then it rvill displal: all the temporary Internet fiies Ilom your windows
directory as shown in Fig. 3.15.
hitp:r'/us i1 yimg comlue..timg.eo ., GIF lmage iK8

htlptl/ue.il yimg.co,ri'i/qs.!,in'g.tc, *iF ir,.'age 2KE
ntent.IES pilcher 1 ipg htt6;llus i1 yiirrg.romi:e.yimg,co.

httpr,/,/ue il.yimg.cont/u$.!imq Dc..
JPEG lmapa
GIF lr,raga
EK8
1 r-B
http://us.il yimg.com.ruo yinrg co. GIF lriaqe 2KB
httplliue i!.yimg.com,rus,yim6 ra. 6lF irrage 2K8
fittp:/,'us il,yimg rcrnlue yirngco JFES imege 2 l(.8
-bot.ipp
htlp:lius il.yirng com/us.1,irng ca-. JPEG lnrage 8K6 '
tps htip//us i1.yimg.eom,/us yimg.co JPEG lmage 3KB ,
:1 ieupdate.hlm http;1,/,rrw',s, miDrosotl, cqm,/+'+inda, Micnsoti HI . 1K8 :
sfwh do6acf ot htfi:r'll*ow.doeaec org inJ Mioosqlt HI 16 KB

hltp:l/wwr+, dueacc.org. inldoeac, GiF lmap .l F.s
,I
htln://F,wril doescc otg.in/doeac JPEG iroage KB
http:/,ti4ww.dioeaae.org inldoeac. GIF lmaqie 3
Fig. 3.15 Temporary Internet files.

If you will press ok from the above figure, then it wili ask you to delete the files as shown in Fig.3.16.
lf press Yes button then ali the files rvill removed from your disk.
Fig.3.16 Dialog box to select for deletion.
3.6.4 Disk Defragmenter

You can use Disk Defragmenter to rearrange fiies and unused
space on your hard disk so that
programs run faster.
To start Disk Defragmenter :
. You can also start Disk Defragmenter by clicking Start,

pointing to Programs, pointing to Accessories,
pointing to System Toois, and then clicking Disk
Defragmenter. The following Fig. 3.17 will appear.
Fig.3.17 Selecting a drive for disk defragmenter.

From the above figure, select a drive (1.e., C) and press Ok button.The following Fig. 3.18 will appear.
Fig. 3.18 Preparing for Defragmenting Drive C.

If you press the Show Details button then it will display the C drives defragmenting screen as shown in
Fig. 3. 19.
.ETf;
l!:; C.fllie:E
Fig.3.19 Defragmenting Drive C.

From the above figute, you will wait a while for checking drive for errors... and after few second *re arive
will show deframentatioll areas for rearranging files and unused space. If you will press the Legend button,
then you will see a rnerlu which shown the disk details as shown in Fig. 3.20.
Fig. 3.20 Legends of defragmentation.

Solved Exercises
Ql. What is software'.

Ans. Software is a set of instructions that directs the computbr to process infomration. These instructions are
called programs.
Q2. What is application software ?
Ans. Application software is a set of program designed for specific uses or "applications," such as word
processing, graphics, or spreadsheet analysis. Application softrvare can be custom-written but is usually
purchased ready-madb.
Q3. What is operating system ?
Ans. Operating system is a set of program which forms an interface between user and the computer hardware,
Q4. What is compiler ?
Ans. Compiler translates the program written in high level language into machine language.
Q5. Explain the three language translator.
a'Ans. The three language translators are:
(f)- Assembler. Assembler is used to convert the program written in assembly language into machine
language.
(ri) Compiler: Cornpiler translates a source program ttrat is usually written in a higlr level language by a
programmer into machine language for a while. The compiler is capable of replacing single source
program statement with a series of machine-language instructions or with a subroutine. For eachhigh
level language the machine requires a separate compiler.
(iii) Interpreter, Interpreter translates each source program statement into a sequence of machine
instructions and then executes these machine instructions before translating the next source
language statement, Interpreters are also unique for eachhigh level language, like computer. Basically
the functions of the compiler and interpreter are the same, the only difference is ttrat compiler provides
a separate object program but the interpreter does not. At the time of using interpreter each
and everytime, the source program is needed. Another difference is that interpreter translates the
source program line wise i. e. , it witl not execute the next line unless the first one has no error.
Q6, What is application program ?
,{ns, Application software is a set of program designed for specific uses or "applications," such as word
piocessing, graphics, or spreadsheet analysis, Application software can be custom-written but is usually
purchased ready-made.
Q7. What is system software ?
Ans, System software program coordinates the operation of the various hardware components of the computer.
The system software or operating system program helps the user to actually operate the computer
system. They are an interface between the user and the computer.
8. What is spreadsheet ?
Ans. A spreadsheet is a matrix of rows and columns. The intersection areas of rows and columns are called
,Cells'. The'Cells' of a spreadsheet are used for entering numbers, texts and user built formulae and
functions.
9. What is Database ?
Ans. A Database is a collection of inter-related data stored together with controlled redundancy to serve one
or more applications in an optional fashion.
10. What is virus ?
Ans. A computer virus is a computer program that can inject other computer programs by modif,ing them in
such a way as to includc a copy of it. A virus not only copies itseif but also makes the computer system
behave abnormally.
11. Name the types of software with example for each,
Ans. There are two types of software-system software and application software. Examples are-Translators
48
(interpreters, contpilers and assemblers), utilities,

Operating s)/stems etc. are the system software. payroll
system, Financial accounting erc are application software.
12. Explain three types of Editor.
Ans. There are three types ofeditor as :
write a program in interactive mode. In this editor
ode is generated.
atter. The text may be stored for future reference.
d processing and MS-Word are the popular text
(ilt) Screen Editor. This editor is used for designing.

The user may design the object; move, enlarge and
compact the object to give interactive look to the object.
13. What is fragmentation ?
Ans. nd data occup generally of different lengths, As
are changes, of various sizes tend to appear
. This process ION.
Review Questions
1. What do you mean by software ?

I Define system software and application software.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1
i*-
Chapter - 4
Operoling System
4.1 lntroduction
An Operating System is a system softrvare which may be viewed as an organised collectiotl of software
consisting ofprocedures for operating a computer and providing an environment for execution ofprograms. [t
is a class of programs which manages the resources of the computer, processes cornmands, and controls
program execution. As the foundation of all computer operations, it is the most complex program executed on
the computer, yet must also be the most reliable.
There are many important reasons for studying the operating systems. Some of them are :
D User interacts with the computer through operating system in order to accomplish his task since it is
his primary interface with a computer.
O It helps users to understand the inner functions of a computer very closely.
tr Many concepts and techniques found in operating system have general applicability in other
applications.
An operating system can be a single user OS, a multiuser OS or a multitasking OS.

A single user OS caters to a single user and all the resources are available to this user at all times.
Microsoft's Disk Operating System (MS-DOS) is one such OS.
A multiuser OS is one that supports several users at a time. Most OS's for minicomputers and mainframe
computers are multiuser OS. Unix and Xenix are the popular multiuser OSs.
A multitasking OS is the one that supports several tasks at a time, but only a single user. Windows and
OSl2 are examples of multitasking OSs.
4.2 What is"an Operating System ?

An operating system is an essential component of a
computer system. The primary objectives of an operating
system is to make computer system convenient to use
and utilize computer hardware in an efficient marmer.
An operating system is a large collection of software
which manages resources of the computer system, such
as memory, processor, file system and input/output
devices. lt keeps track of the status of each resource
and decides who will have a control over computer
resources, for how long and when. The positioning of
operating system in overall computer system is shown
inFig.4.l.
Fig. 4.1 Component of Computer system.
(4e)
From the above figure, it is clear that operating system directly controls computer lrardware resources.
olher programs rely on facilities provided by the operating system to gain access to computer system resources.
4.3 Popular Operating Systems for pCs

PCs constitute over 90%o of the total world poputation of computers and this proporlion is growing.
It will
therefore be useful to understand the characteristics of some of the more popular operating ,y-rt.r, in use
on
PCs which, in a way, lend personality to individual makes/models of PCs. These oferating systems
are :
O CP/M
O UNIX (and its look alike)
tr os/2
D MS-DOS
O Windowsg5/98120001ME
An operating system plays a role something like a symphony conductor. When the score calls for the
violins to play, the conductor cues the violins; when the score says the cellos should play more softly, the
tympani should stop, or the entire orchestra should pick up the tempo, the conductor so instructs the musicians.
The players in the orchestra and their instruments represent the hardware, The experience and skill
of the
conductor represent the operating system. The score represents gn application progru*.
When an application program is replaced by another for instance, un u..orrling program is put
- aside
and replaced with a word processor - the sante hardware carries out the instructions oittre same operating
system, A different program, a different purpose, perhaps, but the elements are the same.
4.4 Operating System as a resource manager

The operating system manages the different resources like processors, main storage, and input / output
devices and files. It acts as the interface between different resources and resolves the conflicts tetween
the
resources, makes effective use of the system. As a resource manager operating systern performs the
following
activities :
o Monitoring the different resources.

D Decide which resource get what, when and for how much time.
o Allocate the resources.
o Reclaim the resources.
In this section we explain the different functions of OS. We group all the programs of OS into the following
categories :
O Memory Mauagement
D Processor Management
tr Device Management
O InformatjonManagement
4.4.1 Memory Management Functions

The memory management component of OS is mainly concerned with the primary memory ormain
memory. The
operating system does the following functions to manage the primary memory :
O Keep track of the status of each memory location whether is allocated or free.
D Selecting the allocation policy for the momory.
O Select the allocation technique to determine the specific locations to be allocated and to update
the
allocation information
al Handling the delocalization ofmemory.
I'he different types of polices and technique for'memory management are :

Operating System
4.4.1.1 Single Contiguous Allocation

This technique is simplest among all the allocation
techniques, As the name suggests, in this policy the
memory is allocated to the single job. This scheme
requires no special hardware devices and is usually
associated with small and stand-alone computers with
simple batch OS.
As shown inFig, 4.2 the part of memory (A) is
allocated to ttre operating system and all the remaining
is allocated to the single job processing but only
some part of the memory (B) is used by that job and
rest of the memory (C) is not used by the job.
B ig, 4.2 Single Contiguous MemorY.
The main advantage of this allocation is it is simple among all the allocations atid does not require any
expertise to understand or use the system. The main disadvantage is the poor utilization of main memory and
poor utilization ofthe processor.
4.4.1 .2 Partitioned Allocation

Now in single job the main memory is available to
single job. But if it is allowed to have more than one
job in the main memory at one time, the system can
utilize all the resources in efficient manner, but by
increasing the complexity of the operating system. Jobl's
This technique of allowing more than one job to reside address
in the main memory is called multiprogramming. The Space
number of jobs reside in the memory is called the
DEGREE of the multiprogramming. Job2's
This technique is the simplest for supporting address
the multiprogramming. In this technique the main Space
memory is partitioned into different memory regions
and as shown in Fig, 4.3, each memory region can Job3's
hold different jobs. The partitioned allocation needs address
very little hardware support. Space
Fig. 4.3 Partitioned Allocation.

The two simplest ways for partitioned allocation are static specification and dynamic partition specification.
In static partltion specification, the memory is divided into panitions prior to the processing of any jobs.
The computer operator may specify the partition specification or it may be built into the operating system. Let
us consider an example in Fig. 4.4 as :
Size Location Status
32J( 300K INUSE

16K 332K NOTINUSE
32J( 348K INUSE
3?K 380K NOTINUSE
@K 4r2K INUSE
Fig.4.4 Static Partition Table.
52
The first entry gives the size ofpanition and the next entry gives
the starting location ofeach partition. The
last entry gives the status of each partition.
time are generally of dift'erent lengths. As
the s of various sizes tend to appear between
suc
. The main advantage
utilization
of static partition allocation is that it allows multiprogramming and allows efficient
of the processor and input or output devices. It also requires no special costly
hardware.
The main disadvantage is the fragmentation, which dependr on th. typical job
,"qrln"". and algorithms
used and also even if memory is not fragtnented; the singie free may
not be large enoughior a partition. This oS
needs more memory as compared to single contiguous allocation.
4.4.1.3 Compaction
4.4.1.4 Relocatable partitioned Memory Management

The technique, which involves the relocation, to overcome fragmentation
problem, is i<nown as reloeatable
partitioned memory management. This technique require
If the relocation is done at the time of loading, it d if the relocation
adjustments are done automatically as each insffuction is
relocation.
The advantage of this is that it allows for higher degree of multiprogramming,
which results in increased
memory and processor utilization.
The main disadvantages are that relocation hardware increases the
cost of computer and compaction time
may be substantial.
4.4.1.5 Paged Memory Management

In paged memory inanagement it is not required that the user's job must
occupy contiguous memory locations.
In paged memory management each Job is divided into pieces of
the same size, called PAGES. The physical
memory is divided into pieces of the same size called BLocKs.
Any page can be placed inro any block. The
pages are logically contiguous but the blocks need not be contigrour. '
4.4.1.6 Swapping
In multiprogramming environment, when the system is allocated to the
next user, the current contents of user
memory were written out to a backing store and the contents of the
next user was read in. This is called
Swapping as shown in Fig. 4. 6. The backing stores
commonly fast drum or disk.
are
The main advantage of paged memory It{onitor
management is that this scheme eliminates Sw
fragmentation. It increases the degree of User Space lUSR't
multiprogramming, which results in the increased
memory and processor utilization. Swapin lffiFir
Main Memory Backing Store
Fig.4.6 Swapping TWo User,s program.

Operating System 53
The disadvantages of this teclinique are that tlre hardware required to nlap the page address generally
increases the cost ofthe systeur and slows dorvn ihe processor. Intemal ffagmentation orpage breakage does
occur.
4.4.1.7 Demand Memory ManaEement
The technique we have studied so far is useless to run a job untilthere was sufficient available main memory lo
load its entire address spaee. The solution of this problem is to use extremely large memory but it is economically
irot feasible. The second apprcach is to use the operating systeln to produce the illusion of extremely iarge
txemory. Since tlris rnerriory is merel_y an iliusion, it is called virtual memory. There are tlvo virtual memory
methods :
il Demand page melrory manageirent

tr Segmentedm€morymanagernent
Here the sum of allthe address spaces of the jobs beingmultiprograrnming may exceed the size of physical
memory. This is achieyed by rernoving the requirenrent that the entire job should be available in main memory
at one time, Instead only the needed portions have to be loaded as and when required.
For example, ifthree jobs are loaded in memory and two blocks are free: when a fourth job with a requirement
of 4 btocks comes what to do ? The simplc solution is loaditg the pages in the availabie blocks. As and u'hen
it refers to the instluction which is nr;t currently avaiiable in the main memory the required page rnust be
brought in. When there is a demand to load the page in memory the operating system decides which page to
keepinmemory i.e,theOsisresponsibletoperformnecessaryaction.ThisschemeiscailedDemandpage
mernory managernent. When a.;ob is initially scheduled for execution, only its first page is loaded. AII the other
pages needed b;r the job are subsequently loaded on dernand. This ensures that an unnecessary page is not
loadeci,
The pages, which are loaded on the demand, are present on the secondary storage devices. When a page
is needed in main men)ory, it is read frorn the secondary storage device. Once mernory is filled with pages, it is
possible to load another page only' by removing one page presently in memory. The replaced page is copied
back onto the secondary storage device before the new page is loaded. How do we decide which page is
removed first ? There are so many page removal techniques available like First - In - F-irst- Out, Lease Recently
Used elc.
As we see there is a movement of pages between the main memory and the secondary storage devices. The
phenomenori of excessively moving pages back and forth between memory and secondary; storage devices is
called Thrashing.
The main advantages of this technique are that there large virlual memory is available. The memory is used
efficiently. 'l'he disadvantages ofthis technique are that the processor overhead for handling interrupts and to
maintain number of tables and thrashing.
21.4.2 Device Management

I'he utanagement ofthe input and output devices like keyboard, printer, disks, card readers and control units
corres under device managernent. The device management part of operating system managesand utilizes the'se
cler,'ices in an efllcient manner. The basic main functions of device management are :
D Using special mechanisms has to keep track of the status of all the devices.
tr When requests come , has to decide on policy to determine who gets a device, when and how long;
C Assigning a device to jobs;
O When the job is over, deallocating the device and changing the status information.
The module that keep-the track of the status of devices is called l/O Traffic Controller.
All modules associated with the operation of a single device are called I/O device handlers. All the L()
clevices can be classified into any one of the followingthree categories:
O dedicated
D shared
U vlftual
A dedicated device is allocated to a single job for the job's entire duration. For example, consider the
output device printer. This de.vice by nature falls in this category. There may
be a situation where several users
want to use the printer at the same time. If it is not dedicated, imagine ihe output procluce
by the printer.
B,eqause of this reason the printer is a dedicated device.
The devices like disks, drums ancl other direct access devices are shared devices.
Because these devices
can be shared by several jobs at a time, Many jobs can be read from the disk
at a time. These devices are
efficient but complicate to manage. For example, if two jobs request a read from disk, some
mechanism rnust be
employed to determine which r.equest should be handled first.
Some devices, can be convefted fi'om dedicated devices to the shared devices like
card reader. The
technique' which is converting the dedicated device to shared device, is called spooling.
For example, a
spoolitig program can read and copy all card iip on to a disk at high speed. Later when p.-o".r,
u tries to read
the card reader, the spooling program intercepts the request anJ converts it
to read from the disk. Here a
dedicated device is converted to a shared device, changing card reader into many,.virtual,,card
readers.
The device management depends on the nature ofthe input and output device
and the request arrives,
manages all devices and utilize it in efficient way with the help ofthe program
modules I/o traffic controller, I/
O device handlers and I/O schedulers.
. In the mod-ern computers most of the jobs depend upon the disk for loading input and output files, it is
impoftant that disks service be as fast as possible- rne cis can improve
on the average disk service time by
scheduling the request for the disk access. There are sufficient aigorithms
available to achieve the above
requirement. l'hese are ;
O First-Cum-first-served(FCFS)
O Shortest-seek-time-first(SSTF)
D SCAN
4.4.2.1 First-Cu m-First-served
FCFS is the simplest form of disk scheduling. In this scheduling the job
comes first will served first. with an
example, if the request for the tracks comes jn the following order :
50 80 190 57 106 08 ll5 p. and 65
Let us assume that the readlwrite head is initially at track 50, it will move
from 50 to g0, g0 to I 90, 190 to 57,
then to 106, 08, 115,82 at last at 65. The total head movement is
5g3 tracks.
a
L
o
-o
z
(-)
Fig.4.7 FCFS.
Operating Systen'l 55
The rnain disadvantage of this technique is that it increases the average service time with increased head
movement. As you see the head move from track I 06 to 08 then back to 1 1 5.
4.4.2.2 Shortest-seek-time-f irst

The main idea behind this method is that to service all the requests olose to the current head position together
ancl move the head far away to service another request. Shortest -seek-time-first selects the
request witlr
minimum seeks time from the current head position.
Let us conslder the example given above, the closets request to the initial head position 50 is at track
57.
This scheduling improve the average disk service. Butthis may cause starvation of some requests.
190
\
\
ll5 \
C) 106
\
tr \
fa \
vzo 80
! 65
F F57
50
Fig.4.8 SSTF,
4.4.2.3 SCAN
the read/write
SCAN is evolved because the dynamic nature of the request queues. In this scheduling method
servicing requests as it reaches each track,
head starts at one end ofthe disk, and moves towards the other end,
direction of head movement is reversed and
until it reaches the other end of the track. At the other end, the
to end. In addition to head's last position,
servicing continues. The head continuously scans the disk from end
and reaches
we need to know its direction of movement. If the head was moving towards 0 it services 08-first
disk, servicing the requests 57 , 65,
track 0. At track 0 the head would reverse and move to the other end of the
g0, g2, 106, i l5 and 195 as shown in Fig.4.9. The SCAN algorithm is also called the elevator algorithm'
1m
\
\
115 \
L
C)
\
-o \
z \
.5t
'o
cS
L
F
\
\
Fig.4.9 SCAN.
4.4.3 lnformation Management
This part of the operating system manases the information. Before going
in detail of the information, let us
understand the concepts of file' File nranagement aspects of operiting
system is one that deals with the
ixallagement of data and program, which resides on seconddry storage
device. File is a collection of related
information defined by its user. It is named and referred to by its naml.
The file s)'stem is the most vlsible part olthe operating system. For
many computer users the interface,
structure and reliability of the file systeru largely determines the convenience
and usabiiity of the operating
system.
Files are normally organized on the directories for easy access. Therefore,
rte wili also look at different
directory structures. Since files are shared among multiple users it must be protected
against unauthorized
users, so at the end we rvill touch upon file protection issue.
4.4.3.1 Directories
A directory is a file, which keeps track of all other files. A single directory can contajn
a list of all files in a
system' Flat directories are those directories in which the root diiectory
contains all system files and there is no
othet sub-directory. When hierarchical directories are used, the colleciion
of all directory and sub-directory
entries defines the totality ofthe system Iiles.
Fig. 4.10 Srvapping TWo User,s program.

The operating system prcvides convenient procedures for sorting
- or directories. The following and accessing the information from
files are the basic functions of information-management :
D Keep track of all information in the system like file directory.

tr Deciding policy to determine where and how information is stored and
who gets access to the
information
il Once the decision is made, a processor access the information and
divided into different modules.
These modules find the desired information in allocated memor,r'
areas which make easy way for
informatiot, access. At the same time the processor also set appropriate
access rights in between the
memory cells.
rl once information is not needed, release the temporary table entries and other resources
held by that
process.
Fiies can be implemented
.is rnuch on several devices like : disk, tapes and other secondary storage devices.
There
wa1'to implement files. Basically we perform four basic operation
on the files. 'rhese are :
(N Creating a file. For creating a file firstly we have to search for the free space in the file system i. e. on the
,
storage device. lf the space is available then we make the entry
for new rite. the directory entry stores the
name of the file and its location on the file system and all other
information related to that file.
Operating System 57
(ii) Writing a file. For writing in a file, a system should know the name of the file and the contents, which
should be written on the file. Given the narne of the file, the system is searching the directory to find the
location ofthe file. The directory should contain a pointer to the current end ofthe file. Using this pointer,
the address of the next block can be computed and the infonnation can be written.
(lii) Reading from the file. To read a file, again we need the name ofthe file frorn which the infonnation has to
be read. A request should be made to the systern call with the name ofthe file and stafting address of the
mrin rnemory where the read contents should be put in. To achieve this, the directory is searched for the
valid file name. As soon as it finds the name, it has to get the contents from the secondary storage device
and transfer into the main memory.
(lv) Delete a file. lWhen the command delete is given, the directory is searched for the named file. If found,
release all file space, so that it can be reused by the other files and directory entry is invalidated.
Information management is nothing but the management of all these files and file directories usittg the
information llom the device management part of the operating system.
4.4.4File Protection
ln multi-user environment the file protection is necessary. Because a file is shared by the multiple users. The
protection mechanism must provide controlled access by restricting the types of files, which can be made. The
access is permitted depending upon several factors. The several mechanisms to support the protection are :
4.4.4.1Passwords i
In this methods the password is associated with each file. Just as a password is required to access a computer
system, access to each file will be controlled by a password. The rnain disadvantage of this method is that a
separate password is associated with a different file, the numbers of passwords that need to be remembered are
quite large, makingthe sch'eme impractical.
4.4.4.2Access List
The second approach is to make access dependent on the identity ofthe user. Various users may need different
types of access to a file or directory. An access list can be associated with each file and directory, specifying the
user name and the types of access allowed for each user. When a user request access to a particular file, the
operating system checks the access list associated with each file. Ifthat user is listed for the reqttested access,
the access is allowed. Otherwise, a protection violation occurs and the user job is denied access to the file.
4.5 Process Management

As we know the operating system must keep track of the status of each resources, allocate resources to
different processes based on ceftain policy , decide how long these processes will be utilizing tlrese resources
and finally de-allocate it. In this section we will have detailed discussion on processor management issues of
operating system only.
Processor management is concerned with the management of physical processcr ie., the allocation of
processes to a processor. The notion of a process is central to the understanding of operating system's
functioning. Everything is centered around this concept and it is very important to understand this concept
right frorn the beginning.
A process .s basically a program while it_ i-s being executed. A process is running progl'am rvith some
specific tasks to do. In multiuser environment where several process share tlte processor it is required some
time to interrupt the running process and load another process. When the process is temporarily suspended,
inforrnation about it is stored in a rnemory location is that its execution could sta( fi'om , the same location from
where it was suspended. In many operating system, all the information about each process is stored in a
process table.
4.5.1 Process Concept
In this section we describe the process concept and also give the difference between the process and the
program. A program is a passive entity whereas a process is an active entity. The key idea about a process
is
that it is an activity of some kind and consists of pattern ofbytes. A single p.o..rro. maybe sharld arrong
several processes with some scheduling policy being used by the processor to allocate one process and de-
allocate another one.
(i) Process hierarchies. Operating system needs some way to create and kill processes. When a process is
created, it creates another process(es) u,hich in tum creates some more process(es) and so on, thus
process hierarchy or process tree.
(ii) Process states. The lifetime of a process can be divided into several stages as states each with certain
characteristics that describe the process. It means that as a process starts executing, it goes through one
state to another state. Each process may be in one of the following states :
O New - The process has been created.

D Ready - The process is waiting to be allocated to a processor.
O Running - Instructions are being executed. When a process gets a control from CpU plus other
resources, it stafts executing. The running process may reqrrire some I/O during execution.
O Suspended - A suspended process lacks some resource other than the CPU. Such processes are
normally not considered for execution until the related suspending conditions is fulfilled.
5 Terminate - When the process finally stops. A process terminates when it finishes executing its last
statement.
A general process state diagram is Fig. 4. I I given below :
Running
Fig. 4.1 1 Process State Diagram.

4.5.2 Process lmplementation
The operating system groups all information that it needs about a pafticular process into a data
structure called
a process control block (PCB). It simply serves as the storage for any information for processes.
When a
process is created, the operating system creates a corresponding PCB and when it tenninates.
its pCB is
released to the pool of free memory locations frorn which new PCBs are drawn. A pCB is
impleruented as a
record cotltaining many pieces of infbrmation associated with a specific process, including :
tr Process number. Each process is identified by its process number, called process ID.
D Prioritlr
tr Process state. Each process may be an1 ol'these state; new, ready, running, suspendecl and
terminated.
O Prograrn counter. It indicates the address ofthe next instruction to be execLrted for this process.
4.5.3 Process Scheduling
Scheduling is a fundamental operating svstelr function. All computer resources are scheduled
before use"
Since CPU is one of the prirnat'y cornputer resources, its scheduling is central to operating
system desien.
Operating System 59
Scheduling ref-ers to a set of policies and nrechanisms suppofted by operating system that confi'ols the
order in which the work to be done is completed. A scheduler is an operating system program that selects the
next job to be admitted for execution. The main objective of scheduling is to increase CPU utilization and higJrer
throughput. CPU scheduling is the basis of operating system, which supports multiprogramming concepts. By
having a number of programs in computer memory at the same time, the CPU may be shared among them. This
mechanistn irnproves the overall efficiency of the computer system by getting more work done in less time.
4.5.4 Types of Scheduler
There are three types of schedulers: long terrn, medium term and shoft term schedulers in terms of its objectives,
operating environment and relationship to other schedulers in a complex operating system environment.
(i) Long term scheduler. Sometimes it is also jobs scheduling. This determines which job shallbe admitted
for irnmediate processing.
There are always more processes than it can be executed by CPU as in Batch Operating System.
These processes are kept in large storage devices like disk for laterprocessing. The long-term scheduler
selects processes from this pool and loads thern into memory. In memory these processes belong to a
ready queue.
Long term Short term

Scheduler Scheduler
End of
aprogram
Fig.4.l2 Long term and short.term schedulers.

(ii) Medium term scheduler. Most of the processes require some l/O operation. In that case, it rnay becorne
suspended for l/O operation after running a while. It is beneficial to renrove this process from the main
memory to the hard disk to make roorn for other processes. At some part later this process can be reloaded
into rnemory and continued rvhere from it rvas Ieft earlier. Saving o1'the suspenCed prncess is said it be
swapped out or rolled out. The process is swapped in and swaps out by the mediurn term scheduler.
Suspended and
swapped-out queue
Long tcrm
Sched
Job
Fig.4.l3 Mediurn tcrm scheduler.

(iii) The short term scheduler.E: It allocates belonging to ready queue to CpU for immediate processing.
Its
main objective is to maximize CPU requirement. Compared to the other two schetlulers it is more
frequent.
It must select a new process for execution quite often because a CPU executes a process only for few
milliseconds before it goes for VO operation. So, the short term scheduler is very fast.
4.5.5 Scheduling Aigorithms

CPU scheduling deals with the problem of deciding which of the process in the ready queue
to be allocated the
CPU. In this section we study several scheduling algorithm to allocate CPU to the proiess. Basically,
there are
two type of scheduling pre-emptive or non-preemptive scheduling :
(i) Non'pre'emptive scheduling - If once a process has been given the CPU, and the CpU cannot be taken
frcm that process the scheduling is called non-pre-emptive. In this type of scheduling,
the jobs are made
to wait by longer jobs, but the treatment of all processes is fairer.
(ii) Pre'emptive - In pre-emptive scheduling the CPU can be taken away by the allocated process. pre-
emptive scheduling is more useful in high priority, which requires immediate response.
4.5.s.1 FCFS
This is the simplest scheduling, the process in this scheduling are served in the order they have
arrive. Its
implementation is maintained by FIFO (First-In-First-Out) queue. once the process allocatei
the CpU, it runs
and comprletes its job and after that releases the CpU.
Ready queue
ffiffi Fig. 4. 14 First-In-First-Out Scheduling.

Completed
job
The FCFS is non-preemptive scheduling which results in poor perfornance.

In this scheduling there is low
rate of CPU utilization and system throughput. The short
loUs trave to wait for a long time. ior example,
consider two processes:
Process CPUTime
Pl 30
P26
If these processes arrive in the order Pl-Pz, the tumout time is 30 and 36 units of time respectively
thus
giving an average time of (30 + 36) / 2 33 units of time. Their corresponding
= waiting time is 0 and 30 units of
time with the average of i5 units of time. However, if the process arrives in reverse
order i.e., p2-pi,then the tum
around times are 6 and 36 units of time respectively giving an average of 2l
units of time and the average
waiting tirne is (O + 6) / 2 = 3.
4.5.5.2 Shortest.Job-First Scheduling (SJFS)

In shortestjob scheduling the scheduling of ajob or process is done on the basis it's having
shortest execution
time' If the two process, have the same execution time then, FCFS is used. For example,
consider the process
given below :
Process CPUTime
P1 4
P2 10
P3 6
P4 J
Operating System 61
According to the shortest job scheduling the processes are served in the order P4-PI -P3-P2.
So, the waiting time is
(0+3 +7 + 13 )I 4=23 I 4=5.75

units of time. Now, lets compare it with the FCFS scheduling, the average waiting time in FCFS is :
(0 + 4 + 14 + 2O) I 4 = 38 I 4 =9.Sunits of time.
So, the SJFS scheduling reduces the average waiting time. Shortest job scheduling may be pre-emptive
and non-pre-emptive. But in both the case whenever the SJF scheduler is invoked, it searches the ready queue
to find the job or the process with the shortest execution time. The difference between the two SJF scheduler
lies in the condition that leads to invocation ofthe scheduler and consequently the frequency ofits execution.
4.5.5.3 Round Robin Scheduling

Round robin scheduling is the oldest, simplest and widely used. This scheduling is primarily used in time-
sharing and a multi-user system where the primary requirement is the good response time. In this scheduling
algorithm, the CPU time is divided into time slices. Each process is allocated a small time slice while it is running.
No process can run for more than one time slice when there are others waiting in the ready queue. If the process
requires more CPU time then it should go in the end of the ready queue.
Completed
job
Fig.4.15 Round Robin Scheduling.

In the round robin scheduling small process may be executed in single time slice giving good response
time whereas the trong processes may require several time slices and thus be forced to pass through ready
queue a few times before completion. But in this scheduling the system resources are utilizing in an equitable
numner. For example, consider the three processes waiting in the ready queue :
Process CPUTime
P1 20
P2 5
P3 t0
If we use a time slice of 5 units of time, then P1 gets first 5 units of time and the CPU is given to the second
process i.e.,Y2.SinceP2needsjust5unitsoftime,ittemdnates,astimeslicerisexpired.TheCPUisgivento
the process P3. Once each process has received one time slicer. The CPU is returned to Pl for additional time
slicer. Thus, the round robin scheduling is :
P1 P2 P3 Pl P3 P1 PI
l0 n % n 35
For implementing a round robin scheduling we require a dedicated timer. The timer is usually set to
intemrpt the operating system whenever a time slicer expires and thus forces the scheduler to be involved.
Processing the intenupt to switch the CPU to another process requires saving all the registers for the old
process and then loading the registers for the new process. This task is known as context swirching.
62 Saraswati lnformatics Practices (Xt)
4.5.5.4 Scheduling and Performance Criteria
We have to use some performance criteria to maximize the system performance. These are :
(i) CPU utilization. It refers to the amount of work completerl in a unit of time. One way to measure throughput
is by means of the number of processes that are completed in a unit of time. The higher the number of
processes, the more works apparently being done by the system.
(fi) Ihrnaround time. It may be defined as interval from the time of submission of a process to the time of its
completion. It is sum of the periods spent waiting to get into memory waiting in the ready queue, CPU
time and VO operations.
(iii) Waiting time. In multiprogramming operating system several jobs reside at a time in memory, CpU
executes only one job at a time. The rest of the job waits for the CPU The waiting time may be expressed
as turnaround time, less than the acfual processing trme.
(iv) Response time. It is most frequently considered in time sharing and real time environment. However its
characteristic differs in the two systems. In time sharing system it may be defined as interval from the time
the last character of the command line of a program or traction is entered to the time the last result appears
on the terminal. In real time system it may be defined as interval from the time an internal or external event
is signaled to the time the first instruction of the respective service routine is executed.
Generally, tr\e scheduler is designed by balancing of all the different requirements and constraints. So, the
system performance is increased and the CPU must be utilized in the efficient manner.
4.6Types of Operating System

Operating system is the interface between the user and the hardwale of the computer. An operating system may
be single user or multiuser. Basically there are five types of operating systems :
4.6.1 Single User

Single user operating system is a type of operating system which allows only one user at a time. The most
popular single user OS is MS DOS (Microsoft Disk Operating System).
4.6.2 Multiprogramming
Multiprogramming is the efficient way to improve the system performance. Multiprogramming approach allows
CP-U time al"any moment. The more the number of programs competing for system
the resource utilization. The basic idea is shown in Fig. 4.16 shown below :
PrimaryMemory
Fig. 4.16 Memory layout in multiprogramming environment.

Operating System 63
The operating systeln picks up any one ofthe programs and start executing. During execution the process
may iieEdiome I/O operations to complete. In multiprogramming system the operating system switches over to
next program. When again this program needs to wait for the t/O operation then the operating systern switches
over to next program.
Multiprogramming is traditionally been employed to increase the resource utilization of a computer system
and to support multiple simultaneously interactive uses.
4.6.3 Multiprocessing
ln multiprocessing system two or more independent processors are linked together in a coordinated system. In
such a systern, instructions from diff'erent and independent programs can be processed at the same instant in
time by different processors.
The tenn multiprogramming is sorretimes loosely interchanged with the term multiprccessing, but they
are not the sam involves concurrent execution of instruction s from two ormore
sharins the CPU and controlled bv one isor. In multiprocessing, two or more CPU's are required. The
instructions ale executed simultaneously can execute clifferent instructions ofthe
same program or of different programs at any given time.
Multiprocessing offers data-processing capabilities that are not present when only one CPU is used.
Many complex operations can be performed at the same time. CPU can function on complenrentary units to
provide data and control for one another. Multiprocessing is used for nation's major control applications
such as railroad control, or airways e/c.
4.6.4Time sharing
I V"th,rlen
Tirne sharing is a general term used to describe a processing system with a number of independent, relatively
low-speed, on-line , and simultaneously usable stations. Each station provides direct access to the CPU.
G!r. sharing system, 4jIg!-l-4!11-sutt of time_is-al]_o_g1t-e-d.f-oJ-ea-ah.prq.-c-ej-s.fgf-tllg p19ry9sing
wort<s for one loU fo. that time .sllCe, wtrJch"is defined in milllseqgl{s.
ptogra,nr from monopolizing the processor, a program executing longer than the
is interrupted by the operating system and placed at the end ofthe queue ofwaiting
As in thdTim-e-shariiifsystem the CP[gyilgh,esrapidly from one u-ser to another user, each user is
'ffeil
.p:€-rq*''
an impression that he has his own computer. while it is actually oue computer shared among many users.
This method of processing makes it possible for several users to share the resources of the computer
simu ltanecusly.
This operating system operates in an interactive mode with a quick response time. The user types the
request from the termina[. The computer processes it and a response is displayed on the users terminal.
Memory management in time sharing system provides for the protecticn and separation of user programs.
Input/output feeture of time sharing system must be able to handle multiple users.
4.6.5. RealTime oS ( *ros2
\
Real time proccssing method is one that controls the environtnent by receiving data. Processing them and
te[iusaetron-o-r retqlqi-ng-1e.,eul!: !sft9.-r-e_!1ii-Trifrlip-9{.:ltlrg !!iti"Ug-9f-t!9 9nvir6nme111-11na1 lrye
T'he tenn real time refers to the technique iif updating frles witlithEransaction data irnmediafely alter the
evenr to rvhich it relatei6cc-uffiliislJ*thn diSTiidffi;I'to-5:iic6-prdessing'wfiicli p.roc,i"Sses rel'ated data iir
barcfes at paddafin;d pe"ioaiottirne. Realtime systetnsareb-qlrg]]lglFltlt-L.-pq-ryI tU1Sygy
ploqgqlUr& The response of the system to the inquiry itself is usedlto controlthe activ produglion
i
il p9l9l 94"rrno-t be
gs. ation to monitor
c
tl Wholesale supplier and manufacturer - Availability of stocks.
tr Airlines - Flight seat.availability
O Manufacturing - Status of production orders.
R.eal time systems usually operate in multiprogramming and multiprocessing. These increase
both availability and reliabitity of rhe system
Solved Exercises
Ql. Give some reasons for studying operating system.

Ans. Some reasons for studying OS are :
(a) User interacts with the computer through operating system in order to accomplish his task since it is
his prirnary interface with a computer.
(b) It helps users to understand the inner functions of a computer very closely.
(c) Many concepts and techniques found in operating system have general applicability in other
appl ications.
Q2. What activities OS plays as a resource manager ?
Ans. As a resource manager operating system performs the following activities :
(a) Monitoring the different resources

(6) Decide which resource get what, when and for how much time.
(c) Allocate the resources
(d) Reclaim the resource.
Q3. Write four functions of operating system.
Ans. The four rnain functions of operating system are :
(a) Memorymanagement
(6) Processormanagement
(c) Device management
(d) Infonnation management
Q4. What is single contiguous allocation ?
Ans. Irr this method the memory is allocated to single job.
Q5. What is multiprogramming ?
Ans. In this method more than one process can utilize the memory at the same time.
Q6. What is the degree of multiprogramrning ?
Ans. The numbers ofjobs reside in the memory is calred degree of multiprogramming.
Q7. What is fragmentation ?
Ans. The blocks of instruction and data occupying partitions at any time are generally of diflerent lengths. As
the contents of partitions are changes unoccupied regions or holes of various sizes tend to appear
between successive blocks. This process is known as FRAGMENTATION.
Q8. Define pages and blocks in paged memory management.
Ans. In paged memory management each job is divided into number of pieces of the sarne size called pages.
The physical memory is divided into pieces of the same size calred blocks.
Qe. Wlite the main advantages of swapping.
Ans. The main advantage of swapping is that this scheme eliminates fragmentation.
Ql0. Write basic functions of OS as a device management. :r
Ans. The basic functions of device management:
(a) LJsing special mechanisms has to keep track of the status of all the devices;
(6) When requests conte , has to decide on policy to determine who gets a device, when and how long;
(c) Assigning a device to jobs;
(ri) When the.iob is over. de-allocating the device and changing the status information.
Operatinq Svstem
Qll. Name three categories of I/O device.

Ans. All the I/O devices can be classified into any one of the following three categories :
(a) Dedicated
(D) Shared
(c)
Mrtual
Ql2. What are directories ?
Ans. A directory is a file, which keeps track of all other files.
Ql3. Give some file protection method.
Ans. We can achieve file protection by :
(a) Giving password to the file
(6) The second approach is to make access dependent on the identity ofthe user.
Q14. Define a process.
Ans. A process is a running program with some specific tasks to do.
Ql5. What is a PCB ?
Ans. The operating system groups all lnformation that it needs about a particular process into a data structure
called a process control block (PCB).

Ql6. Write three types of scheduler.
Ans. Three types ofscheduler are :
(a) Long term scheduler.

(b) Medium term scheduler.
(c) Shorlterm scheduler.
Ql7. What is the difference between pre-emptive and non-pre-emptive scheduling ?
Ans. (a) Non-pre-emptive scheduling - lf once a process has been given the CPU, and the CPU cannot be
jobs
taken from that process the scheduling is called non-pre-emptive. In this type of scheduling, the
are made to wait by longer jobs, but the treatment of all processes is fairer.
(b) pre-emptive - In pre-emptive scheduling the CPU can be taken away by the allocated process.
pre-emptive scheduling is more useful in high prioriry which requires immediate response.
Ql8. What is a turnaround time ?
Ans. It is defined as interval from the time of submission of a process to the time of completion.
Ql9. What is a response time ?
Ans. lt is most frequently considered in time sharing and real time environment. However its characteristic
differs in the two systems. In time sharing system it may be defined as interval from the time the last
appears on the
character ofthe command line of a program or traction is entered to the tome the last result
time an internal or external event is
terminal. In real time system it may be defined as interval from the
signalled to the time the first instruction of the respective service routine is executed.
Q20. What is amultiprogramming ?

Ans. Multiprog.ammin[ is an eflicient way to improve the system performance. Multiprogramming approach
allows more than one job to utilize CPU time at any moment. More number of programs competing
for
system resources, better will be resource utilization'
Q2l. Define Tirne sharing.
Ans, Time sharing is a leneral term used to describe a processing system with a number of independent,
access to
relatively low-spee-, on-line , and simultaneously usable stations. Each station provides direct
process for the processing
the CpU. In time sharing system, a small amount of time is allocated for each
simultaneously. The CPU works for one job for that time slice, which is defined in milliseconds.
Q22. Give some examples ofreal time OS.
Ans. Real time processing is suitable in the following type of business operations :
- wholesale supplier and manufacturer - Availability of stocks.

- Airlines - Flight seat availability
- Manufacturing - Status of production orders.
66 Saraswqti lnformatics practices (Xt)
Review Questions
l. What is an operating system ?

2. What functions OS plays to manage memory ?
3. Explain some techniques ofmemory management.
4. Define a compaction.
5. Define a swapping.
6. Write some advantages and disadvantages of partition allocation.
1' Write some advantages and disadvantages of relocatable partition allocation.
8. Write some advantages and disadvantages of swapping.
9. What is FIFO ?
10. writc sorne advantages and disadvantages of virruar memory method.
ll. Explain FCFS scheduling in device nlanagement
12, Explain Shortest seek time scheduling in device management.
13. Explain SCAN scheduling in device management.
14. Explain functions of OS in information management.
15. Explain some basic operation on files.
16. Explairr some functions of OS as process management.
17. Explain different stages ofprocess.
18. Explain some process scheduling algorithm.
19. What is a round robin scheduling ?
20. What is a waiting time ?
21, How can you maximize the performance of CpU ?
22' calculate the average time and average waiting time in FCFS and SJF scheduling when the process come
in order P3-P2-P1-p4.
Process Cpl-Itime
PI 5
P2 l0
P3 I
p4 15
23. What is si4gle user operating system ?
24. what is the difference between single user and multiuser operating
system ?
25. Name some multiuser operating system.
26. Defi ne multiprocessing.
i1 what is the difference between multiprogramming and multiprocessing
?
28. What is a real time operating system ?
Chapter - 5
Prog!"omming Lqnguqge
5.1 lntroduction
A language is a medium of communication. In order to communicate with each other, humans need languages
like English, Hindi etc.ln the same manner, for communicating with the computer, we use computer langLrage
called programming language. A programming language consists of all the symbols, characters, and usage
rules that permit people to communicate with computers. There are many programming languages available and
each one has its symbols, character set, and syntax (pre-defined rules).
We know that the computer can neither think nor can make any decision on its own' It needs clear
insffuctions to understand what to do. A program is a set of logically related instructions that al'e arranged in
a sequence that guides the cornputerto solve aproblem. The process ofwriting a program is callcd
programming.
If a system is not correctly programmed; it delivers incorrect information. For example,
lOLETA: IO
20 LET B:20
30 LET SUM:A +B
40 LET PROD: A * B
50 PRINT SUM
60PRINTPROD
TOEND
Frorn the above program, you find the sum and product of two numbers A and B. Here, the program is
written using BASIC language. From the first line, the program will process atl the lines tili the end of the line.
Finally it wiil produce the sum as 30 at line number 50 and product as 200 at line number 60 respectively.
'fhere are three types of languages :
O Machine Language
O Assembly Language
tr High Level Language
5.2 Machine Language

This is a sequence of instructions written in the form of binary numbers consisting of ls and 0s to which
the
parts. The first part the command or operation
computer responds directly. A machine language willhave two is
is the operand
that tells the computer what functions are to be performed. The second part of the instruction
to perFormed'
that tells the computer where to find or store the data on which the desired operation is be
Tlre machine language is the only one that computer can understand directly. In the early computers
programmers had to translate instructions directly into machine language form that comptlters understood'
This task is very difficult and very few progranrmers can do this work. So, this language is very difficult to
understand. But the main advantage of this language is that it is fastet in execution since the colnputer
directly
stafts executing it.
(67)
5.3 Assembly Language
To ease the programmer burden, mnemonic ope
early 1950s. The mnemonic refers to amemory ai
process rvas to substitute letter, symbols mnemonics
Each computer now has a mnemonic code, although,
models' Machine language is still used by the computer as it processes
data, but assemble language software
first translates the specified operation code symbol into its machine
language equivalent.
absolute.numeric location,
b nger assign actual address
n location in the program to
b instructions and data.
A program wriffen by a programmer in an assembly language is called
source program. After this source
program has been converted into machine code by an assembLr,
it's referred to as anobj-ect program. The main
advantage of assembly language is that the program written in
it is easy to understand as compared to the
program of machine language. And a big drawback is that
they are machine oriented depending on the model
of processor being used. Also the program written in assembly language
is less fast to execute a"s compared to
machine language.
5.4 High Level Language
truction led, in turn to the development of high level
ass of precession problem.
ams may be used with different makes of computers
be greatly reduced when new equipment is acquired.
(a) Readability. Programs written in these languages are mcre easily readable
than assembly language
and machine language.
(b) Portability. Programs could be run on different machines with little or no change.
(c) Easydebugging. Errorsareeasytofindandremove.
@ Easy software deveropment. Software courd easily be developed
using HLL.
5.5 Translation of HLL to Machine Language
understand only machine language. So, it is necessary to conveft
the entire program
chine language. This can be done with the help of ranguage processors.
Some of the
5.5.1 lnterpreter
Interpreter translates each source program statement into a sequence
ofmachine instructions and then executes
unique
e same,
he time
gram is needed. Another difference is that interpreter
xecute the next line unless the first one has no error.
5.5.2 Compiter
Compiler translates a source prograln that is u
machine language as a whole. The compiler is
series of machine-language instructions or wi
requires a separate compiler. A compiler creates a un
there is no need ofthat source program because ou
Programming Language
5.6 Examples of High Level Language

There are many HLL languages are available today. The programmer chooses the pafticular language according
to their choice and needs. For example, COBOL is best suited for business processing while the Fortran is
suitable for scientific operations. Some of the programming languages with their main characteristics are
described below :
5.6.1 FORTRAN
F'ORTRAN is the short form for FORmula TRANslation. As the name suggest it is used extensively in numeric
data types, such as integer, real, float and compiex. It was the only ianguage developed by the IBM in 1957.
Since therr it is rnodified into many types and the latest version FORTRAN 90 is currently available in the
iridustry. The original work on FORTRAN rvas starled in 1954 when an lBM-sponsored committee headed by
John Backus on a scientific language. As the result ofthis effort the FORTRAN was introduced in 1957 for IBM
704 computer. FORTRAN is very,useful for doing scientific and mathematical computations' The main feature
of FORTRAN is that it can handle the complex numbers very easily. But the syntax of FORTRAN is very rigid'
I--OK;RAN language is not suitable for a large amount of data. So, it is not used for business programming
application.
5.6.2 COBOL
COBOL statrds for COrnmon Business Orientei! Language and is one of the'popular languages used for
business applications. The Ianguage has provisions, which make computerization of business data processing
procedures relatively easy. COBOI- is suitable for processing large volume of data and several reports can be
generated using COBOL based on stored data. COBOL programs are characterized by their easy readability due
to their verbose syntax, and good data organization and file handling.
COBOL is an English like ianguage rvith instruction coded using self-documenting English words rather
than short abbreviations. AIso, the rules of programming in COBOL conform to many of the rules for writing.
Due to English like nature of the language, COBOL programs are easy to read and write. Thus, the people in
business who rely on colxputer output, but have no computer expertise can understand the programs written
in COBOL. That's why COBOL, is called a self-documenting language which is self-explanatory.
COBOL was initially deveioped in 1959 by a group called the CODAsYl(Conference On DAta SYstems
I-anguages) Cornmittee with the objectives of developing a standard business-oriented language for which all
nranufacturers would provide compilers
rnaj or "
"Ihe American National Standards Institute (ANSI) then formed an ANSI COBOL comrnittee to develop
more satisfactory standards for the language. This led to the availability of ANSI COBOL in 1968. This standard
was however modified and finally approved in 1985 and so it is also referedto as COBOL 85.
s.6.3 BASIC
Basic stands fbr Beginners' .All-Purpose Symbolic lnstruction Code. It is the most popular conversational
language. The main characteristics of the basic is to handle both mathematical and business problems. This
tranguage was deveioped specially for the time sharing environment but can also be used as a standard
prograinmirrg language in batch-processing environnrent. This language is easy to understand' But the main
probl., in BASIC is that most versions of this language Coes not support indexed files.
5.6.4 Pascal
pasca,l is a high l,evel Langua-9e, which was ,Jeveloped by the Prof. Nickalus Wirth at the Eidgenossisehe
Houcheshule tgfHl in Zgrich. Switzer[and. The first report on the language appeared in the
-l-cchnisehc
literature in i 97 I and revised repolls clescribing the language with its improvetnents appeared during 1972 and
i 973 . The first Pascal refereuce manual for Pascal programmers was produced in 191 4.
pascal is a general-purpose language, which can be u:;ed for wide range of nutneric and non-numeric
r1lplicaticns 'i:iir.- nrirnail ob.iectives behind the developme,tt of Pascal were:
The language should be efflrcient to implement and easy to execute on
? today,s computers.
q The language should be used for teaching about the important concept
of computer prograrn,1ing.
O The language should be used for the development of wett structured
and well organized programs.
The abore features make pascal as a very good introductory programming
language.
s.6.5 C
C is a general-purpose structured programnring [anguage. C is character
izedbythe ability to r,vrite very concise
source programs. The compiler of C is corrmonly ava-ilable for the
computers of all sizes. The c<lmpilers are
usually compacl and they generate object programs that are srnall and highly
efficient as compared to the
programs written in any other language. The programs written in the
C language are highly portable, that is the
program written for one computer with very ttw clranges can run on
anotherionrputei. The reason forthis is
that C relegates most computer-dependent features to its library functions. Thus,
every versio;r of C is
accomplished by its own set of library functions.
Dennis Ritchie originalll' developed C in 1970s at Bell ]'elephone Laboratories.
It was the modified version
of two earlier languages, called BCPL and B, which were also developed
at Bell Laboratories.
5.6.6 C++
C++ 15 6n object-oriented prograinming language. As software systems
develop into more po,,verful instruments,
they also beconle more complex. Every new release ofa word processor,
database, or spreadsheet program is
longer than the previous one, and contains more features. This
increasing size and complexity makes it difficult
to manage the software development process. As programmers struggle
to deal with this complexity. new ideas
emerge' one collecticn ofthese ideas is based on aphilosophy calLd
object-oriented prograrlming.
While obf ect-oriented programs can be written ir
languages such as c or BASIC, these lar-rguages lack
certain feafures. For example, C provides no mechanismto hide variables
fi,orn nnauthorized access. C also does
not en lass ofanother. The lsnguage
by Dr. I Labs in the early I
1' the C++ Ianguage. .ee
states.
called r* and future C++. existed.irr
released Af&T versions and that all serious cornpilers support,
contemporary C++ consists of traditional C r I
rvith sorne nevr features which are approved by the comrniitee but
irnplemented by only few coppiiers. Future
C++ 15 the larlguage. which is under discussion in the committee with new
t'eatures that are approved - but not
yet implemented."
The uage, as expressed by the designer himself at a deverloper cont'erence. is
t
to rnake ng a natural part of the languag-e. The three ciefining traits that rnake r.r
C
an object ulation, inheritance, ana potyriorphism. \\rhen we look carelulll,at etrc5
of these traits, we see that chapters support or cornplement thenr.
5.6.7 JAVA
Java is developed by James Gosling the chief programmer of Sun
Microsysterns. Java is an object oriented
progratnming language. vvhich rvas developed after C+t-. Java was
designed to be srnall. simple and portable
across platforms. James Gosling star-ted a project on controlling
.onrrr., elcctronic clevices with a Ianguagc
cj'-l'' Atler some titne he flound that the C] t--i- rvas not suitable for ihe projcct. They faced
rnany problerns lvilh ttrc.
complicated aspects of c++. with progrant bugs arld memory lcaks.
So, Gosling decidecl to develop ncrv
language, which could overcome thesc problerrs.
As Gosling liked the object orientecl features sf ft+r-so he decitled
to take C++ as thc base for.the nerv
language. He developed a new language oak, rvhicrr was rater
cailed Java.
Java is nrost poplrlar because it is used fol internet prograrnnrirrg. previously
only HTMt, was use6 for
creating web pages. But it is difficult to depend on onl,v o* tunguu!.
for deveiopin! tne application, as is
clivcrsitv exists on tlre intcrnet itr ternts of harcl,,r'alc and soltu,arc.
se.virs on the internet have to store nrultiplc
Programming Language 71
copies of the same program cornplied fbr different hardware and software environment.
Java is the answer to these problems that exists on the internet. In Java, you can write a single program
(called an applet) that is platform-independent. Platfonn independent means that the program can be used at
any platform with any operating system. 'fhe applet can be executed by any internet. Java is an object oriented
language as that of C++ but it has some difference as compared to C++.
In Java, there are :
tr No pointers
O No multiple inheritance
O No goto
n No operator overloading
In C++ we can allocate and deallocate the memory by nerv and delete. The Java language has an ernbedded
auto garbage collection mechanisrn. The garbage colle ctor simplifies Java programming by automatically freeing
,.,*ryu."u*henitisnotrequired.SoJavaissitnpleascomparedtotheC++.Javacodeisdividedintoclasses.
Java isiike any client/server model. Java is reliable. A reliable is one that allows you to write programs that do
not crash when least expected and will also be bug-free. Java is comparable in speed to other languages like
g++. Java has sophisticated multitasking features are integrated into the language which itself, which make it
very simpie to use and, at the same tirne very robust.
5.6.8 Visual Basic
VISUAL BASIC is a high level programrning language evolved from the earlier DOS version called BASIC.
BASIC means Beginners' All-purpose Symbolic [nstruction Code. It is a fairly easy programming language to
learn. The codes look a bit like English Language. Different software companies produced different version of
BASIC, such as Microsoft QBASIC, QtIICKBASIC, GWBASIC ,IBM BASICA and so on. VISUAL BASIC is an
event driven Programming. T'his is the main divergence from the old BASIC. In BASIC, the program is executed
sequentially. In VISUAL BASIC, due to its \\/indows Interface, the users may click on a certain object randomly,
so each object has to be programmed independently to be abl e to response to those actions (events). Thsrefore,
aVISUAL BASIC Program is made up of many sub-programs, each has its orvn program codes, and each can
be executed independently and at the same tirne each can be linked together in one way or another.
s.6.9 C# (C Sharp)
C# (pronounced "C sharp") is a nerv language designed by Microsoft to combine the power of C/C++ and the
prodirctivity of Visual Basic. Initial language specifications also reveal obvious similarities to Java, including
syntax, strong web integration and automatic memory management. So, ifyou have programmed in either C++
or Jal,a, adding C# to your knowledge of langtnges should be fairly straightforward.
C# is a modern, JAVA like, object-oriented language that enables programmers to quickly build a wide
range of applications for the new Microsoft .NET platform.
5.6.10 vb.NET
.NET framework has been pluggecl by Microsoft as a new progranrming model for the Internet age' Personally
I prefer to think of it as a new programrning model for almctst et,erything, that is V/indows related.
Seriously, if you are working with Windows programming, then I believe .NET is going to be well worth
learning for future projects, sinrply becattse it will rrake progratnming rnuch easier.
The most significant aspect of .NEl' architecture is that code in VB, and C# is compiled not to nativc
executable code, but to an Internrediate Lung'uage (lL),with the final step of converling to native executable
lornrally happenirrg at runtime. Such code is terrned ncrnaged code C++ code can optionally be marked as
managedcode.irrrvhichcaseitgctscompiledlolLtoo.ThismakesyourC+l codeinteroperablervithVBand
C# and allows 1,ou to take advantage of all .NET features, but does restrici you to not using some features o1'
C* i (such as rnultiple inheritance) that are not sttppofted on .NE'I'.

5.7 4GL Languages
The fourth generation oflanguage is not clearly defined as that
ofthe other generations. Fourth generations of
languages ale commonly referred as 4GL. It is ahigh level language
that requires significantiy few-er instructions
to acconrplish a parlicular task than a third generation languige does.
Thus, u p-gru*.", should be able to
write a program faster in 4CL than in third generation tanguage.
t, rnost fourth generation
procedure in the program,
e data on a screen; such as
Programmer has io write a
series of forowing steps ,
step l: Readarecordfromthemasterhle.
step 2: It matches with the desired record, display the name.
step 3: If it does not match the desired record, Go to step L
However, in a non-procedural language the programmer would write
a single instruction that says :
Get the name of desired student from master file
Most of the 4GL languages are used to get information from files and
databases. The SeL (Structured
Query Language) is the common example of 4GL language. Ifwe have to find the name
of student,,Rohan,, then
v,,e rvill write the t'ollowing statement in SeL:
SELECTNAME FROM MASTER

WHERE NAME:,Rohan,;
Solved Exercises
Ql. What is a program ?

Ans' A prograln is a set of logically related instructions that are arranged
in a sequence that guides the
colnputer to solve a problem.
Q2. What is cornpiler ?
Ans' compiler translates a source program that is usually written in
a high level language by a programmer into
rnachine Ianguage.
Q3. which languagc processor convefts assernbly ranguage into machine language ?
Ans. Assembler
Q4. Which language processor converts HI_L into machine language ?
Ans. Compiler.
Q5. Machine written using which symbols ?
Ans.Machine lyritten using binary jigits ie., 0,s and I,s.
Q6. Editor is ?
Ans. IVlanipulate the text.
Q7. What is a source program ?
Ans' A program to be translated into machine language oi user written program using high-level language.
Q8. Which code used by Low-level computer language ?
Ans. Mnemonic codes.
Q9. What does a compiled program rnean in colxputer technology ?
Ans. A progrant converted into object prograln.
Ql0. What is interprcter ?
Ans' The language processor! wliich convefts source program into object
program iine by line, is called
tnterpreter.
Q11. Name the types of software with example for each.
Ans. There are two types of software-system software and application software. Examples are-Translators
(interpreters, compilers and assemblers), utilities, Operating systems etc. arethe system softrvare. Payloll
system, Financial accounting etc are application software.
Q12. What is linker ?
Ans. Linker is a program, which does the merging of individual program modules so that they can communicate
with each other.
Ql3. Give the tull form of :
(,) FORTRAN
(1,) COBOL
(ilD BASIC
(rv) Prolog
Ans. (l) FORurulaTRANslation.
(li) COmmon Business Oriented Language.
(lil) Beginners' All Purpose Symbolic Instruction Code'
(lv) Programming in logic
Ql4. Explain the functions of a loader.
Ans. The basic function of the loader is :
- Assign a load time storage area to a program-storage allocation' area-Program relocation
- Making a program to exeiute properly from its load time storage
- Keeping the program into assigned memory area-loading'
- Linking of programs with each other-linking'
assembly language ?
Q15. What is the difference hetween rnachine language and
consisting of I s
Ans. Machine language is a sequence of instructions written in the form of binary numbers
responds directly. A machine language will have two parts' The first part is
and 0s to which the
"orpri",
the command or operati;n that teils the compuier what function is to be performed. The second part ofthe
or the data on which the desired
instruction is the operand that tells the computer where to find store
operation is to be Performed.
T|e rnachine language is the onty one that computer can understand di'ectly.
programmer burden, mn and
memory aid. One of the the
ffer, symbols mnemonics ine-
has a mnemonic code, al tual
by the computer as tt processes
symbols vary among makes and models. Machine language is still used
but assemble linguag. software, first translate the specified operation code
symbol into its rnachine
data,
language equivalent.
Ql6. Explain:
(,) Assembler. (1,) ComPiler'
(ili) InterPreter.
langLrage rvritten
Ans. (/ Assembler. Assembler is the set of program, which is used to convert assembly
prograrn into machine level language andvice versa'
e quivalent anrl
(li) Compiler. This is another translator used to convert high-level langLrage to tnachinc
yicevei.sa. compiler translates program as r'vhole program at once.
prosralll into nrachine
(iii)lnterpreter. This is a translator used to .onu.,1 high-level language r'vritten
level language. [t convefls programs step-by-step'
Q17' What is language translator
Ans. As we know co in such ^ ..,^.,
^..^L a way can^-- ,,-rror
understand its own lan lnachine
language. While using anothei language (assernbly or higir age)' arrd

nnot recognize these languages' So, to use
level and
provides to cotr
Saraswati lnformatics practices
assembly languages we require a translator, which
converts programs written in assembly or high-level
language to its machine equivalent language.
Bevlew Questions
l. What is prograrnming ?
(a) FOMRAN
(6) coBol
(c) BASIC
(@ Prolog.
8. What makes JAVA different form C++ ?
9. What is a programming language ?
10. What is HLL ? Give some examples.
ll. Write the advantages of HLL.
12. Distinguish between COBOL and BASIC.
13. Who developed PASCAL ?
14. Name some scientific languages and business application
languages.
15. Who developed JAVA ?
16. What do you mean by 4GL? Give some examples
of4GL languages.
17. Write short notes on the following :
(a) CoBoL
(b) PASCAL
(c) c
(d) Ct+
(e) JAVA
Chapter - 6
Windows Operoting System
6.1 lntroduction
Operating system is a set of programs, which manages the resources like hardware and software of the
colnputer, pl'ocesses comtnands, and controls program execution. As the foundation of all computer operations,
it is the most complex program executed on the computer.
-fhc
operating system is the software loaded into memory when a computer starls. This concept is called
trooting. While booting, the operating system organises all hardware and operating program instructions to co-
ordinate between them. The operating system is the software, which makes the computers ready for us to use.
It tells the processor to do its jobs, i.e., obeying the commands of the user.
Once the operating program instructions are loaded into the memory other applications like word processors,
spreadsheets. databases, paint programs and other progratns can be executed easily ; since these softwares are
application programs which run under an operating system.
'l'he rnost popular operating system is MS-DOS (MicroSoft Disk Operating System), MS-Windows 95/98/
2000, Windows NT, OS2, Lynix and UNIX (multi-user operating system).
.,vith computer by typing
MS-DOS and UNIX are Character User Interface (CUI) that makes communication
conrnraud lines.
6.2 What is Windows 98 ?

Windows 98 is an operating system program that controls all the parts of your computer. It uses a Graphical
User htterface (GUI). This kind of inteface displays graphical objects called icons, which represent the items
yor-r use. The icons are buttons that when "pushed" activate the item.
All program; that use the Windows operating system have a common user interface that makes it easy to
learn and use different programs that run under Windows. A common user interface means that progratns have
cotnmon features, such as the same menu commands. For example, you will find the cotnmand to open a file is
the same command in all Windows 95i98 applications.
'fhe Windows operating system gets its name from its use of rectangular boxes called Windows that are
r,rsed to display infornration and other programs. Multiple windolvs can be open at the same time, making it easy
to lrove fiom one task to another. This is how people work, more that likely you have severai projects you are
rvorking on during the day and need fo be able to switch easily frorn one to the other.
Windows 95/98 are the operating systems, which work as the interface betlveen the user and the comptlter.
Once yon boot or start your computei, you-will see a e screen as shorvn in Fig' 6'l '
In simple terms, we can say that in c[rirputers, vrhich you can work aud play
gatlreS. Once your computer is ON you will get Windo rsion of Windows you have on
vogr.colnputer. The first screen that you see is the Desktop. The desktop looks dif{'erertt on diff'erent computers
depending on the way Windows desktop is set up.
(75)
76 Saraswati lnformatics Practices (Xl)
,#
**#,
llp
Fig. 6.1 Windows starting screen.
6.3 Parts of Windows

The Windows which you see in the next figure, describes number of different sections
which are called parts of
Windows. These parts have different uses at different places.
6.3.1 Desktop Icon
This is the main screen of MS-

Windows. It is used by some
operating systems. The desktop
display may show program icons,
hles, andmenus, to selectfrom. Also,
in the desktop, you can see the
taskbar, start menu, etc as shown in
Fig.6.2.
6.3.2 Taskbar
It is a strip (bar). It is along rhe
bottom of the screen in windows 95/
98. The names of all open windows
are displayed on the taskbar. you
can quickly switch between
windows using taskbar.
Start Menu
Fig. 6.2 Windows deskop.
6.3.3 Start Menu
On the left of the taskbar, a box with name Start is displayed. This button is used
to stafi difi-erent programs or
applications. When you press the button, a menu is displayed (as shown in Fig.
6"3) to execute the program.
6.3.4 Menu
It is a list of options displayed on a computer from which you can choose. Menus
may be in words, pictures or icons. There are pull down, popup and pop down
menus. Menus help us to move around a software program. For instance, from the
start menu of windows 95/98, there are number of options like shut Down..., Log
Off..., Run ...., Programs , etc., catbe chosen.
6.3.5 Menu Bar

It is a long bar across the top of an application/program window as
shown in Fig. 6.4. All the menus available in the program are listed
Fig.6.3 Windows start menu.
by menu bar. The menu bar can only be active or located when a
program or application is oPened.
Fig. 6.4 Menu bar of a window
In the above figure we see a series of menu commands such as File, Edit, View, Go, Favorites and Help'
This
line is called as the Menu Bar.
Each of these menu items has several options within it. From the File menu click on the File on the menu bar,
we will see a pull down menu with NeW Open, Save, Save As, Print and Exit will appear on the screen'
Once the drawing is made, you might have to make some changes in it. Such as copy, cut, moving
and
part oi image editing. If you do not want to delete or cut the portion or whatever last
pasting, etc. Allthese are a
click on the Undo option in the Edit menu. You will get back the former result or you will
action you have taken,
get original picture.
In the View menu, there are six options available :
1. Toolbox - This option will show or hide the toolbox. Tick mark against the toolbox indicates that the
toolbox is currentlY oPen.
2. Color box - This iptilon will enable you to show or hide colour box at the bottom of your paint area.
A tick mark against colour box indicates that the color box is currently open.
3. Status bar - This option will enable you to show or hide Status bar, which is displayed at the bottom
of the paint window.
4^ Zoom -This option has number of choices like : Small Size, Large Size, Custom, e/c.
5. View Bitmap The drawing will be displayed in full screen without the menus and other tools' Click
-
on the drawing area or pressing Esc key will retum to normal view'
A tick mark against the text
6. Text Toolbar - This oftion enables you to show or hide the text toolbar.
tvolbar should be which means this toolbar is activated'
menu'
You can change the size of your cartoon by using the Stretch/Skew option from Image
6.3.6 Status Bar

along the bottom of the screen as shown in Fig. 6.5. Information is displayed
by most
It is a s'rip or bar
the screen and other small but
applications here. The current date and time, the position of the cursor on
is also called as status bar'
interesting piece of news can be included by status bar. Windows taskbar
iri iX'...iiffi*i'$F,,'.iitii:.i',iiii::.,.i:ni,I ii,l,ijiffiiiii

Fig.6.5 Windows status bar.
78
6.3.7lcons
The icons are the small pictures on your desktop as
shown
in Fig. 6.6. These icons are used to run specific programs
and are known as the shortcuts to those programs.
Normally,
you will find number of icons on a desktop.
These icons may be program icons, file icons, or folder

icons. Most common icons are available on the desktop
are :
D My Computer (provides complete hardware and

software on your computer)
Fig. 6.6 Icons on desktop.

O My Documents
My Documents is a desktop folder that provides you with a convenient place to store documents, graphics,
or other files you want to access quickly.
Intemet Explorer (Microsoft Internet browsing program

1
o Recycle Bin (all deleted items are stored in this iolder.
used to surf Internet).
You can recall or delete permanently deleted
items, etc.).
6.4 Mouse Operations

Generally' the basic technique of using a mouse depends
on the program for which it is used. A mouse can
to open any program, file, or fblder either on desktop
us-ed be
or in any window. The mouse buttons used are as
follows :
tr Left button - Selection ofprogram or icon or application.

a Right button - Invoking shortcut/content menu as shown in Fis. 6.7.
Fig. 6.7 Shortcut menu using right click.

In a window, a mouse can be used in the following modes
;
nter key, this witl open the program, file, or folder.

n will open or execute the program, file, or folder.
r example, Microsoft Word icon) or click left mouse
cut/content menu will appear as shown in Fig. 6.g.
and move it to wherever you want it on the screen.
This is called as dragging.
Windows Operatinq Svstem 79
Openning
Microsoft Word
using right-click
Open
Fig. 6.8 Opening an application using right click.
From the above figure contents menu, move the mouse pointer to Open option and click left mouse button
to open the program, file, or folder. You will see that Microsoft Word window will appear as shown in Fig. 6.9.
ilbla:$r-rridSin,HGlp:, , :. :: X
,, , , ]..
!
: i !:r:r': :..: :::: :
.t-o. , : 6"'l ,'
Fig. 6.9 Microsoft word opened using right click.

5.5 Using Menus
In eYery window, there is a menu, which provides several options inside them. These options can
be operated
either using the keyboard or through mouse. To activate a menu like File, we can use the mouse
as :
O Click on the File as shown in Fig. 6.10.
D Move the mouse inside the File options.
D Click on any option, which you want.
Types ofmenus are described below :
n Pop up menu - A pop up menu is a list of choices, or a memr. It is put

on the screen wherever the user has positioned the cursor. This is
useful when the user wants both to read the menu and look at a
particular part of the screen at the same time. A pop up menu can be
moved to a different place by moving the cursor.
n Pop Down/Pull Down menu - A pull down/pop down menu is a
menu that is displayed by choosing from a list of menus at the top of
the computer screen. Choosing a menu causes a 1ist of choices to be
displayed in a column running down from the top of the screen. An
item can be selected from this menu by clicking on it with a mouse, or
highlighting it with the cursor. For exampre, the rrle menu in Notepad.
Fig. 6.10 Operating menus using mouse.

Note. The menu options may appear differenfly in different programs.
6.6 Window Operations

The small buttons in the upper-right corner as shown in Microsoft s,ord window are
very handy to operate.
tr Use the g1i (Minimize) button to reduce the window to a button on the taskbar. Click
the taskbar-
button to open the window again.
tr Use the
llinii @axinnze) button to enlarge the window so that it covers the entire desktop (except for
the taskbar).
tr Use the (Restore) button to return the window to its pre-maximized size.
@ Use the (Close) button to close the window.
6.7 Recycle Bin

Recycle Bin (all deleted items are stored in this folder. you can recall or remove
When you del the
l).If you want the
. Onec the file n it
Fig.6.11 Recycle rrin.

6.8 My Computer
My Computer is one of the most important icons of Windows desktop. My Computer folder contains
icons for
ail the drives (A:, C:, D:, etc. as shown in Fig. 6.12.) to be opened i)., yorcan see
the contents like files and
folders in the respective drives. My Computer also contains icons of Control panel,
printers, Dial up Network,
etc.
On clicking and Enter or double clicking on the My Computer icon on the desktop, you will get the screen
as glven.
File. The computer files may hold a document such as your program, letters, group of records or other programs.
It can also be used to store text, graphics, sound or video. Every file on computer has a name.
,:rFgqltrl d 1? EC
il (rrrd -^ ?:68
l:1 rreel ?e/i ils
Fig. 6.12 My ComPuter window.
6.8.1 Opening Your Drive

To see the contents of the disk drives :
D Doubte-click the icon of the drive you want to work. For example, click on C: as shown in
Fig."6.13.
Namu
tBmp File Fulder 'tzl24l0D 7..^ ;,
}tourism File Folder 2113101 10.. ',:
Jtt File Fotder 3Itr9J01 3:... i
iJTurboc Fils Folder 1212CJ00 ?^.. i
Folders }unzipned File Folder 318101 11:.. , '
llviewerS Fiie Folder 2.." jjil

Filo trotder 1... ij:li
File Folder ,j
9rlv My Doeu.,. 1A23fiA 2--- ii i
idwl Hlp32 BMK File '$

iIT-ti1u:
Fig. 6.13 C drive folders and files.

You will see that the Windows displays the files and folders on your drive C:
drive as given.
Note. Folders can contain files, programs, and other folders.
Before browsing floppy disk drive A:, make sure that your drive contains a floppy
disk. Here browsing is
to move through the floppy disk, any other disk, on the windows or on the Internet.
6.9 Creating a Folder

A folder is a directory which contains number of files and folders. As you know that computer
stores the data
or information in the named files. You may face problem while locating your files
in future. It is safe to store files
in a folder. For example, suppose you want to store your file in a folder
called'.MyFOLDER,,.
D Click the drive in the I\{y Computer window where you want to create the new folder.
tr On the File menu, point to New, and then click Folder.
The new folder appears with a temporary name as New Folder
tr Type a name for the new folder as MYFOLDER, and then press ENTER.
t"l
r
Now your folder "MYFOLDER" is created in C: drive. ;]
E-yr4-oEBtr
Note' Ifyou wantto create a newfolder within afolder, cHck thefolderand then followsteps
as explained above.
6.10 Opening Folder

To open a file or folder :
tr Double click or click and Enter

MyComputer.
D Double click or click and Enter the drive C:
which contains your folder,.MYFOLDER,,.
D Double click or click and Enter the folder
"MYFOLDER" which will show the
MYFOLDER window as shown in Fig.
6.14. .lritifr;ffi|$rilffiflii
Fig. 6.1't MYFOLDER window.
6.1 0.1 Operating Myfolder
The small buttons in the upper-right comer of a window are very handy to operate
windows as shown in Fig.
6.15.
ir,i: lr I
Fig. 6.15 MITOLDER tifle bar.

D Use the (Minimize) button to reduce the window to a button on the taskbar. Click the taskbar
button to open the window again as shown in Fig. 6.16.
Fig. 6.16 MITOLDER in windows taskbar.

Windows Operating System
tr Use the [,[*'$1 (Maximize) button to enlarge the window so that it covers the entire desktop (except for
the taskbar).
n Use the
{ (Restore) button to return the window to its pre-maximized size.
D Use the !fr (Close) button to close the window.
6.11 Creating a File

Like a folder, a stores set of information, records, or programs. You are doing your daily home work using
lile
different notebooks. You can do the same work using computer files.
In the above section, you have already created a folder named "MYFOLDER". Now, in the same folder you
can create as many files as you want. For example, suppose you want to create a file with the name "MYFILE".
D OpenthefolderMYFOLDER.
D In the MYFOLDER window, click on File, New and click on Text Document option as shown in the
Fig.6.17.
Fig. 6.17 Creating a file in MYFOLDER.
From the above action, a docurnent icon will

appear in the MYFOLDER window with the name of
New Text Document as shown in Fig. 6.18. i ruwerotr
'y6,111s9{--:
tr Type a name for the new file as MYFILE,

and then press ENTER.
Now your file "MYFILE" is created in folder

NiIYFOLDER.
Fig. 6.18 Text document icon in MYFOLDER.

6.11.1 Opening File MYFILE
D Double click or click and press Enter key on MYFILE.
Here, a Notepad window with the name N{YFILE.

Fig. 6.19 MYFILE in Notepad.
6.11.2 Changing the Name of a File or Folder

tr In My Computer click on C: drive and ENTER.
tr Click on the f,rle or folder you want to rename.
D On the File menu, click Rename.
tr Type the new name, and then press ENTER.
Or
3 In My Computer click on C: drive and ENTER.
o Click on the hle or folder you want to rename as shown in Fig. 6.20.
,i,,, .. i.L,,
" . ,r*14'r.., 1- 'rf
_
t.,t:{iL,.:::.- -' ....- ;::',,
Uodo
uEtillltElt
:!
----J
F$farts
faftl
.,1
I
IErbo6
Fig.6.20 Renaming a folder using menu option.

D Right click on the file or folder and click Rename as shown in Fig. 6.21.
tr Type the new name, and then press ENTER.
Note- A file name can contain upto 255 characters, including spaces.Itcannot contain the followingcharacters:
\/:*?"<>l
6.11.3 Copying a File or Folder
o In My Computer, click the file or folder you want to copy.
tr On the Edit menu, click Copy.
o Open the folder or disk where you want to put the copy.
D On the Edit menu, clickPaste.
Or
D In My Computer, click the file or folder you want to copy.
D Right click, on the file.
Windows Operating System
D Fromthe menu click Copy.

D Open the folder or disk where you want to put the copy.
tr Right click on the folder or disk.
D CLickPaste.
X*}? &{, ,F&'il:iiiac t'i*l$'

':,1 :
U[. C{Jf
tefql.- "
Ncdtrec f ltP
_l __l
I
"r l
Pmf ---JFiles
F.sgrum Prilo*t$
t-1 , \Y'
, -"-1
,{ i ..) ___i
rcata scot gBrios Tall/
I
J -.--J
temF Turboa
Fig"6.2lRenaming a folderusing menu option.
6.11.4 Deleting File or Folder

c In My Computer, click the file or folder you want to delete.
3 On the File rnenu. click Delete.
Or
tr In My Computer, click the file or folder you want to delete.
D Right click and click Delete,
6.12 Windows Explorer

Windows Explorer is another application included in Windows 95/
98. Using Windows Explorer you can view and organize the files on
your disk. You can start the Windows Explorer application in many
ways. To access your Windows Explorer :
tr Click on Start, Programs, Windows Explorer as shown

inEig.6.22.
D Size the window for your desired viewing. You can also
size each of the vertical windows within the larger one to
see all the information.
Fig. 6.22 Starting Windows Explorer
6.12.1 Parts of Windows ExPlorer

On the left side of your Explorer rvindow, you will see the clrives, folders and files as shown in Fig. 6.23. The
Explorer t'tciv begiirs with Desktop, followed by My Computer and lists all your drives, followed by other
i'oiders ,.ri I'i o-{:rirms colll;-iued ivirhiu the f,)esktop and My Computer.
The following three imporlant views are in Windows Explorer :

D The indentation levels in Explorer's left pane indicate your directory structure. On the right side are
the files and folders that are contained within the folder you select at left pane. Your selected folder
appears to be open, with its contents spilling out into the right panel.
A A minus sign (-) on a folder means that it is fully expanded. It means all the files and folders are
displayed in the right panel.
D A plus sign (+) on a fblder means that more folders and files are contained insicle it that can visible.
The Explorer should be closed to the last item in the list that comes up, as shown in Fig.. When you wanr
to see details of your frles (1.e., size, date created,/modified), click on 'Yiew', 'Details'. When you just want ro
see a list of files, click on 'View', 'List' .
The Windows Bxplorer is a very powerful tool for exploring your system. There are a couple of things that
can enhance its power even more though.
Drives Menu bar Sub-Foiders Files within Folders
Fully
expanded
drive
Folder 7/4101 A:58 PM
F aldet Right Panel
Frle l-oldar !01 2 42 Ptl
'i
Left Panel_ l: r!
'0.1
l.licrosoft Word
llicrosoft Word
27KB 3/l {ml l0:00 AM
E2KB 7i2Bl01 1t 40 AM
, JAmarRoh E--rca 09 l{icrosol1 Word 73Kts 5129/01 r 33 PM
-t clsl I083 fics-i4 Microsorl Word 29KB I 2/29/00 S:56 PM Date created
Folders/ EdrtPad csl Mrcrosott Vlord 4OKB 3,/r 9/01
Directories --.1 FFv26

cs-s.1 PageMaker 6 0 200K-B si tl.l0l I 0 2B PM ormodified
i-J HTML doo Cs 54pro PageMaker 6 0 253K8 3i1:?{ll l0:36 [>M
dancing doll Biimap lmaqc g68KB
il rmages 711t01 4:21 PM
-J J lntsrnel_slide
FoxPro Mar Bitmap lmage 775K8 413$/01 ,t:13 PM
Directory ,-l ,dkl 2 I TIF lmaqe Doc, 2.96 6/30/01 l0:24 PLI
t'licrosoft HTML ]Kts 12/2Sru0 6 28 r:'M
contains more it Kpcnrs
Misosoft HTM
J Loqc
I pM File Type
files/directories f My Documents
Microsoft t.lTM I KB I 2l2gl00 6 32 I
Uilmap l,naqe l_40 _ 7fzllt 11 32 AM i
Mrcrosort Word l gKB t/tC.rul 2i5ti pM
)
Sizeof Space free on

file drive/disk
Fig. 6.23 Files and folders in windows explorer.
You can do the following operations using Windows Explorer :
n Finding Files and Folders

O Copying Files
D Moving Files and Folders
O Deleting Files and Folders
tr Creating Folder Directories
6.13 Start Menu

A start menu (see Fig. 6.3) lists a variety of everyday programs that'come with Windows, aiong with any other
applications installed on your computer. The start menu's prirnary purpose is to privide Windows
users with a
quick and efficient means of starling Drograms. When you press th; bulton, a menu is displayed to execute the
program. Lets discuss all the option of the menu one by one :
Windows Operating System 87
6.13.1 Program
Once you know way around the desktop. you're ready to begin exprementing with programs. The start menu
conatin one option known as Program. This is the first Start menu item. You will find a symbol ) right of
Program. Whenever this symbol appears it means that the menu item is selected, a second menu will appear to
the right. You can run any appliaction which is present in the staft menu by simply clicking over it. For example,
to run Run WordPad do the following :
l. Click the left mouse button on the Start button on the Taskbar.
2. Move your mouse up to point toPrograms - no need to click. The available programs and groups will
appear to the right, as shown inFig.6.24.
3. Move your mouse to the nght to point to Accessories. Again available programs and groups will
appear to the right.
4. Click the left mouse button on WordPad.
Fig.6,24 Starting WordPad using start menu.

6.13.2 Documents
This option shows you the list of currently accessed documents.
A doucment can be defined as a file that is associated with some
application" You can open any of these document which is present
in the document menu directly by clicking on them as shown in
Fig.6.25.
Fig.6.25 Currently accessed documents using start menu.

6.'13.3 Settings ,,.:St$er$ .r'. :' '.Y

When you click on the setting menu in the right side another tr)
(.
menu appear as shown in the Fig 6.26. The second menu I
contains the three options : Control Panel, Printers and Tasktrar
and start menu. Let us discuss all of them one by one.
6.13.3.1 ControlPanel
When you click on the Control Panel option the following screen
will appear:
,iir ,7'.;, li; . . li
The icons which are present on the control panel are LBQftrS,:tsBl "",
various programs provided with Windorvs. For example, Add . , ,,I :!:.'1.'
$hjt Bryrn;., .,,,
New Hardware option helps you to install new hardware device.
There are other option also we will discuss in detail in this
chapter. Fig.6.26 Settings option in start menu.
6.13.3.2 Printer
The Next option the setting
is the Printer. This option
helps you to install new
printer in your computer.
When you click on the
J Print<r
Printer option the following ;i hp de*kiei !4Sc eaieE 0 Llser lnle
screen will appear as Printers desl.jef 918c ;erree [2] 0
tp LaserJet I 000 a
shown in Fig. 6.27.
LBssJet 1000 DOS 0
Thts folder contains LaserJet 6P 0
information €bout your La*erJet 6P/6MP. EnhancEd 0
currEnt printers 6nd a
wizard to help you HP LaserJet 6PlEl'4P - Stendard 0
irstall rerq ones
To get infornrsticn
about d printer thst's
already installed,
right-click the printer's
rco n.
I
Fig. 6.27 Currently added printers.

6.13.3.3Taskbar and Start Menu
I 1..:.. : ;
, r aKtB UF*tr') l€iar fraru
This is the last option on the setting menu. When you select the
Taskbar option the Taskbar Properties windows will appear as
shorvn in Fig. 6.28.
You can use the Taskbar properties to customize your Taskbar
and their start menu.
l. dl, :F.,ltcsrg ,*llsG.lw
Fig. 6.28 Tiaskbar properties window

Windows Operatinq Svstem 89
6.13.4 Finding Files and Folders

and then can't remember what you named it or where it was saved, you can search for the file
If you save a file
using the Windows Find feature. Windows 95D820001ME allows you to locate files based on file name, a
portion of a name, date, and/or the text included in a file. To
conduct a search, you should
O Use your Start menu and choose Find, Files and

Folders, or
D Click on Tools on the menu bar and choose Find, .-.;.; J
Files or Folders, or 1'q5'"e.1
D Right click My Computer, and choose Find. ,.q
The Find dialoge box comes up which looks like Fig.

6.29.
Fig. 6.29 Find a file in window.
Usingbasic search, ycu indicate the file name or a portion of the file name (if you don't know it all) and
a
search either your entire computer, or any drives or directories that you choose.
Here are some examples of ways of searching :
tr You saved a Word document to your hard drive [C:] but you can't remember the name or where it was
saved (but would recognize it). The syntax for entering into the 'Named:' box would be :
*.doc (this shows all files with a .doc extension)
*.ppt (this shows all files with a .ppt extension)
tr You want to hnd the hle called 'budg-req. but you only remember part of the name
-
'budg'. The
syntax would be budg* (this shorvs al1 files beginning with budg).
tr In the 'Look in:' box, click the Browse button and click on [C:] so that the search will starl from the
main level or root of the C: drive.
O Then click on 'Find Now' to stafi the search as shown in Fig. 6.30.
dl$
?w
[.1tm1$6,$*d$i!
t,..r,'
-'{x.ea, -'. - . tli*1**l
ii."
-,. J
tB.?a& lft'
leh 6r:
---- ';a
. ?'}
{i 1mlird*5,.iAorUm '
Modittsd
E866CC -l ctProgra gl KB Mierosoft 3t6t01 B'03 P
I Bg6 ,-l C:\progra 9SKB Microsofl r/t/01 s 42 P

.l/1/01
DA72FO l C:\Progra TBKB Microsoft 5:45 P
3e34000 3s34400 3 - l Flgagan\ 31 KB Microsoft I 2/241$B s: l,

'.r c'\Progra ??KB Microsofl i 2r2si00 I ioi
{j4d4 1 5a5S J C:\Progra 2tKB Microsoft r2129/00 l .o,
El+*oseate J clProgra 62KB Microsofl 12129/00 1:0,
542F688? .*,.')
cr\Progra dgKB Miffosofl r2l2gi00 1 li
it:r:?qE{) :-t nlo.^^'- ?a9t} M;vnra?t ,rrnrnt r cl n:J
I ll
s fiSt lleo!
Fig. 6.30 Find a file in windor+'.

Your search results screen wiil list the file or files, which match your criteia. The screeu functions like
a
window in Explcrer or My cornputer. Here you may open, delete, move. and eopy files.
G.13.5 Help
When you ciroose this option windows will display you the HTI,IL Help engine whieh displays HTML pages
containing help information. You start Windows help by clicking start , Help. The following Fig 6"31 appe
ar on
your screen :
Fig. 6.31 Windows help using start menu.

As you see the abo'e F.ig. 5.31 windows helps topics are displayed by cateogry'. you can click
on anv of
the topic to kno'w about that topic. You can also serach the topic bv clicking o, the
,e*ch cption.
6.13.5 Run
There are several ways to start an application. One of the way is to use the Run option
under the start menu.
Suppose you want to ruIl a CD. Lrsing the mouse, hold down the Start button and
seiect the Run Option as
shown in Fig. 6.3.
After clickirrg on Run, a Run dialog box will appear as shown in Fig. 6.32.
Fig. 6.32 Running an application using Run option.

Prom the Run dialog box, Click Browse button to see the Browse diaiog box for exploring CD or other drive
contents as shown in Fig. 6.33.
?d r$t 'l(D
t;il q8i.E,il
II Deskt[p
I# 3x Fl
$ kty 0ocurnanls
y (6mpuler 'it
?i: Floppy [.{)

0ata VrtinSE [[:]
Dala !/inSE [t:t:l
Dat.l lrara {Erf
Detal {F;l
Daia [G:]
{f,
iit:r "a*
-ffi
FkdS &N
i''l riindowsj
Fig.6.33 Selecting an application in different drives.

After, selecting CD-drive, the CD drive contents will be displayed in Browse dialog box. Now elick the file
rvhich you want ro run. If you click the start file (or any) as shown in Fig. 6.34, it will run the program
aecorciingly.
7 ':ttr, ,_. {
Frhsar*e m I
'\1 r
Fih"'r$g,,pe: Carce! l:
Fig. 6.34 Running a game using start.
6.14 Customization of Taskbar

Wren you right-click on a blank area of the taskbar, a shotcut menu (often called a context rzenu) pops up as
shown in Fig. 6.35. The main pulpose of this menu is to give you access to Taskbar customization. There are
also options included in the menu to help you rearange the open windows on your desktop.
Desktop Taskbar Context menu Toolbar options
Fig. 6.35 Desktop taskbar.

The first itetn on the taskbar's shortcut menu is toolbars. Toolbars contains a menu with five options
:
Address, Links, Desktop, Quick Launch and New Toolbar.
tr Address' Use the Address toolbar to access files and Web pages right frorn the tasl<bar. you use this
toolbar exactll, like you use the one in your favourite Web Browser.
tr Links. Remember the Links toolbar right next to the Address toolbar in Intemet Explorer. This is the
sarre toolbar. You do not have to open lnternet Explorer to access these links.
tr Desktop. When you select Desktop, the Desktop toolbar is added to the taskbar. The Desktop
toolbar contains all the folders, files and shoftcuts on your desktop. Use the small arrows on the left
and right ends ofthe toolbar to scroll through the icons.
This toolbar can be a major advantage if you nonrrally maximize the windorv of the application you are
currently working with and your taskbar is set to be visible at all times.
D Quick Launch. By default, the Quick Launch toolbar appears just to the right of the starl button on
-faskbar.
the When you install Windows, Setup automatically places four useful icons in the
euick
Launch toolbar : Internet Explorer, Mail, Show Desktop ancl View Channels. The Launch
euick
toolbar provides one-click to access to your most commonly used application.
To add olvn shortcuts to the Quick Launch toolbar, drag the file or shoftcut to the
euick Launch toolbar
and a shortcut is created for your application or file. The Listing 6.1 describes the four buttons added
to euick
I-aunch during the Windows instatl.
listing 6.1 Built-in Desktop Toolbars.
Internet Exp I his is the shorlcut to [nternet Explorer.
Mail This is,a shortcut to Microsoft's mallager outlook Express. outlook Express i
incluced with Interent Explorer 4.x.
Show Desktop This is probably the most useful of the four buttons windorvs piayce on the
eujck
Launch toolbar. If your desktop becomes cluttered with open application windows
or if your current application window is maximized and you need to get to"your
desktop, click the show desktop icon and all your windows are automatically
mrnrmized. click the icon again and all your windows are restored to the previous
state and position.
Vier.r, Channels. when vou click this button, you get a full screen browser to view your channels.
Ifyou have not set up your Internet access, the Internet connection wizard wil
guide you through the setup.
6.1 4.1 Moving the Taskbar

By default, Windows places the Taskbar at the bottom of the screen. If you prefer the Taskbar in a different
position, you can rnove it to any ofthe four edges ofthe screen. For example, photographers often
need to drag
the Taskbar to one side of the screen to allow rnore veftical desktop real estate when rvorking with
a verlically
formatted photograph.
To move the Taskbar, point to a blank area of it and use the left mouse button to drag it where you rvant
it.
6.'l5 Gustomization of start menu
Adding a Program or File to the Start Menu :
3 Click at the bottom left of the desktop scleen.

O Point at lsettingsl.
C Click Jaskbar & Start Menu..., whe;e,ou will see the Taskbar properties rvindo'*,as shorvn in
Fig.6.21.
D Click orr the Start Menu progr.ains 1ab.
Windows Opbrating System 93
tr Click Add. .. as shown in Fig. 6.36.

tr Type in the name of the program or file, or click
B[owse... to browse to the location of the file.
D ClickNext>.
tr Double-click the folder to place the program or file
in or click New Folder ... to create a new location
for the program or file.
O Select a name for the program or file, or use the
default name.
D ClickFinish.
tr ClickOK.
Removing a Program or File from the Start Menu :
D Click Start at the bottom left ofthe desktop screen. ,j

tr [Settings].
[Settings].
Point at ;il
O ClickTaskbar&StartMemr... l, .1+ 1,,
D Click on the Start Menu Programs tab. ,: ,iJ,' ,;t

O ClickRemove... " ::* si...; ..:,l,jl i, -#l;$l 'l'i{
O Select the program or file to remove from the list. .i "
O Click Remove. t'ig. 6.36 Adding new programs into Program menu.
tr ClickClose.
tr ClickOK.
Moving a Program or File on the Start Menu :
tr Navigate to the program or file.

D Hold down the left mouse button.
D Drag the program or file to the desired location.
n Release the mouse button.
Quickly Adding an Item to the Start Menu :
D Open My Computer or Windows Explorer.

3 BrowSe to the program or file to add to the Start button.
D Drag the program or file icon onto the Start button.
tr Navigate to the area where you want the shortcut to appear while still holding down the mouse
button.
J Release the mouse button.
Quickly Removing an Item from the Start Menu :
D Right-click on the Start button.

O Clickepen.
tr Navigate to the item to be removed.
D Select the item to be removed.
tr Press the Delete key.
O Click Yes to send the item to the Recycle Bin.
6.16 Display Properties

6.16.1 Wallpaper
Windows comes with several files that can be used as the background for your Desktop. These include Black
Thatch, Blue Rivets, Bubbles, Carved Stone, Circles, Chess, Clouds, Forest, Gold Weave, Houndstooth, Metal
Links, Pinstripe,. Red Blocks, Sandstcne, efc. These files are bitrnap or BMP files and are fbund in your
Windows folder. You can create your own bitmap frles with Paint and use these as wallpaper for your
Desktop
as well.
To change your wallpaper, right-click on the
Desktop and select Properties. Select your
rvallpaper and Tile or Center it to suit your tastes.
Click on Apply or OK to implernent your wallpaper.
Experiment with the different wallpaper to
customize your Desktop to your liking. The Display
Properties dialog box should look as Fig.6.37 .
We'll talk about using Paint to create bitmap
files later in the material, but if you want to get
starled on something now, click on paint. There
are also bitmap files that you can pick up on the
Internet that can be used as wallpaper. For example,
the file you see in the Display Properties dialog
1
box above makes a striking wallpaper.
tjl
ti
t^;, llentel
r,i
,r. {'.!L ':i/j,
t '.:i! '/ ririjir'lt('." '
Fig.6.37 Display Properties background dialog box with a striking wallpaper.

You can also pick up a copy of Microsoft Plus! which allows you to customize more
than just your
wallpaper. The Plus! pack contains Desktop themes which include walipaper, icons,
screen savers and sounds
pertaining to different themes. And add-ons to the Plus! pack give you u rid"
variety. plus! is parl of Windows
98nW0/\/8.
6.16.2 Font Setting
Windows provides several fonts that enables you to vary the look of your screen and printed
text. By deafult
windwos uses a fint size of 96 dots per inch. This is referred to as small Fonts. Large
Fonts is 125 percent of
Small Font. You can also customize the font size if both small and large Fonts *" not
satisfactory . To change
the font size follow the following steps :
l. Click on the Display Properties >> Settings. The screen will appear as shown in Fig. 6.38.
2' Click on the Advanced button. This will show you the video adaptor propefly sheet as shown
in
Fig.6.39.
3' Click on rhe general tab and the down arrow to the right of the Font Size drop down list box and
select
Small Fonts, Large Fonts or other.
4. If you want to specify a custom font size, select other.
5. In the Custom font size dialog, you can select from a drop-down list in the Scale fonts tobe
_Vo ot
normal size drop-down list or type the scale you want directly into the box. The minimum
scale is 20
percent.
6. When you find the scale you want, click on OK button.
:t: .
' .,.{
in!
$l'
li'
:ir+
li. ;
Fig.6.38 Monitor display setting.

Fig. 6.39 Setting fonts.
6.16.3 Color Settings
The Color palette box in the Disptay Properties dialog allows you to determine the uurnber of colors your
application and Windows send to monitor. To chnage the number of colors available. follow the tbilowing
steps :
1. From the Display Properties dialog box, select the Setting tab,
2. Click the down arrow to the right of the Color drop-down list, and select the number of colors you
want for your application.
6.16.4 Screen Saver

In.the early days of personal computers, screen savers were a necessity. The monitors used back then were
monochrome monitors and if an image was left on the screen for any length of time, the image would burn itseif
into thc screen and be there pernianently. To prevent this from happening, screen savers were invented. Screen
savers had one function - make consta[t changes to what was displayed on the screen to prevent burn-in. As
tirne went on, screen savers became more elaborate. Some of the designs used were actually fun to watch' With
the advent of VGA color monitors, it became impossible to burn an image into the screen so the need for screen
savers disappeared. They are nice to look at however and a lot of people enjoy them. Be aware that they can
affect applications , unning on your system. This may noi be important to you, but you need to be aware of it
anyway.
To set up a screen saver, right-ciick on your Desktop and selec'i Properties. One of the tabs across the top
of the window you get will be Screen Saver. Click on this tabs and select the screen saver you want. Once you
have it configured, click on Apply or OK to implement your screen saver.
Windorvs comes with number of different screen savers including Blank Screen, Flying Windows' Flying
a
Through Space, Mystify Your Mind and Scrolling Marquee among others.
If you pick up a copy of Microsoft Plus!, you'll get a different screen saver to go with each of the themes
you get. Some of these are pretty impressive. The Plus! pack comes with Windows 98.
There are several packages of screen savers that you can pick up ifyou want something unique, as shown
inFig.6.40.
95 Saraswati tnformatics practices (Xt)
Fig. 6.40 Display properties Screen saver dialog box.

6.17 Control Pane!
The control panel is a group window which contains number
of hardware and software setting options. To add
new hardware and software, click Starl >> Settings >>
Control panel. The following Fig. 6.41 will open.
Conlrol Parel
-L:.:il
Accessibilty A,id Netr AddlRemDve Adobe 6amma DatelTime rplay
Control Panel Dptions Herdwrre Proqdmg
D
Ueethp sBttiigr in Contrql

Panel to psr36nsll29 yeqs
ffi
Find FBsi
:.1 I
$!-J
Forl* Gee lnlerilet l{.eyhoard l,1ail
DDmgutgr, Conlrolers 0pl.ions
Select.n item
desrription.
tD virN iiJ
$ *g"Sg
Msdems l'loue l'.lullinredia N<tvsrk nDBf, 0Eta
l,ltt,'asDft H,!n',r Sourcqo f32bt)
lsshlr-sdLsrrp.lrlr.r
Passwards Prir{e6 Fagionel Soundr

anBgemen SBlting$
:p
Symontec
LiveLlpdate
Syslem
dS
'J
Teleflrory
6Ucers
"f::'"i)'ry-
Fig.6.4l Control Panel group window.

6.17.1 Add New Hardware

The Add New Hardware Wizard helps you install a new component in your computer. To install a new component
follow the following steps :
1. First attach a new hardware to your computer.
2. Then double click on the Add New Hardware button in the Control Panel.
3. A window will appear on your screen as shown in Fig.6.42.
Fig. 6.42 Add New Hardware wizard.
4. Notice Add New Hardware Wizard offers two options for installing the new hardware :
D Automatically detect installed hardware,

D Install speicifc hardware
The easiest way to install the hardware is to click
automatically detect installed windows option and click
next. The add New Hardware window will display a
progress bar indicating that the installation is in
prograss. It autometically detect and configure your new
device.
617.2 Add/Remove New Soltware

As you use the computer your requirement increases'
You need different programs to install on yotlr computer.
To install a progarm you just follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer in the program manual.
You can also use the Add/Remove Program feature to
do so. To install a new program follow the following
steps :
1. Click on the Start >> Settings >> Control Panel.

2. From the Control Panel select the Add/Remove
Program. The following dialog box will appear
as shown in Fig. 6.43.
Fig. 6.43 Add/Remove Program properties.

98
3. To install a new software click on the install button. The following dialog box will appear as shown in
Fis.6.44.
Fig.6.a4 New software installation wizard.

4' Inserl the CD of the software in CD Drive and click on the Next button, which rvill guide
you to install
the software as you needed.
6.17.3 Printer lnstallation
if you want to use a printer, you must install a program to control the printer. To install a new printer you
must
L Click on the Start >> Settings >> Control panel.

2. From the Control Panel box click on the printer icon.
3. When you click on the printer icon the foilowing screen appear as shown in Fig. 6.45.
hp deekiel S48c series 0 User lrter.

hg deokiei 940c seriee iZJ g
,S hp Laeeil <t 1 0fl0 0 Usr lnt>r

hp Leoer,,l€t 1000 DSS D
This folder contains LarerJet 6P 0
lnformation about your
LarerJel EPy'BMP .
Enhanced 0
current printer5 6ftd n
nizard to help yol HP LareJel 6P,€MP .Eiandard D
instqll ne'..l ones,
To qet inf€rm3tiDn
+bcut a printer that's
6lreddy installed,
riqht-click thB printer's
tc0n,
Fig. 6.45 printer window to add new printer.

Click on the Add Printer so the Add Printer Wizard welcoming dialog box appears as shown in Fi g. 6.46.
Click the Next button to begin the installation.
Fig. 6.46 Installing printer through printer wizard.

Seiect the Local Printer if you want to
install a printer tbr the single computer.
If your want to install for tret'nvork click
on the Netrvork Printer. After selecting
click on the Next button as shorvn in
Fig.6.47.
Eig.6.17 Selecting a printer through wizard.
6. When you click on Next the following dialog box appear as shown in Fig. 6.48.
Fig. 6.48 Selecting a printer through wizard.

100
Saraswati lnformatics practices (Xl)
From the Fig' 6'48, the left pane displays printer manufacturers
and the right pane displays printer model.
Select your manufacturer and model (for example, Hewlett-Packard's
hpdeskjet 94gc series) of the printer as
shown in Fig. 6.49 andclick Next. The following screen
will appe.dras shown in Fig. 6.50.
Fig. 6.49 Selected printer.
Fig. 6.50Installing the printer driver.

6' Selct the pot where your printer is connected and click Next. The following
dialog box will appear as
showninFig.6.5l.
7 ' You can choose u nT: for the selected printer in the Printer
name text box. Notice that this dialog box
also enables you to define the printer selected for installation
as the default printer for your Windows
programs.
button. Windows start installing the printer, by asking the

ying files dialog box will appear on your desktop keeping
ration. When the printer has been installed, its icon will
q& lu Fq nrqr:ii{$ F
t:
US8001 Virtuelflinler port ior
Fig. 6.51 Selecting a printer port.

6.17.4 Date /Time
This option helps you to set the date and time of your computer. To change the date and time on you computer,
1. Click on the Control Panel >> Date/Time tab. The date/time properties dialog box is displayed as
shown Fig. 6.52.
rr€ I
'.\8
n,i
1 2
4 5 c :o e lil
11 12 13 't4 15 tn 1l
'18 1€r 20 21 & lar !d
Fig. 6.52 Date/Time setting dialog box.

The dialog box is divided into two sections : date and time. To change the month, clickthe down arrow
to the right of the month list box. This brings a drop-down list from which you can select the month.
To change the year, eithel highlight the text in the year text box and type the year directly, or use the
spinner butlons t() advancc one year at a time.
4. Seiect the day of month by clicking in the calender box.
5. The time section show you the digital and anaie--g clock at a time. You can cirange the time by using
digital text box.
6.17.5 Regional Settings
fhis is the serting which specify local
virriations for currency format. date lbrnrat,
tirrre format and otherlocal parameters. To use
this,
O Click Start >> Settings >> Controi
Panel. The control panel
window wrll
open as shown in Fig. 6.41. From the
figure, click the Regionai Seuings
icon. After clicking, the following
Fig. 6.53 will appear-in front of you.
window'
Fr.m rhe Fig. 6.5-:, click tabs and set your number, currency,
,,*" .#l;l;t:T:::l:*ttings
6.18 Shutting Down your Computer
Before switching off the computer, you must close
all the opened progr.ams or files so that the work
done does not get corrupted. In Windows, the
shutdown feature helps you to close all active
operations safely and allow you to s$,itch off the
computer.
To shutdown the computer :
O Click on Start button and Shut Dorvn from

the Starl mcnu.
D See the shutdown window box as shown
f,m;ei
inFig.6.54.
.perating rnenus using rnouse'

D From rhe shutdown window box click on rhe shur
o"r, fl,1f:54
tr Finally click Ok burton.
tr After pressing on ok button a windorv shutclc.,r.l,n messa-qe will be displayecr as :
'It's now safe to turn offyour corrputen"

D At last switch off your power. switch.
Listing 6.2 The Shut Down Windows options"
0ptions Effcct
Stand by A stale in which your ccmputer consumes less electric power when it is idie, but
remains available for irnmediate use. Typically; you would put your colnputer or
standby to save power instead of leaving it on for extended periods. While or
standb1,, information in computer lTiemory is not saved on your hard disk. If the
computer loses electric power, the information in ntemoty rvill be lost.
Shr. t down Saves any Windows settings that you chan-*ed and writes any infornration that it
currently stored ir.r memory to your hard disk. This prepares your computer to be
turned off.
Restart Saves an1, Windows setting that you changed, writes any information that is currentll
stored in memory to your hard disk and then restans your computer.
Restaft in Saves any Windows settings that you changed, writes any information
MS-DOS mode that is currently stored in memory to your hard disk and then restafts your computel
in MS-DOS rnode.
Solved Exercises
Ql. What is operating systcm ?

Ans. Operating system is an organized collection or integrateci set of specialized programs that controls the
overall operations ofa computer.
Q2. What is the function of mouse ?
Ans. The mouse is an input Cevice that is used in addition to the keybcard. It is hand-held device which
controls a pointer on ihe screen.
Q3. What ale lcons ?
Ans. Icons are used to provide a s.vmbolic epresentation of any system/user-det'ined objects such as file,
folder, address book, applications and so on.
Q4. What is menu bar'?
Ans. This is a bar located below the title bar. contain ing a list of menus that can be used witlr the applicatiort
displayed in the window.
Q5. What are Presentation graphics ?
Ans. Presentation graphics are used to comnrunicate ideas to those who might be unfamiliar with a situation or
who need a simple but highly effective overview of a topic. For example, presentation graphics might be
used by a sales person to show a customer how several insurance policies are conrpared by a rnarketing
manager at a long planning sessions to show the change in market share between competitive products.
Q6. What is GUI ?
Ans. A graphical user interface is one u,ay colxputers are designed to make them easy to use, or intelface with
windows objects and pictures. It uses pictures, or icons and menus. A GUI is an application environtnent
that can work with graphical objects. Windows is the most popularly used GUI which is being used now-
a-days.
Q7. What is w!ndows ?
Ans. The Wirrdows operating system gets its name from its nse of rectangular boxes called winddws that are
used to display information and other programs.
Q8. What is desktop ?
Ans. The Windorvs 95/98 or any graphical front screen is called a desktop. It displays icons that reprcsetlt
various tools and Featured.
Q9. L,ist sotne lraitt cotnponents of rvirrdows.
104 Saraswati lnf ormatics practices (Xl)
Ans. The following are the main cornponents of windows :
Mouse, The desktop, Icon, Menu, Menu bar, ScroI bar and Status
bar.
Ql0. What is windows border ?
Ans. The outline of the rvindow is callecl ryindows border.
Qll. What is window title ?
Ans' The identification ol" any opened windor,v is called the window title. The
title bar displayed on the top
most lire cf any opened windorv.
Ql2, What is the function of windovl,s, r.nininrize button ?
Ans. Thewindows'lninirriizebuttonisusedtoreduceawindowtoitssmallestsize.
Q13. What is the function of windows, ntarimize button ?
Ans. The windows' lraxitnize bLrttott is nserj to enlarge a rvindow to its rnaximum
size.
Ql4. What is the function of windows, close button ?
Ans. -I'he windows'close button is Lrsed to crose an active *,indow.
Ql5. Define status bar.
Ans' The bottom line of any window is calleci status bar, which displays name of the program you are
using,
and the task being performed.
QI6. Define taskbar.
Ans. It is a strip. It is arong the bottorn of the screen i, windows screen.
Q17. what is the difference between pop Up nrenu and pulr Down menu ?
Ans' Popupmenu-Apopupfilenttisalistofchoices,oratnenu. Itisputonthescreenwherevertheuserhas
positioned the cursor' This is useful when the user
wants both to read the menu and look at aparlicular
part of the screen at the sanre titne. A pop up menu
can be rnoved to a different place by moving the cursor.
PoP D ull clor.vn/pop dorvn ing from
a listo pllter screen. Choos isPlaYed
in a co top of the screen. A clicking
on it w t rvith the cursor. r.o
Ql8. Write
Ans. Following are the steps to create a folder:
- Click the drive in the My Cotnputer window where you want to create the new folder.
- On the File menu, point to Nevr,. and then click F.older.
The new fotder appears with a ternporary name as New Folder f

- Type o rlarlte for the ne,uv folder and tlren press ENTER.
Ql9. What is Windows Explorer ?
Ans' windorvs Explorer is an application included in windows 95/98.
Using windows Exploreryou can view
and olganize the files on yotlr disk. You can staft the windorvs
Explorer application in many ways.
Q20. Explain t
Ans. Followin orer:
O The ne indicate your directory structure. On the right side are
the files and folders that are contained rvithin the lolder you
selecrat [ft ;;;. iow J.t..t.a rnta.,.
appears to be open, ivith its contents spilling out into the right
panel.
n A nlinLrs sign (-) on a folder tneans that it is firlty expanded. It means all the files and folders are
drsplayed in the right panel.
n A plus sign (+) on a folder trteans that uole folders and files are contained inside it that can
visible.
Q2 L What is the purpose of Start merru ?
Ans' A start menu lists a variety of everydal' programs that
comc rvith windorvs. along with any other
applications inslalled on your coltlpLrter. -fhe start rncnu's prirnary
pLrrpose is to privide \\,indows users
rvilh a quick and efficient nteans of startirrg
;trograms. When 1ro, pr.r, the buttol, a nlenll is rlisplal,ed to
cxecule the pr-ogrant.
Windows Operating System 10s
Q22. What is the purpose of document in the Start Menu ?

Ans. This option shows you tlre list of cun'ently accessed documents.
Q23. What is the purpose of document in the Start Menu ?
Ans. This option shows you the list of currently accessed documents.
Q24. Write the steps to set the Wallpaper.
Ans. To change your wallpaper, right-click on the Desktop and select Ploperties. Select your wallpaper and
Tile or Center it to suit your tastes. Click on Apply or OK to implement your wallpaper. Experiment with
the dil'ferent wallpaper to custornize your Desktop to your liking.
Q25. What is control panel ?
Ans. The control panel is a group \\,indou,which contains number of hardr,vare atrd software setting option.
Q26. Why we must shut down the computer'/
Ans. Before switching offthe cornputer, you rnust close all the opened programs or files so that the work done
does not get corrupted.
Fleview Questions
l. What is an operating system ? [{ow is it related to computer hardware ?

2. What purpose does operatin-q system serve to the cornputer and the user ?
3. What is Mv Computer ?
4. What is Folder ?
5. What are the contents that you see in My Computer ?
6. How will you open a folder ?
7. Why is folder necessary ?
8. What is the difference between File and Folder ?
9. How willyou create a File ?
10. Write the steps to Copy file or folders.
ll. Write down the steps to create a folder named "CL,ASS VI" in C: drive.
12. Write down the steps to open the folder "CLASS VI".
13. Create a folder with the name "YOU RFOLDER" in A: drive.
14. Write down the steps to open a folder "YOURFOLDER" in drive A:.
15. Write down the steps to create a folder, rename it aud finally delete the folder.
16. What is a file ?
17. Write down the steps ro create a file narned LETTER in your folder.
| 8. Write the steps to close your computer.
19. There are five windows open on your computer screen. How you will minimize all the windows ?
20. How will you see the contents of your folder ?
21. How rvili you open a file ?
22. Define the Windows Explorer'.
23. What is the difference between Windows Explorer and My Computer ?
24. What can vou do with Windows Erplorer ?
25. What are various wa),s to sta( Windor'vs Explorer ?
26. What do you mean by minus and plus sign on the lefl pane of Windo'uvs Explorer ?
27. Explain different views of Windows Explorer.
28. Explain the find feature of Windows Explorer.
29. Write the steps to find a flle.
30. (i) Create a folder with the natne o1'MYWORKS.
(ii) Create another folder in MYWORI(S with the nanre of COMPLITER.
(ili) Create anolher folder rrarrred'l-ESf in C: drive,
106 Saraswatilnformatics Practices (Xl)
31. (r) Create a file named APPLE in your folder MYWORKS.
(ir) Create anotherfile named ORANGE inthe folderCOMpUTER.
32. (i) Rename fite MYFILE tfi'it you have created earlier. Give the new name as NEWFILE.
(lr) Rename the folder MYF'OLDER that you have created earlier. Give the new name as NEWFOLDER.
(ilr) Change the name ofMYWORKS to WORKS.
33. (r) Copy the folder COMPUTER into the folder TEST with its contents.
(li) Copythe file ORANGE in C: drive.
(iil) Copy the file APPLE into the folder TEST.
(rv) Copythe folder TEST in the folder WORK.
34. Do the following :
l. Do as directed and note observations in your notebook.
(a) Double click on following icons on desktop (what do you observe ?)
My Computer
My Documents
Recycle Bin
lntemet Explorer
(6) What happens when you move the mouse pointer in start menu ?
2. Try these things :
(a) Open calendar on the desktop

(6) See the current time and date on your computer.
3. Observe and write about the various icons you see on the taskbar.
4. Move your mouse pointer to the clcck icon on taskbar. What did you observe ? Write in your
notebook.
5. (a) Start your computer
(b) Right click your mouse
1c) From the right click menu, click : Arrange Icons
(@ From the sub-menu click : by Type
(e) See the desktop icons and note down the icon arrangements
$ Similarly anange the desktop icons sizewrse.
6. (a) Left click on Internet Explorer icon
(6)- Right click on the selected icon
(c) From the contents menu click on Open
(r/) ldentisz the menu bar from the opened window (lnternet Explorer)
(e) Click on File menu
$ ClickExit.
35. Write the steps ro Find a file.
36. How willyou Run a CD using the Run option ?
37. Write the steps to customize ihe TaskBar.
38. Write the steps to customize the Start menu.
39. How will you set the Fonr property ?
,10. Write the steps to activate the screen saver.
41. How will you add new hardware and software in your cornputer ?
42. Write the steps to install printer.
43. How will you change the regional setting ?
44. Explain the option provided in the shutdown dialog box.
Chapter - 7
Windows Accessories
7.1 lntroduction
immediately without having
windowr 95/98 comes with a number of applications that can make you productive
pointing to Programs' pointing to
to install expensive software on your.yri*. Clicking on the Start button,
can start most of these applications' You should find
Accessories, and then clicking on the lppHcation name
on your systcm and we'll take a look at each of these :
the following applications if ttey have been installed
D Calculator O CharacterMap OClipboard

D Clock D NottPad trPaint
D WordPad
7.2 Notepad
from documents created by
There will be tirnes when you will want to edit textual hles. Textual files are different
WordPad, Word or WordPerfect or some other word processing program in
that they contain no imbedded
special characters that make these files
codes. Editing these flles with a word processing program can inffoduce
unusable. Instead, use Notepad which allows you to edit the file as pure text.
purpose tlles in Windows
Textual files will normaily have a TXT file extension, but there are severdl special
AUTOEXEC'BAT'
that must be pure text. Sorne of th. ,no." important of these include your CONFIG'SYS'
If so, use Notepad to
WIN.INI and SysTEM.INI. you may get to the point of wanting to play with these files.
f,rle' If you decide to create a web
edit these and not WordPad as your system.*ot ur" the resulting WordPad
yourself from the nasty characters
page, but don't have an HTMleditoi you will like to use Notepad to escape
associated with WordPad, etc.
To start NotePad :
tr Click Start ) Programs ) Accessories ) Notepad

the menu operation to manipulate the
Where a screen will appear like Fig 7.1. Enter any information and use
text.
Fig. 7.1 Notepad screen.
(107)
108
7.2.1File Menu
This is the File menu, as shown in Fig.7 .2. Notice a co
notice that there are underlined letters on each selecti
each item with your mouse, you cau do it with the key
Nerv - This will start a new document. If you are currently working on a clocument that you l
haven't saved, the system will prompt you to save the old document before starting a
1
new one.
Fig.7.2 Notepad File N{enu.

Open... - Tiii.r allows you to bring an existing document into Notepad to vie.,v and/or edit it"
Save - If you are making modifications to an existing file, Save will put the changes back into the file after
confirming that you really want to make the ctranges. If the file you are working on is a new frle. Save works
the same as Save As....
Save As... - Save As... hrings up a dialog box similar to the Open riialog box as above.
By default, Notepad will
save a new fiie in the My Document foider. It's easy enough to change folders and save
a file anyryhslg o,
the system you want.
Page Setup... - The Page Setup...
diaiog box allows;vou to custonize
some of the things you see when
you print your document. For
example, you can change the size of
your paper; customize the header
and footet on each page as well as
the margin at the top, bottom and
either edge of the paper. The page
Setup... dialog box, as shown in Fig.
7.4.
He&dFr;
l+c,liv
[-ig.7.4 Page Setup Dialog Box.

Windows Accessories 109
Print - Thrs is a standard print operation sending the information to the default printer. The only way to change
the printer is to change your defauit printer.
Exit - This shuts dorvn Notepad. If the file you've been working on has not been saved, you will be prompted
to save the file before Notepad exits.
7.2.2 Ed,t Menu

The Edit menu (refer Fig. 7.5) contains those functions that allow you to manipulate the
information you have on the screen. a;
Undo - Notepad does have a rather neat feature called the Undo. trf you make a mistake and
suddenly say to reffieve, you can select the Undo and reverse whatever it was you just did.
Fig. 7.5 Edit Menu.
Cut - Again, this item is only available if you have something selected in your document. Otherwise you have
nothing to Cut.
Copy - CopS is very similar to Cut. The only difference is that with Copy, your selected text is not removed from
the document. Instead, a copy of your selected text is placed on the Clipboard for you to use later.
Paste - Once you have some text on the Clipboard (using either Cut or Copy above), you can move to wherever
you would like to put this text and Paste it back into your document.
Delete - When you Delete text from your document, it is gone. If you do this by accident, you can use the Undo
function to bring it back, but otherwise it is gone. Delete does not place the selected text on the Clipboard.
Setect All - If there is something you want to do with all the text in your document at the same time, all you have
to do is select the Select AII function and your entire document will be selected. Now you can either Cut
or Copy all the text to your Clipboard.
Tirne/Date - The Time/Date function is a neat feature of Notepad. Some people like to keep a journal and in a
journal, you might want to have the date and time as part of the document. Obviously, you can type in the
date and time, but with the Time/Date tunction, Notepad will automatically insert the date and time hke this:
7:47 AM l5ll2l200l.
Word Wrap - This will take words that don't fit in the Notepad window and wrap them down to the next line.
Set Font... - This allows you to change the font used to display the file you have open. It doesn't change the
font of the file itself. It simply allows you to view/edit files using whatever font you wish.
7.2.3 Search Menu

Fig. 7.6 shows the search menu and contains those functions that allow you to locate
specific text within your docdment.
Fig.7.6 SearchMenu.
Find... As you've already seen, this function opens a dialog box that allows you to enter the text you want to
-
search for along rvith a couple of pieces of information to help Notepad perform the search. If the text is
found, it will be selected ready for you to Cut, Copy or overtype.
rod*&a*
I- tH$*fi'gess
*itli ..aE j.rf "rr,
Fig.7.7 Find Dialog Box.

Find Next - This function simply repeats a previous Find....
7.2.4 Help Menu

Most programs in Windows have a Help menu that provides information about using that
particular program. The Help menu (refer Fig. 7.8) may not answer all your questions about
a program, but we should encourage you to explore what is there before you look elsewhere.
Most companies marketing software today are providing more Help and less hardcopy
documentation.
Fig.7.8 Help Menu.
Help Topics - Notepad is a very simple program to use, as it doesn't contain a lot of bells and whistles. As a
result, the Help Topics shows all detailed operation of Notepad as shown in Fig. 7.9.
,
firdai
4Stt:'.j1 I .
Find specilc characters or wor(

&.t, Dopy, paste, or *Eletelext
ll,taptexl tDlhe leind(v/ eize
Adding lhe Tilr]e a.td Dale to
Fig. 7.9 Notepad Help.

About Notepad - The function of the About for any progmm is simply to let you know what version of the
program you are runmng.
7.3 WordPad
For those who want something more powerful than Notepad, Microsoft makes available a word processing
program called WordPad. WordPad provides a numher of features found in more sophisticated word processors
including fonts, sizes, colors, e/c. Some people find the power of WordPad to be sufficient for their purposes.
To start WordPad :
tr Click Start ) Programs ) Accessories ) WordPad.

After that the WordPad will appear as shown in Fig. 7.10. You can enter any information or text and operate
the menu and its other toolbar options.
lk E& Ytetq
Tnnes Nevl Roman lr{estanl
J$),tg', tIr;lii: ;j?r#'r;li ill,;l:ii

Fig. 7.10 WordPad Window.
7.3.1 File Menu

Most of what is on the File menu, as shown in Frg.1 .Il, is the same as what
you learn with Notepad.
Notice that some of the items in the File menu have a key combination
on the right (Ctrl+N, etc.). These are hot keys that can be used from within
the document without having to go to the File menu.
New - This will start a new document. If you are currently working on a
document that you haven't saved, the system will prompt you to save
the old document before starting a new one.
Open... - This allows you to bring an existing document into \{ordPad to
view and/or edit it.
F'ig.7.11 File Menu.
You'll see the following dialog box, in Fig. 7.3, when you make this selection'
as shown
Save - If you are making modifications to an existing file, Save will put the changes back
into the file after
conhrming that youieally want to make the changes. If the file you are working on is a new file, Save works
Save As... - Save As brings up a dialog box similar to the Open dialog box above. By default,
WordPad will save
a new file in the My Document folder. It's easy enough to change folders and save a file anywhere on the
place where you save your files rather
system you want though. I would encourage you to create a special
than putting them;r the Windows folder.
print... printer. Contrary to the way
- This is a standard print operation sending the information to the default dialog box in Fig' 7'12'
Notepad works though, WordParf allows you to change printers via the following
print preview - Wordpad offers a neat feature of allowing you to view your document, as it will look when you
print it without actually having to print it. The Print Preview will look something like the Fig.
7' 13'
you when you
fage Setup... - The page Setup... alutog box allows you to customize some of the things see
print your document as shown inFig. T .4.

someone via the
Sena... - This brings up a dialog box that allows you to send the file you're working on to
Microsoft messaging system.
Fig.7.12 Print Diatog Box.
Exit - This shuts down WordPad. If the file you've been working on has not been saved, you will be prompted
to save the f,rle before Wordpad exits.
Fig. 7.13 Print Preview window.

7.3.2Edit Menu
The Edit menu. as shown in Fig.7.l4, contains those functions that allow you
to manipulate the information
you have on the screen.
Undo - WordPad has a rather neat feature called the Undo. You can select the Undo and reverse whatever
it was
you just did.
Cut -This item is only available if you have something selected in your document.
Otherwise you have nothing to Cut. Cut removes the selected text from your
document and puts it on the Clipboard. The information is not totally deleted,
but is being held in case you want to put it somewhere else.
ltli.
Copy - Copy is very similar to Cut. The only difference is that with Copy, your
selected text is not removed from the document. Instead, a copy of your selected
text is placed on the Clipboard for vou to use later.
Paste - Once you have something on the Clipboard (using either Cut or Copy above),
you can move to wherever you would like to put it and Paste it back into your
document.
Paste Special... - The Paste Special... function allows you to bring in information
from another file.
Clear - When you Clear text from your document, it is gone. If you do this by accident, you can use the Undo
function to bring it back, but otherwise it is gone.
Select All - If there is something you want to do with everything in your document at the same time, ali you
have to do is select the Select All function and your entire document will be selected. Norv you can either
Cut or Copy everything to your Clipboard.
Find... - This function opens a dialog box (refer Fig. 7 .l) that allows you to enter the text you want to search for
along with a couple of pieces of information to help WordPad perform the search.
Find Next - The Find Next function simply locates the next occurrence of whatever it is you did the Find... on
in the first place.
Replace... - The Replace... function can locate and replace text within your document. Simply tell Replace...
what you want to locate and what you want to replace it with and WordPad will do the rest (refer Fig. 7.15).
Fig.7.f5 Replace Dialog Box.

Links... that you have linked into your document using the Paste Special... function
- If you have information
above, then you can peform certain functions on that link using this function.
Object Properties - The Object Properties function allows you to do a iot of the same things you do with the
Links... function above. In essence, you're editing the properties of a linked object and controlling how that
object will be displayed and controlled.
Object - The appearance of this menu item will change depending on what you have selected within your
document. Essentially, this function allows you to edit irnbedded objects in your document.
7.3.3 View Menu

WordPad, as shownin Fig. 7.16 allows you to edit several different types of files. Among these are Text files,
Rich Text files, Word 6 documents and Write documents. Each of these allows something different as far as the
content is concerned. As a result, WordPad allows you to customize the look and feel of WordPad for each of
these types of files.
Toolhar - This is a toggle that allows you to display the standard toolbar across the top of
WordPad.
Format Bar - This is a toggle that allows you to display the format toolbar under the 1ta
standard toolbar.
Ruler - This is a toggle that allows you to display the ruler showing you the typing area for
your document.
Fig.7.16View
Status Bar - This is a toggle that allows you to display the status bar at the bottom of your WordPad window.
Options... - This function brings up a dialog box that allows you to set up the view you want for each of the
different types of files that can be edited with WordPad. You don't have to have a file open in order to
customize WordPad for a particular type of file. The dialog box you get should look something like
Fig.7.17.
Fig.7.17 Options Dialog Box.

7.3.4 lnsert Menu
Date and rime...- wordPad allows you to maintain a joumal similar to the way Notepad
does by allowing you to insert the date and.ior time into your document. Unlike
Notepad though, wordPad allows you to control the format of what you enter. To
accomplish this, wordPad will present you a dialog box that looks like Fig. 7. l g.
Fig. 7.18Insert Menu.
Object.. - In additior to inserting the date/time into your document, WordPad allows you to put a number of
different objects into your document that can help make your document more interesting to read. The
objects you can insert into your document depend on how your system is set up, but the following is one
possibility for inserting an object into your document (refer Fig. 7.19).
Fig.7.tr9Date and Time DialogBox. Fig.7.20Insert Object Dialog Box.

7.3.5 Format Menu

Basically, the Format menu, as shown in Fig.7.2l, al
document by changing the font, creating lists, control
setting your tab stops.
Fig.T.2lFormatMenu.
Font... - The Font... function gives you access to a lot of the same function you'll find on the format bar. The
format bar is probably more convenient if you have it turned on, but the Font... function puts everything
in one dialog box, as shown in Fr9.7.22.
Fig.7.22 Font Dialog Box.

Bullet Style This function turns the current paragraph into an unordered list meaning that it begins with a
-
bullet and is indented from other paragraphs before and after it. If you begin a new paragraph while in
Bullet Style, the new paragraph will also be in Bullet Style'
Paragraph... - This function allows you to control the indentation of the current paragraph from the left and
right margins as well as the indentation of the first line of the paragraph'
Tabs... - By default, WordPad gives you a tab stop every half-inch. This may be satisfactory, but if you'd like
to have more control over your tab stops, look in the Tabs... function'
7.3.6 Help Menu

Most programs in Windows have a Help menu, as shown in Fig. 7.8 that provides information about using that
particular program.
Help Topics - WordPad contains a few more bells and whistles than Notepad, but is still simple to use. The Hetp
Topics (as like as Fig. 7.9 of Notepad help) is a little longer than in Notepad.
About WordPad - The function of the About for any program is simply to let you know what version of the
progam you are running.
7.4 Paint
Paint is a very powerful drawing program that allows you to explore your artistic creativity. With Paint' you can
create bitmap (BI\{P) hles that can be used as wallpaper as we discussed earlier. A typical Paint screen is as
shown in Fig. 7.23.
Title bar
Menu bar ts6n
-r'
,?
f*
PAiNTAREA
il
i:t,' i:;, :'i"a.:l;..u'),b,, :';rr.,' io'i;

Fig. 7.23 Windows Paint screen with a picture.
Let's explore the Paint window and then see how to produce
the image we have got above.
7.4.1Flle Menu
Most of what is on the File menu, as shown inFig. T .24,is the
same as what
you learn wrth Notepad and Wordpad
New - This will
start a new bitmap document. If you are currently working
on
bitmap that you haven,t saved, the system will prompt yot
a
to ravJth.
old one before starting a new one.
open... - This allows you to bring an existing bitmap into paint
to view and./
or edit it. You'll see the following dialog box (as like
as in Fig. 7.3).
Save - If you are making modifications to an existing
f,rle, save iviu put ttre
changes back into the frle after conrrrming that you really
want to make
the changes. If the bitmap you are working on is a new
file, Save works
Save As"' - Save As"' brings up a dialog box similar to the open dialog
box above. By default, paint will save
a new hle in the My Document folder.
Print Preview - Paint offers a neat feature of allowing you to view your bitmap.
as it will look when you print
it without actually having to print it. You won't actually be able
io see the bitmap, but will be able to see the
layout. The Print Preview will look something lik efrg.l .ZS.
Page Setup"' - The Page Setup... dialog box allows you to
customize some of the things you see when you
print your bitmap as shown in Fig. 7.4.
to the default printer. Contrary to the way
box (as like as in Fig.7 .12).
a the dialog
I
o send the file you're working on to someone via the

Set As lYallpaper (Tiled) - This function saves you the hassle of saving the bitmap and then setting it as the
wallpaper on your desktop. In this case, the bitmap is tiled rneaning that it is repeated to cover the entire
desktop.
Fig.7.25 Print Preview Screen.

Set As lYallpaper (Centered) - In this case, the bitmap is centered rather than tiled, as is the case in the
prevlous rtem.
Exit - This shuts down Paint. If the bitmap you've been working on has not been saved, you will be prompted
to save it before Paint exits.
, :'Xwwa
7.4.2 Edil Menu '-&@ :,.r 'i';r i,Etri,i!':.1
The Edit rllenu, as shown in Fig. 7.26 contains those functions that allow you to ""..,.,".",^...,-
manipulate the information you have on the screen. 1.:
;- :/ -1
Undo - Paint has a rather neat feature called the Undcr. The Undo item will only work on F$o{* Dd+V
!" ,r,.ii,.."i\ l|,
the three most recent change-s you've made to your bitmap.
b*t&tr cE u.ll+F.
Repeat - If you made a change and suddenly decided you didn't want that change
and pressed the Undo - button only to realize that 1.ou really did want the change, ,-'',ti'fJ"., :.'
FgsleEo*r-,, r.l
you can use the Repeat function.
Fig. 7.26 Edit Menu.
Cut -You can select some piece of your bitmap by clicking on either of the first two items on the Toolbar and
drawing a box around whatever you want to select. Your selection will have a dotted box around it. Now
you will be able to Cut this selection.
Copy - Copy is very similar to Cut. The only difference is that with Copy, your selected area is not removed iiom
the bitmap. Instead, a copy of your selected area is placed on the Clipboard for you to use later.
Paste - Once you hirve something on the Clipboard (using either Cut or Copy above), you can nlove to
wherever you would like to put it and Paste it back into your bitmap.
Clear Selection - This iunction removes whatever you have selected from your bitmap.
Select All - If there is something you want to do with your entire bitmap at the same time, all you have to do is
select the Select All function and your entire bitmap will be selected.
Now you can either Cut or Copy
everything to yr;ur Clipboard.
Copy To"' - The Copy To... function takes whatever part of your bitmap you
have selected and makes a copy of
it and allows you to store that copy into a file.
Paste From'.. - The Paste From... function allows you to brirrg
another bitmap image file into the bitmap on
which you are currently working.
7.4.3 VieW Menu qigci i,,lrry !B{
Paint provides you with several toois to help you cre

user controllable through the View menu, as shown in
Tool Box - This is a toggle that allows you to display

left side of Paint. When the command has a check
Fig.7,27 Yiew Menu.
Color Box - This is a toggle that allows you to display the Color Bar at the bottom of the paint window. A check
mark appears when the Color Bar is visible.
Status Bar - This is a toggle that allows you to display the Status Bar ;r:. {he
bottom edge of the paint window.
when the command has a check mark next to it, the Status Brr; is on.
Zoom- Notice the wedge to the right of the Zoom item. This indicates that there is
more to this .;nu item and
that just pausing your mouse on it will show the next level of it.
You can control the amour. of zoom along
with a couple ol additional things while you're in zoom mode.
View Bitmap - This will allow you to view your bitmap as p full screen. This
is a neat function, but doesn,t give
you any indication on how toget out of the function aird back
to Paint. The secret is to click the left mouse
button anywhere on the screen and you're immediatery back into paint.
Text Toolbar - This function toggles the Text Toolbar on or off. This is
only available when you are working
with text in yourbitmap.
7.4.4lmage Menu
Flip/Rotate... - This function allows you to flip your bitmap or a portion of your
bitmap either horizontarly or vertically or rotate your image 90i, 1g0
" or 27ff.
The dialogbox you'I see will look something like rig.i.zs of image
menu,s
(see Fig. 7.28) FIip and Rotate option.
Stretch/Skew... - This function allows you to stretch your bitmap or a portion

of your bitmap horizontally
or vertically by some percentage. It also allows you to skew your
image horizontally or vertically
by so many degrees.
Invert Colors - When you select this function, each color
is replaced by its color complement. For example,
white becomes black, and red becomes blue.
Attributes... - This function allows you to specify the
size and color of your overall bitmap.
Clear Image - This function will erase everything in the
current bitmap and allow you to start over.
Draw Opaque - To choose transparent drawing, make
sure Draw Opaque is not checked. To choose opaque
drawing, make sure Draw Opaque is checked.
Fig. 7.29 Flip and Rotate Dialog Box"

7.4.5 Colors Menu

Edit Colors... - This function allows you to create custom colors from color menus Edit Colors ..., as shou n in
Fig.7.30. Forexample,
csfu$: . l
r:rrrarffir'r
8*eic
rr;
$ffiw ffiffi
,w#flrilffffi'
'
Effi*#ffir*mr
l' , "q :'s,:.1
-'
rrrrr'
*.l*--
Fig.7.30 Edit Colors Dialog Box.
tr In the Color Box, click the coloi you want to change'

tr On the Options menu, click Edit Colors....
O Click Deflrne Custom Colors, and then enter new values in either the RGB (red, green, blue) or H1."
(hue, saturation, and luminescence) color models.
D ClickAddtoCttstomColors.
7.4.6 Help Menu
Most programs in Windows have a Help menu, as shown in other applications provides information about
using that particular program. The Help menu may not answer all your questions about a program, but we
would encoulage you to explore what is there before you look elsewhere.
Help Topics - Paint contains a few more bells and whistles than Notepad, but is still simple to us-.
About Paint - The function of the About for any program is simply to let you i<now what version of the program
you are running. From time to time, the programmer might include some additional information about your
system, but don't exPect this.
7.4.7 ToolBar
This icon allows you to select an irregularly shaped object from your picture in order to cut/copy it
r,q,'$l
somewhere else either within your picture or to another application.
This icon allows you to select a rectangular section of your picture in order to cut/copy it somewhere
l;frxl else either within your picture or to another application'
This icon will turn your cursor into little square.

lb' a
,e,i As this icon implies, you can use it to dump color into your picture.
This icon looks like an eyedropper that can be used to pick up a color from one place in your picture
#,1 and put it somewhere else.
12O Saraswati lnformatics practices (Xl)
This icon allows you to draw freehand drawings.
This icon allows you to magnify ihe picture you are working on. You can increase the size of the
picture two times, six times or eight times.
This icon acts as a paintbrush allowing you to paint the color select on the Color Bar onto your
picture in a number of different pattems.
This icon looks like a pai,t spray can and works pretty much the same way.
s*l
This icon allows you ro add text to your picture.
&"'
tt This icon allows you to draw a straight line in paint.
This icon is tricky. To choose the width the curve will be, click a line width at the bottom of the
a. ToolBar. To choose the color the curve will be, click a color. First draw a straight line as above. Click
where you want one arc of the curve to be, and then drag the mouse pointer to adjust the curve.
This icon allows you to draw a rectangle.
! ff,i, icon allows you to draw a series of connecting line.

-t
This icon allows you to draw an ellipse or circle.

i
I This icon worksjust like the icon above except that the rectangles produced have rounded corners.
7"4.8 Color Bar
l6Fffi Xff ffi ffi I& p#ff 6*ffi ffi ;"H 3il ;;:J:,#.i,:: ;T::ffi1,ffiil::11"1t3
color can be selected simply by using the left mouse button to
select a color. The background color is selected using the right mouse button.
7.5 Character Map

The Character Map allows you to view all of the various fonts that you have installed on your
computer and
to use these in other Windows applications. Some examples of some characters available through
Character
Map include:
'|JKL-F<78: ?+$"(c)"OOS1,rcr, 1 74172
As you can see, the character Map can be a very powerful tool, as shown in Fig. 7.31.
The Wingdings font is one of the favourite fonts. It provides characrers not available on the
standarrj
keyboard. By using tI:se characters, you can enhance your documents and make them much
more interesting.
Ifyou single-click on any ofthe characters, it'lI blow up so you can get a good look at it. Ifyou double-click on
a character,it will be copied to Characters to copy in preparation for puiting them into your document. Once
you have characters in the Characters to copy area, you can click on the Copy
button to place these characters
on the Clipboard so you can Paste them into another aoplication.
Fig 7.31 Character N{ap.
7.6 Glipboard
The Clipboard is an essential sheif within Windows that can hold one object at a time. An orrject can be a letter,
word. paragraph and/or graphic. An object can be piaced on the Clipboard from any \\'indows application.
That same object can then be placed into any Windows application repeatedly undl the contents of the
Clipboard are rcplaced.
There is a program called the Clipboard Viewer that allorvs you to work with the contents of the Clipboard,
as shown inFig. T .32.
--q
u*3
Ei* E# &isBlay &eb
Operations dealing with the clipboard include :
Cut Removes the selected object or text and places it on the Clipboard so you can paste it elsewhere.
-
Copy - Makes a copy of the selected object or text and places it on the Clipboard so you can paste it elsewhet'e.
Paste - Inserts the object or text that is on the Clipboard. This con.rmand is available only if you have cut or
copied an object or text.
7.7 Clock
Most computers come with a built-in clock. This clock is used by the system to prioritize files an<i operations.
Every file that is stored on the computer carries not only the name of the file, but the size, date and time the file
was created or last modified. Windows 95/98 provides a means for displaying the clock as rvell as changing the
clock. To adjust the clock, double-click on the ciock on your Taskbar.
122
By double-ciicking on the time on the Thskbar, vou can change the date and time for your computer
through an easy-to-use dialog box- as shown in Fig. 7.33,
'l
2 3
lal
4 E 6 7 I s 10
\ 11 12 13 14 tt 1B 17
ta 1$ 20 m 74
,3
2E 26 27 3B ?s 3D 31
Fig. 7.33 Date/Time Properties Dialog Box.

7.8 Ca!culator
The Calculator can be a very powerful tool if you need to do some
quick calculations and don't have your hand calculator handy. It also
contains some very powerful features that aren't available on a lot of
regular calculators.
The Calculator normally comes up in the Standard mode, which
is what most people will use. In this *rode, you have the most common
functions including memory, square root, percentage and reciprocal.
The calculator aiso contains a scientitic mode which gives you access
to many more functions. Don't be afraid to explore this tool as you
may never need you hanC caiculator again as long as you're working
on your computer.
Fig. 7.34 Calculator Standard Yiew.
With much of the Standard view of the Calculator, we assume everyone is already familiar
with what you
have available. As e result, we'll skip the basics of how a calculator works
and concentrate on what makes this
unique from a regular ca-lculator- The only key that is probabiy unique
on the above view is the Back key. This
is essentially a backspace key. Let's look at each of the menus across the
top of the Catrculator. Before we go
to the individual rnenus, notice something about the menu bar itself. See the
underlined letters in each of the
menu items (Edit. View and Help). These are meaningftil. If you hold
clown the <Alb key and press these
letters, you ta'ill select that menu. obviously you can selecf each menu
with the mouse, butins gives you an
alternative way of getting into them. So. you can get into the Edit menu
by pressing <AlbE.
7.9 !nternet Explorer
{nternet Expiorer runs in Windows enviromnent that provides you with an array of menus, buttons, labels, and
information displays' When ail of its components are rnade visible not
all are shown when you first star.t (IE),
mentt bar.
the Internet Explorer window looks like Fig. 7.35 given below. From top to bottom, it contains a
a
viewing window and a status bar'

standard buttons toolbar, an Address bar, a Link bar, an Explorer bar, a
Menu bar
Draggable
separator Standard
toolbar
Address bar buttons
rnes will ne'der . Lr?:ar;^q ll

be tI?*,.:*mP
,.,...iq.:({c2:;51
fu!4N@rre )ta{iAg ."t;i,i;;{,.itii;i.;;
trcr+ I}>rrl e1i9)
i *nrc i_rtr Br$r.!1,
;i;iii.r-$D-ry ri
aqq.o, h, fi!{tslt
&,,r{.1d.
:".-.';-"
E{*!{.e;,
iM 7:6
- Viewing
window
Status bar
Fig. 7.35 Internet ExPlorer.
the browser, the
Depending on what you are trying to do and how familiar you are with the vrorkings of
distracting clutter. Forlunately, most of what you see can
elements of the IE window may be either useful tool or
worthwhile. You can display or hide the elements of the IE
be customised to display exactly what you find
window and you can change the amount of space devoted to each element.
Most browser windows have the same basic layout. From top to bottom, you find these basic
elements:
D Menu bar
tr Toolbars
tr Address or Location r.vindow
tr Viewingwindow
B Stdtus bar
a Web page is r-iewed' the
Some Web pages are divided into independent panes, called frames" When such
frame or even move
viewing window issimilarly divided into independent panes. You can scroll up or down in a
from link to link, without disturbing the contents of the other frames.
7.10 Entertainment
The MS-Windows provides facilities to play sound and movies'
For this purpose, Windows have application software called
MediaPlayer as shown inFig.7.36. The Mediaplayercanplay
normal CD audio on a CD-ROM. It also can play other kinds of
)
ts{t
files, such as animation and video files. The Media Player is
simple and intuitive application software.
You can use Media Player to play audio, video, or animation
files and to control the settings for multimedia hardware devices'
Fig. 7.36 Windows media PlaYer'

124
To hear sound when you use Media Player, you

must have a sound card. you can start lMedia player
as ;
tr Click Start, programs, Aecessories.
3 From Accessories raei.iu ciick Entertainment, and then click windows Media player.
After doing this a lVindows Media player winciow will appear as shown.
wse your CD for playing audio or video. After

this an
u can browse your CD and select file to play.
several buttons on the Media player to operate
er.
7.10.1 CD Ptayer
You can also play audio and video CDs using
CD player application
program of Ms-['indcrv. T<r play cD ma]<e
sure that cDls in the
CD-ROM drive. and then click
il To stop playing your CD, ctick

[.r,r .
E To eject your CD from the drive, click i .4ft
.
D Il'you u,ant ro specify individual rracks to play. you

can
create a play List.
3 YourCD continues toplay evenif you minimize
CD player.
Fig.7.37 CD Ptayer.
To pause and resume a CD
Click 1 to puur., and then click play button to resume

playing.
To change to a different track
Click ',fff to move to the nexr tr ack, or click fi4 to move to the previous
track.
Note. You can move fcrward or backwa.rd within ra

a track by clicking ffi Eta
or
7.1A.2 Ptay List

Flay List ryvvra,wo wi'rl LriluKs
specifies which of a Lu
tracks or CD to ptay
piay and tnin what order. play
List is useful ifthere are severar
several songs on u c6
C6 trrot
tfrot you like.
like, but a few
onl,v the scngs you like rvill be played.

Fig. 7.38 CD Player ptay list.
7.10.3 Using Sound Recorder
You can use Sound Recorder to record, play, f.{4. i,B. *ES
and edit sound files. To use
Sounci Recorder, you must have u ,ourd
your computer. If you want to record
cara ana speakers installeC on ltlA) !/6
ilt[
live sound, you also need amicrophone.
To stan sound recording :
n Click Start, prograrns, Accessories.
**J-:r:.*,.iar: ,":i*i
a From the Accessories menu. click Entertainment, and then crick f
Fig.
t5. /.i Sound recorder.
7.39
Sound Recorder.
After this a dialog box appears with the name
Sound Recorder.
7.10.4 More Enteftaining and Fun

Windows 98 makes your computer more entertaining by introducing new features such as enhanced television,
video playback, and supporl for new hardware. These enhancements provide you rvith hours of tun.
Windows 98 supports a variety of new hardware devices, such as DVD, force-feedback joysticks, digital
audio speakers, and lecording devices. Improved plug and play capabilities make installing new hardware even
easier. You will also enjoy improved graphics, especially 3-D graphics, and video pla.v-back. Winclows 98
suppofts the following hardware standards like : DVD playeq CD player, etc.
7.10.5 Using DVD Player to play DVD discs

With DYD Player, you can play DVD discs from a DVD drive connected to yt_rur
computer. You can also use your DVD drive to play software and music CDs.
To open D\zD Player after you have inserted a disc, click Start, point to
Programs. point to Accessories, point to Entertainment, and then click D\{D
Player.
Note. Your DVD hardware may require a decoder card and specific software.
Check with your DVD and computer manufacturers for details,
7.10.6 CD Using RUN Option

There are several ways to starl a multimedia CD. Using the mouse, hold down
the Start button and select the RLN Option as shown in Fig. 7.40.
After clicking on RUN, a RUN dialog box will appear as shown in Fig. 7.41 .
Fig. 7.40 Using Run option.
.rick I rgr g to
rvn here browse
tv wt vv
drive contents
ir) ii'.ri "
Fig.7.4l Run dialog box for running a CD.
From the RUN dialog box, Click

&rqwiso
Browse Dutton to see the Browse dialog
box for exploring CD or other drive L@jrt, \,itin3B {rl:} mi
contents as shown inFig. T .42. . Cc,mrnand
r.1$ [t1 Docurrr*ntr
y f,ompuier @Pct+mbE
t!,1Fhppy [,a.:]
gg \lin$9 [f,:]
!'nn*9E {Grl
D*l+ {E:}
B;9 Eaekup {f:l
Click CD drive
for contents
Fig.l.42 Selecting CD drive for running an applieation.

After, seiecting CD-drive, the CD drive contents will be displayed in Browse dialog box. Now click the file
which you want to rurn. If you click the start file (or any) as shown in FigT .43,it will run the program accordingly.
Click this
application to
start
F ig. 7 .43 Selected application in CD.
Solved Exercises
Ql. Write the Name of five Windows Accessories.

Ans. Following are the Windows Accessories :
- NotePad
- WordPad
- Calculator
- Paint
- Clock
Q2. Define the trse of MS-Paint program.
Ans. Paint is a very powerful drawing program that allows you to explore your artistic creativity. With paint,
vou can create bitmap Gn/P) files that can be used as wallpaper.
Q3. Write the difference between WordPad and Notepad.
Ans. The Nbtepad allows you to open only text frles. While in worpad you can open the documnets files too.
Q4. What is the purpose of the page setup ?
Ans. The Fage Setup... diatog box allows you to customize some of the things you see when you print your
document. For example, you can change the size ofyour paper; customize the header and footer on each
page as well as the margin at the top, bottom and either edge of the paper.
Q5. What is the difference between Save aud Save As ?
Ans. Save - If you are making modifications to an existing file, Save wili put the changes back into the file after
confirming that you really want to make the changes. If the file you are working on is a new file, Save
works the same as Save As....
Save As,.. - Save As... brings up a dialog box similar to the Open dialog box as above. By default, Notepad
will save a new file in the My Document folder. It's easy enough to change folders and save a file
anywhere on the system you want.
Q6. What is the difference between Cut and Copy?
Ans. Copy is very similar to Cut. The only difference is that with Copy, your selected text is not removed from
the document. Instead, a copy of your selected text is placed on the Clipboard for you to use later.
Q7. What is the purpose of the Find option ?
Ans. This function opens a dialog box that allows you to enter the text you want to search for along with a
couple of pieces of information to help Notepad performs the search. If the text is found, it will be selected
ready for you to Cut, Copy or overtype.
Q8. What is the purpose of Stretch/Sl<ew option in Paint ?

Ans. This function allows you to stretch your bitmap or a poftion of your bitmap horizontally or vertically by
some percentage. It also allows you to skew your image horizontally or verlically by so many degrees'
Q9. What is character map ?
Ans. 'Ihe Character Map allows you to view all of the various fonts that you have installed on your computer
and to use these in other Windows applications.
Ql0. What is clipboard ?
Ans. The Clipboarcl is an essential shelf within Windows that can hold one object at a time, An object can be
a letter, word, paragraph and/or graphic. An object can be placed on the Clipboard from any
Windows
application. That sarne object can then be placed into any Windows application repeatedly until the
contents of the Clipboard are replaced.
There is a programtalled the Clipboard Viewer that allows you to workwith the contents ofthe Clipboard.
Q11, What is clock ? How will you adjust the clock ?
Ans. Most computers come with a buitt-in clock, This clock is used by the system to prioritize files and
operations. Every file that is stored on the computer carries not only the name of the file, but the size,
date and time the file was created or last modified. Windows 95/98 provides a means for displaying the
clock as well as changing the clock. To adjust the clock, double-click on the clock on your Taskbar.
Q12. What is Internet explorer ?
Ans. Internet Explorer is a web browser, which will help to open the web pages on the lnternet. lnternet
Explorer runs in Windows environment that provides you with an affay of menus, buttons, labels, and
information displays.
Q13. What is the purpose of Media player ?
Ans. Media player is used to play CD audio on a CD-ROM. It can also play other kinds of files, such as
animation and video files.
Review Questions
1. Explain the followingterms :
(a) Notepad
(b) WordPad
(c) Clipboard
2. Write the difference between Notepad and WordPad.
3. What do you mean by paint ? What will happen when you press the Send option in paint ?
4. Exptain the option Flip and Rotate and Stretch and Skew in windows paint.
5. What is the use of ciraracter map in window ? Which font style character map is more usable in
Windows ?
6. (a) Click Start > Programs ) Accessorie5 ) Notepad.

(b) In the notepad window enter your five friends name and address'
(c) Click File, Save option and save the file with your name.
(d) See the file using Windows Explorer.
(e) Exit notepad.
Z, dpen you woidpad window and write a letter to your principal for 5 days leave. Also insert current date
at the top ofYour letter.
8. Write all the national holidays in document in wordpad and paste in your class room display board.
9" Open your MS-Paint program and do the following in diflerent files :
(a) Create a Diwali greeting cald'
(b) In a new paint file write the following message and show to your friends.
10. Open Windows calculator and find the result of
(a) 4567 t987
(b) 3124s-677
(c) 6545x323
(a x4s /s
11. Dothe following:
(a) Click Start ) Programs ) Accessories ) MS.paint
Draw different shapes ofrectangles and circles.
Fill at least 4 different colors using color filler tool.
Save tlp file with the name MypAINT.
Exitfrommenu.
(b) Click Start > programs ) Accessories ) Wordpad
Write a letter to your class teacher for a five days leave. Save the file
with the name of LETTER
in your folder.
(c) Click Start ) Programs ) Accessories ) Notepad
Write a letter to your friend asking about picnic.
(d) open windows NotePad program and enter the names and
address of your five friends.
Save the file with the name of ADDRESS.
(e) open Games sub-menu fi'om Accessories
sub-menu and tell your friend which games are present
ln thts.
(f) Explain step-wise the way to open Notepad. Add text to
it and save your file.
k) write an appiication using wordpad and save it with the AppL file
name.
Chapter - I
Word Processing Bosics
8.1 lntroduction
Word processing software has,revolutionized the way we create text-based documents. R.ather than committing
each characters to paper as you type - as you would do with a typewriter - word processing enables ycu to
enter documents on screen, edit and format them as you wcrk and save them for future reference or revision.
Nothing appears on paper until you use the Print command.
Toda1,, many word processors are available for use in MS-DOS and MS-Windows. Some of these are :
WordStar, MS-Word, WordPerfect, Windows Write and many more. In this chapter, we shalI learn one such
application package MS-Word, which is used for word processing.
8.2 What is Word Processing ?

Word processing is a term for typing and editing any kind of text - letters, merlos, articles, daily reports, and
books. Word processing involves t-vping in a computer, but it is more than just typing. AlthougJt computer
ke.vboard looks a lot like a typewriter keyboard, it has special keys that a typewriter does not have.
With a typewriter, we see words on paper as we type whereas in computer we read text on the screen, we
can change 1t or rearrange it and when it looks just in a way we want, we print a paper copy on our computer
printer.
We can save text typed lvith a word processor and use it again. Our text is saved electronically in a
computer fi ie on our floppy disk or hard disk. When we want to work with a f,rle again, we simply ask for it b), its
name. We can then make any changes we want, and print the new one.
Alt word prooessors are designed for producing different kinds of written documents. Some are simple -
they have features for typing, editing, and printing. Some word processing programs are complex. They have
features for - formatting charaeters and pages, and for incorporating drawings. tables, and charts into documents.
8.3 Advantages of Word Processing Package MS-Word

'l-here are various advantages/features in word processing package MS-Word, which make it the most e ommonly
used word processor.
tr We can type text in MS-Word.

1 We can edit whole or a paft of the text.
3 We can change the character (font) style and size of the text.
O We can align tert to the left or right of margin or both.
tr We can underline, italicize or boldface text or part of text.
D We can give various colours to the text.
O We can use spell check for spe[ling rristakes. with more than 20.000 words in the MS-Word dictionaly.
C We can paste pictures and adC tables in your letters.
E We can merge your addresses with letters. with mail-merge facilities.
tr We can use display and hide features to your text.
O We can count your whole or part of text.
(12e)
130 Saraswatilnformatics practices (Xl)
D We can print whole or part of text.
D We can use special non-printing features to your text.
Also, there are some other features which make MS-Word the most popular word processor.
8.4MS-Office
MS-Office is an integrated software package developed by Microsoft Corporation of USA. Various office
automation activities can be achieved by this package. The MS-Office is GUI software which provides user.-
friendly interaction with applications.
8.5 WORD 2000

The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is the Internet service that allows computers to ffansfer'binary files (programs
and documents) across the Internet. This is the uploading/downtoading protocol that you might use to obtain
copies of shareware on freeware programs or that might be useful for downloading new software drivers 1lom
a pafiicular cornputer hardware company.
The oldest and most mature of the O{fice programs, Word is also the most popular. It's an extremely
versatile tool - ideal for creating short documents, like letters and memos, with enough layout and graphics-
handling capabilities to also make it suitable for sophisticated publishing chores. Thanks to Office 2000,s
HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) editing improvements, it's also an excellent starting point when you
want to create a Web page - a topic we cover in later chapters.
You'll find hundreds of small and welcome usability irnprovements in Word as well. Including a WySIWyG
(WharYou-Say-ls-What-You-Get) that lets you see what a font will look like before you reformat a text selection.
If you are bulleted and numbered lists, you'll be able to choose from more options than in previous versions.
One of the most dramatic innovations in Word 97 was its table-creation utility, which lets you use a pencil-
shaped mouse pointer to draw tables directly on the screen, merging cells and adding borders without ever
touching a dialog box. There are a few additional usabitity-related improvements in Word 2000's table-drawing
capabilities. For example, you can now nest one table within another, letting you easily display two small tables
side by side for quick comparisons. When you enter data in a table, the column width resizes automatically.
Word tables translate extremely well to the Web, too - try the table AutoFormatting options to add Web-style
borders.
Word shares basic spelling tools with every other Oflice applications, but it takes those capabilities
further, including an option that automatically corrects spelling erors based on suggestions in your main
dictionary. And if you were disappointed with the grammar checker in Word 97,try the improved version in
Word 2000.
Word can easily work in conceft with the other Offrce application too, It can display numbers from Excel or
Access or slides from PowerPoint. It can use Outlook information to create labels and lists.
8.6 Starting MS-Word

To start MS-Word, the following steps should be followed :
tr Click on Start button on the task bar.

O Click on Programs of start menu.
tr From the Programs menu click on MS-Oftice.
O Finally, click on Microsoft Wcrd option as shown in Fig. 8.1 .
F'ig. 8.1 Starting MS-Word.
After that, you will see a word document as shown in Fig' 8'2'
6 Formatting toolbar
2 Tab alingment 3 nu bar 5
button
8 Outline view button 12 Status bar

9 Print Layout button
t0 Web Layout view button 14 Scroll bars
11 Normal view button
Fig. 8.2 Micmsoft Word window.
132
Saraswati lnformatics Fractices (
word is built around a set of interactive windows rectangular,
communicate with the word program and create - on-screen boxes through which you
your document-s. you can hide many of these and
yourself wiih an almost blank screen, but leave
they're there to give you quick access to many of
that you might not otherwise notice. we'll go word,s features
inrougr the parts of th.'r".".n one by one shown in Listing g.l.
Listing 8.1 Parts of the Word Screen.
No. Name Description
I End-of-file marker Horizontal Iine showing the end of the current file.
When you open a new
document, the end-of-hle marker appears at the too
of the screen
2 Tab alignment button
3 Title bar
4 Menu bar
5 Stqndard toolbar
6 Formattittg toolbar Contains buttons that you can use for formatting
characters and
paragraphs.
7 Ruler Shorving page width and position of tabs, indents
and columns.
8 Outline view button click this button to view the document outline so that you
can develop
the document's structure.
Print Layout view buttcn click this button to switch print
to Layout view, which shows page borders,
accurate margins, headers and footers and other
elements as tt e!,tt
when you print them.
10 ll/eb Layout view button If you're creating a Web page, click this button
to see how the page wilt
look online.
ll Normal view button Click this button to switch to a normal view of the document.
12 Status bar Shows the current page number and position of
the insertion point in the
document.
13 Mode indicators These show special conditions that are in effect,
such as recordins a
macro, tracking changes in the document, extending
a selection or
overtyping.
14 Scroll bars Use these scroll bars to move the view of the
document up or dou,n or to
quickly jump to a spot in the document. The length
of the vertical scroll
bar represents the length ofthe entire document.
ihe position ofthe scroil
position indicator represents the position in the document
of the currentry
visible window.
8.7 Creating Word Documents
As you know, when you start word, it automatically creates a new document Documentl. So you
straightway start ryping the text. That is, there is -
no need to use any command to first create adocument.
can
you have typed your document, when you save After
it, word will ask for the filename. At that time, you can assign
any filename to Docurnentl and save it in any directory.
The first thing to do is create u n.* io.r.ent. As you've already seen, word
document already disprayed, ready for editing.
opens with a blank
At this poini, you have severar choices :
D You can start working in the blank document that's already open, entering
text and other elements.
when you're ready, you can save the fire as either a
wori document or a web page.
o You can start with one of word's bu ilt-in templates or wizard, which may
already contain some ofthe
text and much of the formatting you need.
a
Word Processing Basics 133
Tg
n You can create a blank W-eb page or email message.
8.7.1 To start a new word document

tr On the Standard tooibar, click the New Blank Document
ft
button.
or,
Press Ctrl+N.
or,
D Frorn the File menu, choose New as shown in Fig. 8.3.
5 In the New dialog box as shown in Fig. 8.4, click tab that
corresponds to the type of document you want.
tr Click the template or u,izard you want to use.
D ClickOK.
Fig. S.3FileNew to create a new
;l arxesl&ettn* | ,xr,*ow,r*r** |'*rtft"t# |
Fig.8.4 The New dialog box.

Note. If you select Web Page on the General tab of the New dialog box, MS-Word wiil automatically save your
document as an HTML page.
8.8 Saving Word Documents

Until you save a documeirt, its infbrmation is stored only in your computer's RAM. Your work on the document
could be lost in the event of a power outage or system crash. It's a very good idea to save documents
frequently as you work. This ensures that the most recent versions are always saved to disk.
8.8.1 Existing File in its Current l-ocation
8.8.2 Saving with a Name, Format

or Location
Often, you vrant to make changes in the way you save a file. In particular,
you may want to save a file to a dift'erent location on your computer. Or
you may want to save it in a different format, so people who run software
other than Word may use it. In each case, you use the Save As dialog
box. To display it, choose File ) Save As (see Fig. 8.5) or press F12.
The Save As dialog box (see Fig. 8.6) is also displayed when you
save a file for the first time because you must specify a name and
location for the file. By default, Word expect you to save your file in the
My Documents folder in Windows 95 or Windows 98. Word also inserl
the first word or phrase of your document in the File Name text box,
guessing that these words might be your document's title. If worcl has
made correct assumptions, all yorr need to do is click Save to store the
file.
Fig. 8.5 File Save option.
{j} '*" E ;
i4y Doe,unents
"' f,l ffi -'Touis
Ucer Fites
Ess-i
6ss-3
f,ib&ine l&El
*I
_^J
sd!ts es E/pei
lt,iiord Oor*rnent JJ
8.8.3 Saving to a Different Location

Word's Save As dialog box gives you extensive control over where you save your files. Save a copy of your file
in a different folder or ririve as follows :
O Click anywhere in the Save In drop-down box. A list of available drives ancl resources is displayed
(referFig.8.6).
tr Click the drive or resources where you want to store your file. A list of existing documents and foldels
already stored on that drive is displayed.
tr If you want to store your file in one of the subfolders, double-click it; repeat the process until you
arrive at the folder you want.
D Make sure the filename and file format a"re conect, and click Save.
8.8.4 Saving in a Different Format

What if you want to save a file for use by someone who works with a different word processor or an older
version of Word ? Or lvhat about saving it as text-only for transmission over an email system that can't handle
formatting or HTML ? In each case, you need to save your file in a different format.
To choose a format other than Word, display the Save As dialog box and click in the Save as Type drop-
down box. Scroll to the file type you want to use and click it. If the filename uses a different extension as will be
the case unless you are saving to an older version of Word for Windows or DOS or to WordPerfect. Word
automatically changes the name in the File Name text box, Click Save to save the file.
8.9 Opening a Document

You can retrieve and open any saved document or file by clicking the
Open button on the Standard toolbar, using the keyboard shortcut
Ctrl+O or choosing File L Open as shown in Fig. 8.7. Each of these
steps opens the Open dialog box, shown in Fig. 8.8.
The terms fitre and document are two different ways of looking at
the same thing. When referring to a text object on your screen, we call
it a document; when referring to the same text object stored on the disk,
we call it a file.
8.9.1 To Open an Existing Document

tr Choose File I Open (see Fig. 8.7) or press Ctrl+O.
or,
3 Click the Open button on the standard toolbar
D Use the Open dialog box that appears to locate the file that
you want to open.
a Use the I-ook in menu near the top of the dialog box to go to
another location. Fig.8.7 File Open option.
tr Double-click a folder to open it.
tr Select the hle that you want to ,8,ft X e; E'
open and click the Open button
or,
tr Double-click the fi le that you want
to open.
Fig.8.8 Open dialog box to open a file.

136 Saraswati lnfornratics Practices {Xl)
By default, Word's Open diaiog box displays oniy files Word is designed to edit. In lVord 2000, these
include. DOC @ocument) files, .DOT (Documenttemplate) fiies, .HTM and.f[ML (HyperTextl\4arkupLanguage)
Web pages, .URL files (links to trtrternet addresses) and, .RTF (Rich Text fonnat) files. If you can't find a fiie
where you expect it to be, it may be there but have a diff'erent extension. To finttr out, click in the Files of Typc
drop-down and seiect All Files (x.x). trVord now displays all files in the current fbider.
You can open many files at the same time. Display the Open <iia.log bor and browse to the folCer you want.
Press and hold Ctrl while you click each liie you \&'ant to open. When they are all selecterl, click Open.
If you want to open several files listed consecutively in the same folder, press anci hold Shiit; then choose the
first and last files you want. Word automaticaliv selects all the files in between.
8.9.2 Using the Most Recently Used File List fjf* Edtt 9iei,6 lcrssrt - rof*
Sometimes you don't have to go anywhere near the Open dialog box; there are *ls**,".
faster ways to find what you need. ' 1, a
If you've used the file recently, it may appear on the Most Recently tlsed , ii,:';r'- '
file list that appears at the hottorn of the File menu. By default, Word keops track
of the last four files you use; you can reopen one of these files b.y -relecting it
from the File menu. You might want Wbrd to keep track of more than four files.
Word can track up to nine files, though on some computers only seven or eight
may display ileatiy as shown in Fig. 8.9.
To change the number of files Word tracks, choose Tools ) Option, and
click the General tab. In the Recently Used File List scroll box, select the number
of files you Elant to track, from 0 to 9. Ciick Ots. Word begins tracking the new
number of liles.
Fig. 8.9 Most recently used files displayed in file menu.
8.10 Closing your Doeument

If work has been completed, do the foliowing to close it :
tr Click on File, Close menu option as shown in Fig. 8.l0

or
[I Press Ctrl + W key sirrrultaneously"
A dialog box will appear as shown in Fig. 8.1 l. ,,P,e*e5*tg1.,

sirfr.,.
Ietl*r
Miryosolt lldord t'&itEr
e [aiihsY6$i
St you want to sevx th* ehonqes y*u 3, G:\L19s.{iiildti6r
rn.*d* to lelter?
3 Hr\{la:s.,il{gl*bel
fi* Exr
"_L.,,** ...",".*";
Fig. 8.10 Clnsing an opened file using menu.
Fig. 8.11 Alert message box before closing a file.
Here, click on Yes button.
137
8.11 Moving Around in a Document

Word offers a variety of ways to viet, dift'erent parts and to nloving around
in a document'
Bscrollbarletyoushiftthecontentsofthedoculnentwindow.
as a certain page"
D The Go To command lets you vielr, a specilic document elernent, such
3 Browse Object buttons lets you browse a document by its elernenrs.
D The Document Map lers you uiove quickly to a specific headin-s.
8.'11.'! To Scroll the Contents of the Doeurnent Window

tr Scrolling through a document
Click the scroll arrorv for the direction that you want tcr view. For example, to scroll dowtl to Yiew' the end
of a document, click the down arow.
D Scroll line bY line
a yellow box appears on the screen-
Drag the scroll box in the direction that you want to view. As you drag,
you release the mouse
It indicates the page and, if applicable, the heading that wili appear on scl3en when
as shown in Fig' 8' 1 2'
button. Release the mouse button to view the indicated part of the document,
{al
,(. Times F,law Pornen -
$.uljpt $ L eate AP Plie ation.

Faser I i
n>
rsdfsd
chss\rilA.InfltefirstueekofDecember2ffi2'mlrparentsare
rrrarriagefimctionini\,Iurrrbai.So,Ilr.arrtaf,r.edaysleavefi-om
I2+00x.
j-l,erelorr. I requ*ri -,rcu, }:rlxasr in thr rnar-riage firncfinq uttth ,rry

piireat! -4n,i garrt fis the teaat days'
Thurkutg "vtu
Yoru's silrtrrrly,
$rmit ehcpm
rl ' ,l
Fig. 8.12 Scrolling through line by line'
tr Scroll window bY windou'

window contents on screen at a time'
Click in the scroll bar above or below the scroll box. This shift the
8.11.2 To use the Go To Command ,, :&t|:
Hdit, Hew Jreurt F$rna[,.I
tr Choose Edit > Co To (see Fig. 8.13) or press Ctrl+G. The Find and
Replace dialog box appears with its Go To tab displayed.
D ln the Go to what list box, selecr the type of document element that you
want to vlew.
E Enter the appropriate reference in the text box.
n CHck Nert to go to the next reference.
O Click the dialog box's Close button to dismiss it.
For example, to go to page 4 of a document, seleci page and enter the number 4,
iLs shown in Fig. 8.14.
Fig. 8.13 Go To option in Edit menu.
rird l F+slate
6Al*',.rh6tr
*rk
Fig.8.l;l The Go To dialog box.
8.12 Printing the Entire Document

ltaric word printing is as sinrple as it gets. Click the print button in the Standard
Eiie [d]t $or* &Keat F*rn
lit.'B3 Speclfying What to print

,',;-iposeyou don't 'vant to print your entire docnment, you wal}t to nse a different
, , nrter, or you wanf to print severai copies c;l the document. Choose File ] print as
' lirwn in Fig. 8.15 or ctrl+P to display the print dialog box as shor.r,n in Fi-e. g.1b and
'rrlrtll thcsc aspeels ol ,row you print.
i:.13.1 Printing Multiple Copies of a Document
i .rr the Numbel of copies spin box to specify the number of
copies you want to
;,i'lrt. Eithel click the spinner box arrows or type the number of copies ,vou want to
print.
Fig. 5.15 Print option in File menu.

' ' .'l-

Fr*ffitafib
tu #,
17 C,rtkee
Fag*s y*r sfu9*tl
;{olT:-'in lenee
J Seere te peper sig*l
Fig. 8.16 The Print dialog box.
8.13.2 To Collate or Not To Collate

By default, Word automatically collates multiple copies of your document by scnding the document to the
printer, waiting a moment and then sending it again. You gct output affanged in page order. Because ycu
usually want your document to print in page order.
Only one thing : It may take longer. Printers typically prr)cess each page in vour document separateiy.
When the second copy of a collated document starts printin-u. none of the processing thr the earlier parlcr;
remainsinmemo.-v Theprocessingmustbedoneoveragain.Laserpdnlercan.howcver.pritttsevetr'l LL,rr:eeuti\c
copies of the sarile page without reprocessing thern. So if liou're ra,iiling to rnanually collate lour docuiuent - c'r
if you're lucky enoLrgh to have someone around fc help '- ),ou rllight gct yout' print joh dorrc sr)oner by
disabling \Vord's collating iunclion. To do so. ciear the Collate cilectr' box.
8.13.3 Printing Selected Pages of a Document

Rather than having 'iy'ord print ever)r page of your document (as it does bi, default). vou jall *se the Print
dialog box to control, which pages priLrt.
tr Print the page ycur inserlion point is in by choosing Current Page fiom the Page Range area of the
dialog box.
tr Select specific l-cxt alld print that tert by clicking the Selection button.
tr Select specific pages to print by entering the page numbers in the text box next to the Pages button.
If you specify individual pages, Word understands hyphens and commas. as in the following examples :
l-5 Prints pages L through 5

l,'7,9 hints pages 1,1 , and9
1-5,8,20 Prints pages 1 through 5 and pages 8 and 20
8.13.4 Printing Odd or Even Pages

If you want to print only odd or even pages, yori can make this choice lrom the Print drop-down list box. Choose
Odd Pages or Even Pages rather than the detault setting, All Pages in Range as showrr in Fig. 8. 17" Some peopie
use this t'eature to print on both sides of paper even if their printers do not provide this capability. Fir-.t, print
al1 the odd pages. Turn them over, place them in the printer tray again (usually face down and fi'rrward) and print
the even pages. Beware that printing on both sides of the paper by running the paper through twice can cause
some printers to jam. tt may not happen immediateiy but the long-term build up of ink from paper that has
already been printed on can cause jams and olher problerns over time.
Id$s
Hp LESer -let *.F " Stardard
: Pege r*rrge'
i { gt ;j ,:::
i' r ror,.wr'*s**
i- F,ap:*:
All r,ages' in r.3i'r!8
Fig. 8.17 The Print dialog box with Print drop-down list.
8.1 3.5 Printing Thurnbnails
The Page Per Sheet in Zoom option olthe Print dialog box in Fig. 8.17 offers you the opportunity to print
thumbnails of your doclu.leirts - 2. 4, 6, E. or I 5 pages on a single sheet of paper.
Depending on the nuniber of pages you choose. the sizes of your onginal document, and your other
printer settings, Worci vrill arrarge the pages on the sheet to fit as rnany as possible. For instance, if you choose
four pages, Word will print the pages right side. up. one irr each of the sheet's four comers. However, if you print
eight pages, Word will print the pa-9es sidervays on the sheet, in two rows of four pages a piece.
8.13.6 Scaling a Document to a Oifferent Paper Size

One way Word 2000 makes it easier to work in international environments is by simplifying switching among
the many paper sizes as shown in Fig. 8.i8 that are used around the world.
Word Processinel Basics 141
5eaiing
Lerter {8 J,/it I t
Lege{ {8 !i x l{
-. -,. - .ti .- ra ! -2
Fig. 8.18 The Print diaicg box r+4th Scale to paper size option'
To scale a document so ii prints rveLl on another paper size. clispial' the h-int dialog box' Then choose the
Scale to paper size drop-down box in Zoom option of Pnnt dialog box and choose the paper size listed rn the
box.
8.1 4 Previewlng Document

'Word's highly flexible
When you want to previerv a document, as it will be printed, you can take advantage of
Print Preview feature. One quick way to get to it is to click the Print Preview button on the Staudard toolbar as
showninFig. 8.19.
Print Preview can save a lot trf time ancl paper - it's a iot quicker to look at a document on screen than wait
for it to print, and it doesn't use a single sheet of paper.
8.14.1 Printing from Print Preview
To print one copy of a docurnent from rvithin Print Preview, click the Print button. If you w'ant more
control over
how 1,our document prints, choose Fiie F Pnnt to clisplay the s;une Print dialog bclx avaiiatrle elsewhere in
Word.
8.14.2 Changing Margins and lndents in Print Preview

you can use Word's rulers to change margins anC indents in Print Preview, jttst as you can in the normal
,Jocument windorn,. To change any of the page's margins, click the Ruler button in the Print Preview toolbar to
display the ruler; then drag the margin houndaD, with the mouse. (Your rnouse pointer changes to a double-
headed arrow lvhen it touches the margins boundary on the ruier).
Drugging rvorks for both horizontal and vertical margins, but on thc' horizontal margins you need to be
careful not to inadvertently move an indent instead.
Multiple Pages
One Page
Magnifier ViewRuler
Shrin-k to Fit
Print
FuIl Screen
[n-{*rt
Lft & Xnl 29
Fig. 8.19 The Print preyiew Screen.

8.14.3 Editing in Print preview
You can edit your document in Prjnt Preview. Place the magnifying glass on the part
of the page you want to edit
and click to zoorn to 1oO7o. Then click on the Nlagnifier button in the toolbar.
This turns the magnifier off,
leaving the 700vo zoom in place. Now you can select text, edit it, move it around
and reformat it as if you were
still in Nomal or Print La1'out view. Most of the usual Word menu i[ems are available
while you're editing in the
Print Preview screen.
8.14.4 Zooming ln and Moving Around

While you are viewing the document in Print Preview, the mouse pointer becomes a magnifying glass
with a
plus symbol. To zoom the document to full size. move the pointer to the region
of the page you rrv=ant to look at
more closely and click. The text enlarges to full size, as shown in Fig. 8.20. You
can adjust the exact proportion
ofthe text by entering a new percentage in the Zoom box.
If you want to view enlarged text elsewhere on your page and the text extends beyond the current
boundaries of your screen, scroll to it with the vertical or horizontal scroll bars. Keep
in mind that the scroll bars
take you through the entire document, not just to the top and bottom of the visibL page.
it prtouipur
ABC Psbltc $clrucl,
Dqlht.
Subje et ; I,ear* App}icatlon"
I anr a *tlrtlent sf class VII A. In th* first rqeek of f]ee enr]ot' 2{S3, i$y par*nt$ are
gcfurg to attendamarriage fturrticn irr Mr::nbai' fo, I wa:rt a (ve days ieare fram
fr2-lX{,trJz to06-12-2{tr1.
{A
Tlreref*rq I request you, please *llou, nm trr l rirr tha rn*rriage G.urclion with rn3
parpnt$. And grantrae the lravt fsr *i:rve sarcl *ayr.
Tharktrg yau
Fig. 8.20 The Frint Preview screen shown atl007o size.
8.14.5 Viewing Multiple Pages at once

You can view up to 24 thumbnail pages at once in
Print Preview. To do so, click the Multiple Pages
button in the Print Preview toolbar. A box r:pens, as sk Edr Frfard loob
shown in Fig. 8.21. Select the number of pages you
.&'j,& ot^
'. - l;t-*
. .:r::,e ,1
want to appear by dragging the mouse across the
selection grid. You can display up to three rows of
pages in as many as nine columns as shown in Fig.
8.22.
Fig. 8.21 The PrintPreview screen with selection of Multiple pages icon.
To switch back to a single-page Print Preview, click the One Page button.
8.14.6 ShrinkinE a lJocument to Fit a Page

Rather than shrink your document by trial and emor, you can have Word calculate and make the changes
necessary to reduce your document's length by one page. Click on the Shrink To Fit button in the Print Preview
toolbar.
Note. You can undo the effects of shnnking if you click the Undo tool; however, after you save the document,
you cannot undo Shrink To Fit.
144 Saraswati lnformatics Practices (X!)
EIE
Paqr i+
Fig. 8.22 Five pages displayed at once.
8.15 Quitting Documents

Even if awordapplication is minimizeditis stillrunning. To quit aword appiication,
you must exit the application.
8.15.1 To Quit a Word Application

E From the File menu, choose Exit. as shown in Fig. 8.23.
or,
D Click the Close button in the Title bar.
Word will not lei ycu quit an application without renrinding you to save ary
open documents that have changed since you last save them. word opells a window
fclr each file you open. Clicking the Close button closes criiJy the current hle until
yoti click Close in the last window and then it closes the application.
Fig. 8.23 Exiting from MS-Word.

Solved Exercises
()1. What is word processor ?
Ans. A Word processor (such as Word) is a computer program that enabies you [o create, edit, print and save
documents for future revision and retrieval. You enter text into the computer by using a keyboard. As you
type, your words are displaycd on a monitor, or screen, and are stored temporarily in computer memory as
you are creating the document rather than on paper.
Q2. What is word wraPs ? Define'
to decide where t<l end each line' as we
Ans. As we enter text iu a rvord processing packages rve do not need
the text dov"n to the next line' l'his
do on a typervriter. When a line is full, the p.o!ru* aLrtomatically
wraps
facilityis called word wraPs"

Menu displays a hierarchy of tlre files aud programs installed
in Windows' Click the Programs
e3. The Start
icon to display the proglarn gl'oups that are availnble'
Ans. What is the function of start tnenu ?
Q4. What is the purpcse of rrraximize button ? . r---..^ :+^ -. size'
returns the r'vindow to its previous
Ans. lt alternately expands the windon, to fi il up the wht-rle sareen, or
room to work'
Maximizing Word for Winc!ows 9"5 gives y'ou the most
Q5. t,ist some technique to quit frorn the Ms-word'
nns. We can erit the program b3" using any onc of the foliowing techniqtles
:
(a) Choose Fiie, Exit lionl the rnenu'

Cf i.t on the applicaticirs-r'indow Co,tt'ol-menu
icon, and clroose Close'
iai
(rj Oorbl"-c!ick on thc applieation-r';iudow Coltrol-menu icon'
w Close box.
n( nerv rvord document in MS-WORD'
A*;;. >> Nerv and then from the New rvindorv ctrick on the Black Document
icon to create a new word docurnent. Where a new documeni
will be opened as it default name Documentl-
Microsoft Word.
Q7. Write down the steps to save your word document'
>> Save llotn File rrenu' After that a Save As dialog
Ans. Your t1,ped dccume.nt can be saved b,v seiecting File
box and then click Save' You rvill see that
box will be appearec. I{ere t1,pe yotlr ner,\'file nime in File name:
thefilenamewhiclryout.vpedisshownonihetitlebarofMS-WoRD.
Q8. Differentiate between File >> Sal'e As and File
Ans. You use the File Save As command to save a d
name. or to save a documettt in a dit-ferent locati
You use the File Save ccrmmand (rather fian File
in its current location. File, Save updates a sav
document with the nerv version of the docunlen
subsequent updates of that document' Howe
location (while retaining a cop)' oi'the origina
Q9. How can you print your word document ?
There are lots of options in the Print dialog
Ans. To print the word docurnent, choose Prlnt fli'orn the File Menu.
box.Forexample,youcanspecifypafiietllarpagestoprint,youcanprintmorethanonecopyofa
rlocunrent, and you select a difl'erent printer to connect to.
But tnost of the time, all you need to do to print
a document is open the Print clialogs box and
click oK. In a few seconds, your document comes out of the
printer.
Ql0. What is Prirrt Preview ?
Ans.PrintPreviewprovidesarniniaturoviewofhowadoeumentwilllookwhenitisprinted.Youcanuseprint
adjust the layout of a doctlment before you actually
print it'
Preview to examine and
Qll. Name any 5 features of Word processor'
(insertions, deletions, modifications etc') can be made
Ans. (a) Editing Features. Any type of correction
easilY as and when required'
(b) Permanent storage. with word processors, documents can be saved as long as desired'
The save document can be retrieved whent ver desired'
as there is no rnechanical carriage
(c) Fast. Typing text in a word processor becomes speedy
nlovement associated'
(rf Graphics. l/ost modern rvord processors provide the facility
of incorporating drawings in the
documents which enhances their usefulnes s'
1 rto
Saraswati !nformatics practices
(c) rd abte of checking spelling mistake bur also can suggest
ve ds. Some word processor can check for grammatical
er2. Exp :: "tiH;*,.nent window.

Ans' (n) Title bar. Located top of the screen. It displays the name of the application (MS-WoRD)
at the
and
the active docurrent (default is Documentl).
(b) Formatting toolbar' Formatting toolbar consists oftools liequently
used for formafting document.
(c) Ruler bar' Ruler bar allows to format the verticai alignment oftext in
a document. It is used to get tab
stops, margins and indents.
(d) Status bar. The starus bar displays information vdrich inoludes page
numbers, the column and line
number on which your cursor is present at any given point
of a time.
(e) are used to vielv different areas of the active word window. you
can do so by
ng the scroll bar, or by crickin,q on the buttons rvith the arrows
nrarked on
a Page'
er3. wh il'ro'
Ans' The insertion point (the btinking vertical bar) or cursor at the top of the document where you can tvpe is
cailed text area. Its rocation determines where the next character
typed by y,ou.
Ql4. What do you mean by page preview ?
'4'ns' This view shows a thumbnail view of how each page of the document will look when printed.
This view is useful for a bird's-eye vierv of a document:
whether the pages look even, how big the
headings appear, and where the page breaks tbll.
Ql5. How can you see multiple pages at once ?
Ans' (a) click the Multiple Pages button on the Print Preview
toolbar. In the grid that appears you can select
how many full pages you want to drsplay.
(b) click in the grid and drag the pointer to the layout
you want to see. The bottom of the grid shows the
number of rows and columns of pages to display (for example
4 x 5). when you reiease the mouse
then many pages appear on screen,
Review Questions
l. What is word p;ocessing ?

2. Write the kby features in word 2000.
3. Write the general steps to stop your word.
4. Write the general steps and ways to save a word document.
5. What are the file fy-pes that you can create in word ?
6. Write the steps that how to make a file read_only in word ?
7. What are the purposes of the fbllowing ;
(a) Document Map (b) Formatting Marks

- Write the methods (c) use ofGo'fo command
8. to scroll the contents of a document window.
9. what are the ways to print word documents ? Explain all the printi,g types.
10. Write the and print preview.
ll' open MS r to your principal for five days leave and do the followrng
as given
(a) Save :
(6) Save As the same document as ,,Application.Doc,,.

(c) See its print previerv and take hard copy print out.
(d) Close the document,'Application.Doc,'.
(e) ExitfromtheMS-Word.
Ghapter - 9
Editing Word Document
9.1 lntroduction
To enter text in a new or existing document, just start typing in the editing wind,rw. If the text doesn't appear,
make sure that Word is the active appiication by clicking anywhere in the Word window.
A blinking vertical line, the itsertion point is displayed in your document at the locati,on where your text
will appear. As you type, your words are placed to the lett of the insertion point as the insertion point moves to
the right. You can move the insertion point by clicking eisewhere in the editing window.
9.2 Entering Text

When you start IVIS-Vy'ord, it witl automatically appear with a biank document named Documentl . Now you can
enter text, as required. Here, you can tjvpe your required characters like alphabet, numbers, and other symbols
as your letter.doc, as given in Fig. 9.1. i
To
The Pdn.iDal
ABC Public $chsol,
Delhi.
f.lrlie{g'; LaaYa APp}i+atbn"
Iam a $hldent of slsss XI A. In thf first !+eci( of Augw?(Sl'' nr} pa,rents ut

qoi*g to utoea{ a ma-rriage function in Mrunbai $o, I want a Ave days leave from
01-{8"2flr tsB7s-?tffi.
Ttrerefurz. I reqr:esl1:str. pigxet ailo\',' me tE j o$ ths mfiraat ftmclion wrth my

r' 't\rr
Fig.9.1 A word document.
9.3 Selecting Text

In Word, you can manipulate text in virtually any way imaginable - but before you do any of that, you have to
select it. There are several ways to do that. If you're new to Word, you might try them all out to see which
seems
most comfortable. If you're an experienced Word user, you already selecttext dozens of times a day. Now might
be a good time to see whether you ban do it mcre efficiently.
(1471
9.4 lnserting & Deleting Text

You crm insert or delete characters as the insef(ion point at any time.
n When vou insert characters, any text to the right of the insertion point shift to the right to make room
for new characters.
fi When you delete text, any teKt to the right of the insertion point shift to the teft to close up space left
by delete characters.
E When you jrsert or dclete text, wcrd r,r,rap adjust if necessary to cointbrtably fit aharacters on gach
line.
9.4.I To lnsert Text

-1 Position the insertion point where you want to insert the text.
O Type the text that you want to insert.
9"4.2To DeleteText
D Position the insertion point to the right of the character(s) that you want to delete.
D Press Backspace to delete the character to the left of the insertion point.
Q$FjR $ teave Application, Insertion point

t
Sr,
t:
,
":i
^$
. i.
Fig. 9.2 Insertion and Deleting text.

or,
tr Position the insertion point to the ieft of the character(s) that you wart to delete.
tr Press Delete to delete the character to the right of the inseftion point.
Note. You can also delete text by selecting it and pressing Backspace or Delete.
9.5 Editing Selected Text

Once you select text, you can delete it or replace it with other text.
9.5.1 To Delete Selected Text

tr Select the text. press Backspace or Delete. The selected text disappears.
EditingWord Document 149
9.5.2 To Replace Selected Text

tr With text selected, type the replacement text as shown in Fig. 9.3. The selected text disappears and
the replacement text is insefted in its place.
Selected text
E"rr$ieg(; L effi e Applicat*on.
Sir"
I *ftr s $tualBNt nf tlass Xt A. ln the first lwek of EES!*ftdnryFarents arE

goingto attenda nrarriage fimction in l\4urnbai, So, I lrant a fve ilays leare
0l{E-2tn2 tu 0?{E-2mr.
firre. 1 request ag'e fi:nction wtth n:Y

i.
;.{ 1
Fig. 9.3 Selecting and Replacing text.
9.6 Cut, Copy and Paste

The heart of word processing what first rnade it superior to the typewrite 20 years ago - is the ease with which
-
you can cut, copy and paste. Using Word, you can move text around at will, until you're satisf,red with its
content and organization.
Word offers two ways to copy or move text :
Use the Copy, Cut and Paste commands (or their shortcut keys) to place text on the Clipboard
and
tr
then copy it from the Clipboard to another locatron'
D Use drag-and-drop editing to copy or move selected text'
You can copy or move text to the following locations :
O To a different location within the same docttment'

O Ttr a different Word document'
n To a document created with a program other than Word'
Copying and moving text makes it possible to reuse text and reorganize a document without a lot of
retyping.
9.6.1 The Clipboard

are copied or cut' Word
The Clipboard is a place in RAM that is used to temporarily store selected items that
supports two Clipboards :
The Windows Clipboard is shared among all Windows applications that support the
copy and paste
D
commands.
features,
B The Office Clipboard is shared among all Microsoft Office applications. It offers additional
such as collect and Paste which we discuss later in this chapter.
again
Text copied or cut to the Clipboard remains on the Clipboard until you use the Copy or Cut command
150 Saraswati lnforrnatics Practices (Xl)
or restart your computer. This enables you to use Clipboard contents over and over. These techniques
also
work with objects such as graphics.
9.6.2 To Copy Text with Copy & paste
D Select the text that you want to copy.
tr Choose Edit > Copy as shown in Fig.9.4 or press Ctri+C.
or...
O Click the Copy bunon on the Standard toolbar
The selected text is copied to the clipboard. The document does not change.
D Position the insertion point where you want the text copied"
A Choose Edit > Paste as shown in Fig. 9.4 or press Ctrl+V.
or,
O Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar.
The text in the Clipboard is copied into the document at the insertion point. Fig. 9.4 Edit Copy option.
9.6.3 To Move Text with Cut & paste
D Select the text that you want to move.
D Choose Edit > Cut as shown in Fig. 9.4 or press Crrl+X.
o!
tr Click the Cut button on the Standard toolbar.
The selected text is copied to the Clipboard and removed from fhe document.
D Position the insertion point where you want the text moved.
D Choose Edit > paste as shown in Fig. 9.d or press
Ctrl+V.
or,
tr Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar.
The text in the ciipboard is copied into the document at the insertion point.
9.6.4 To Copy Text with Drag-and-Drop Editing
D Select the text that you want to copy.
tr Position the mouse pointer on the selected text.
tr Hold down Ctrl, press the mouse button down and drag. As y'ou drag a tiny box and vertical
line move
with the Inouse pointer, which has a plus sign beside it to indicate that it is copying.
O When the vertical line at the mouse pointer is where you want the text copiea, ietease
the mouse
button and Ctrl. The selected text is copied.
9.6.5 To Move Text with Drag-and-Drop Editing
O Select the text that you want to move.
D Position the mouse pointer on the selected text.
Press Lhe mouse button down and drag. As you clrag, a tiny box and verljcal line
= polnter.
move with the mouse
D When the verlical line at the mouse pointer is rvhere you want the text rnoved, release
the mouse
button. The selected text is moved.
9.7 Using Smart Collect and paste

Ever need to collect several blocks of text and deposit them in all the same place.
Most people cut one block of
text, go to the new location, paste it and then go looking for the next. Word 2000 provicles
an easier solution:
collect and paste.
When you first copy text (or anything else) into the Clipboard as shown in Fig. 9.5, Word 2000 works as it
always has: It stores the information in the Clipboard waiting for you to
paste it somewhere. However, if there's already text in the Clipboard, and
you copy more text into the Clipboard, Word 2000 displays the Clipboard
toolbar. ffi
Each time you copy text to the Clipboard, another Word icon appears;
l)
if the text comes from a Web page, a Web page icon appears. The Clipboard
toolbar can hold up to twelve copy blocks. If you attempt to copy a
thirteenth item, Word displays a message wamiug you that it will delete
the oldest of the twelve items currently stored in the Clipboard. Click OK
to continue.
Fig. 9.5 Clipboard toolbar.
tr To paste every Clipboard copy into the document at once, click Paste All.
D To view the text at the beginning of a Clipboard copy, however your mouse pointer over it; the text
appears in a Screen tip.
tr To insert one Clipboard copy; click on its corresponding scrap icon. You can choose any ofthe items
in the Clipboard toolbar, not only the most recent.
tr To empty the Clipboard of all contents, click Clear Clipboard.
D To close the Clipboard toolbar, click Close.
9.8 Reversing & Repeating the Recent Changes

Word offers commands that enables you to reversing or repeat the last thing you did.
tr Undo reverses your last action. Word supports multiple levels of undo, enabling you to reverse more
than just the very last action.
D Redo reverse the Undo command. This command is only available if the last thing you did was use the
Undo command.
tr Repeat performs your last action again. This command is only available when you performed any
action other than use the Undo or Redo command.
The exact wording of these commands on the Edit menu varies depending on the last action performed.
The Undo command is always the first command under the Edit menu; the Reclo or Repeat command (whichever
appears on the menu) is always the second command under the Edit menu.
The Redo and Repeat commands are never both available at the same time. The Repeat courmand is
especially useful for applying formatting to text scattered throughout your document.
9.8.1 To Undo the Last Action

J Choose Edit > Undo as shown in Fig. 9.6 or press Cxl+z.
or,
tr Click the Undo button i1 * on the standard toolbar. , a.-
r:, ,:.r"",ia .j
- 'ir .'.{1.$.;?t, J}}
.. " :):.:,'", t:'i
J1r,"
L ..i
t.rlzrr,{r .. !:. !/:.1._, i
9.8.2 To Undo Multiple Actions
O Choosing Edit > Undo or press Ctrl+Z repeatedly
or,
O Click the triangle beside the Undo button ff^.*,on the Standard toolbar
to display a menu of recent actions.
152 Saraswati !nforrnatics Practices (Xi)
rynnnfr i
Drag down to select all the actiilns
that you want to undo. Reiease the
mouse button to undo a[ selected
actrons.
Fig. 9.7 Undo button.
9.8.3 To Reverse the Last Undo

D Choose Edit > Redo as shown in Fig. 9.8 or press Ctil+Y
or,
D Click the Redo button on the Standard toolbar.

Fig. 9.8 Edit Redo option.
Fig.9.9 Redobutton.
9.8.4 To Reverse Multiple Undos
tr Click Edit ) Redo as shown in Fig. 9.8 or press Ctrl+Y repeatedly.
or,
D Click the triangle beside the Redo button on the Standard tooltrar to display a pop-up menu
of recently undone actions. Drag down to select all the actions that you want to redo. Release the
nouse button to reverse all selected undos.
9.8.5 To Repeat the Last Action
0 Choose Edit > Repeat as shown in Fig. 9. 10 or press Ctrl+Y.
In Word document, you can change the appearance of both the tey,t
chalacters and the paragraphs. Changing the look ofcharacters is font fonnatting @.w'r :S;s*rt lilifgnn*b l
which shows several examples and changing the appearance of paragraphs,
on the other hand, is paragraph formatting which shows a variety of paragraph
formats (refer Fig. 9.11). The most common paragraph formatting changes are
indenting, double spacing, centering,justifying, numbering and adding bullets
to paragraphs.
As r,vith any formatting change, you mustfirst select the text to format (an
individual character, a word or two, a paragraph or the entire document) and
then select either font or paragraph formatting from rnenus, dialog boxes or
Word's toolbars.
For speedy text formatting, font and paragraph formatting can be part of
the information you record in a style. Applying a style that you've created to
a paragraph automatically applies font and paragraph formatting ro that
paragraph.
Fig. 9.10 Repeat feature.
EditingWord Docurrent 153
Text with Left-Align, font-Times Text with font-Arial, Size- i 0,

New Roman, Size-10, sffle-Bold style-Bold
To
Tln Irineipal
Text with font- ABC Puhlir Srlnol.
AdLibBT, Si Delhi"
10. style-Bold $tbterl .,Leargg
$r.
I
I arn asr,lient +f ln the fust n*ri: +il August 2002. r4I Fxelits ar goirig
ro attflrd ameflage flurctionl-F.!(9.-qp_bai S(,. i "tr3*ia fi',rc da3: l"'+ve kora il3 l2
''. |AlJ tc' Ilrl iJ-:0J/
.-{ .t
l'lrrrt l:rt, 1 rrqlest.:ou, l,lrose i!:t, r:i .:E if,r:ir,lr'. t ul: ro?i4
ior:.barrs san da'ysl- Texr wirh RighrAlign
. Fx+tds..p.nd
slpffiI:*tr*l I iil:' :,.' '.r sr. !f .-,\ .. ,f
Fig.9.11 Character and Paragraph formatting.
9.9 Font Formatting

Font formatting, which is sometimes referred to as character fbrmatting, can be applied to individual characters
of text. Word offers a wide variety of options.
tr The choice of font E Font size

tr Font style (for example, bold or italic) E Underlining
tr Font effects (for example, striketluou-qh. superscript, or emboss)
A Font color O ScaLing (lont stretching)
fl Spacing between groups of letters D Position of text on a line
D Kerning (spacing tretrveen specific pairs of letters)
D Text animation
9.9.1 Changing the Font and Font Size

In addition to the *qtandard tonts that come with Windcrvs. vou can also use fonts that are installed by
Microsoft Office 2000 and others that you buy or download.
To Change the font and font size :
D Select the tert for ftirmat as shown in Fig.9.12.

tr Click the arow button next to the Font list on the Formatting toolbar and select a font name from the
drop-down list.
I am a sfudmet Bf crass XI A In th* irst rvrrk rf August ?Q02, r-rry Iraients e',: going
t0 atte{d a raeniagr fil'ectu:o irt no, I 'llaut * five days itaue &tnr 0t- t i-
2G07 tr Ed-12"2fl03
Fig. 9.12 Selected text for changing font.
O Click the arrow button next to the Font Size list on the Formatting toolbar and choose a
different size,
or'
tr Click the curcnt font size on the Formatting toolbar and type a replaoement or!
tr From the Format menu, choose Font as shown in Fig. 9.13, and
rarnxt
,P&
r,, .Slnd+w
then, on the Font tab in the Font dialog box, select a font from the
Font list and a tbnt size from the size list, as shown in Fig. 9.14.
4fllPrrd
tus ('d111
lkerliis E),llrE 8(,ld
I
tvs frleli*Dt
1
Fig. 9.13 Format font option.
Hfferts '^ '!;1" "^"

u
"*
l* strig*tl,*.euqh
t
i
Pig. 9.14 Font dialog box with formatted text.
9.9.2 Choosing Font Styles, Underlining, Color and Effects

You've probably noticed that you can apply font styles from the Formatting toolbar by clicking the Bold, Italics
or Underline button or that vou can apply font styles by using the keyboard shorlcuts shown earlier. These and
many additional options zu-e available to you in the Font dialog box shown in Fig. 9.14. To display these options,
select the text you want to format. Then choose Format ) Font dialog box as shown in Fig. 9.13. you can also
choose Font dialog box from the shortcut mer.ru, simply right select the text. then righrclick, choose Font from
the shortcut menu and click the Font trb.
Here you can conveniently change all elements c'font toimatting at the same time: font, style, size,
underlining, color and effects. Choose from the corrusponding Font, Font Style and Size scroll boxes and font
effecl check boxes.
9.9.3 Selecting Font Underlining

You can select the Underline Style of your choice from the Underline Style drop-down box in Font dialog box.
Word 2000 provides several underlining choices, including dotted, thick, dash, dot-dash, dot-dot-dash and
wave underlining, as shown in Fig. 9.15.
Underlining L{o;iels
Te r.t. vri th s ine l e:-1]$ deri i4g Tq*.vgifhlslh-q4dgljlrng
Trut qitli ''ilEr,!s- edy Underlini&q
.te-*.sq*h-D"st-Qspjr.U*i*tinrqs T-s:*.v*,t^bF*,itfstI'a'h!Ir,-SslInrt'e
T.c.at..t:rl.h. D.q $.c.C..Und.sr.l.r,rrl+e
Fig. 9.15 Word windows with selected underlines'
9.9.4 Setting a Font Color

among 40 tbnt colors - plus Automatic' the
In the Font Color dr.op-down box, you can select a text color from
occufs :
default setting. Automatic is black, uniess one of the following
situations
You are formatting text in a table, against a backgrc'unti shaded

with a very dark color' in which case
tr
Automaticreformatsthetextco]ortowhiteforreadability.
text color in the Appearance tab of the
a You have (perhaps inadvertently) changed windows overall
Display section of the Windows Control Panel'
9.9.5 Setting a eustom Font Color
through
If that still isn't enough, you can manufacture a custom color
C$,lrc
you selected in Your document.
Fig 9.16 Font in formatting toolbar'
1&l"ftrls
Fig" 9.I7 Font Coior tab v,ith Standard tatr.

Fig. 9.18 Font Color tab with Custom tab.
9.9.6 Setting Text Effeets
You mrght be pleasantly surprised b1' how many basic
text effect word 2000 provides :
tr Strikethrough fl Double Striketlu.ou,rh O Superscript D Shadow

tr Subscr'ipt fl Ourline tr Hidden D Emboss
n SmallCaps E Engrave J Alt Caps
Fig' 9' 19 shctvs samples of ali ten visibie eff-ects. Not
all these effects can be applied together. Sometimes,
the limitations are obvious. For example. you
cannot apply strikethrough and double strikethrough to
text' So,etimet the liniitatrons are not s. obvic'rus. Forixample, the same
you cainot apply shadow or outine to text you
also intend to enrboss.
Notiie that subscript lowers text by -j points and reduces

its size at the same time; superscript raides text
by 3 points anc rc'iuces ils size. If you u ant ti. chan-ee
the position of subscript or superscript text, seiect
use the Pcsirio. ccntrols on the Character it and
Spaci^g tab of the Font dialog box.
Timei i!ei$ l+riiiaB t i; o ,,H
Tert Elfrcts
EBr4"reltiF$r**k"+h{q.r*€l+ TE:aI ir..iTii it,,l+-.t C,ql;-t
TEIiT YJITH ALt C.aJ,S Tos wirb Ouiin*
?*,".t ra'trir S ha r1+v",
Tel;t rrrtir &tnt,:,rs
Text w:tir sr:perscripl

i,{" + I =!)
Flg. 9.19 Word sercem with dlfferent text effcets,

EditingWord Doeument 157
9.9,7 Changing Case

One olthe rnost common effects-rcla-ted tasks is to change the case (capitalization)
of selected text to (or tiorn) all caps. You don'thave to bother with displaying ihe
Font Cialog box to do this; just press Ctrl+Shift+A.
Word also recognizes that ihere iile sevei'al ccmmon ways to capitalize
blocks of text you've selected. For example, you nright want io fom:at text as a
sentence, where only the first word is capitaliz-ecl cir as a title, where every woril
is capitalized" lbu ean quickly toggie selected texi through five t1,pes oi
capitaiization by pressing Shitt+F3 repeatedly or choose the caprtabz;air-.n ),ou
u,ant by selecting Format ) Change $ase as shorvon in Fig. 9.20.
A Change case dialog box will appear as shr-.rvn iti 9.21.
F-ig.9.2$ Format
Fig. 9.21 Change Case dialog box.
9.9.8 Character Spaclng

Word offers several more advanced font
formatting options :
CI Scale determines the

horizontal size of the
characters, enabling ttl stretch
or compress ihem.
E Spacing determines the
amount of spaee bet'nveerr
each character ofiext. SpacLng
can be normal or can be
expa-nded or condensed by the
number of points you specify.
tr Position deterrnines whether
text appears above or belor"r
the base[ne. Position can be
normal or can be raised or
lorvered by the number of
points you specify. Ttxi Effe*ts
tr Kerning determines how
certain combinations of letters
"fit" together.
Fig. 9.22 Font dialog iro; with Charai:ter Spacing tab.
/
9.9.9 Animating Texts

In Word 2000 (and Word 97), you can apply one of six simple animations to any block of text, calling attention
to it when it is viewed on screen in Word.
You can see samples of these anjmations in Fig. 9.23, they are described in Listing 9. 1.
Listing 9.1 Animation effects.

,dnimation WhatltDoes
Blinking Background Blinks reverse text on and off
Las Vegas Lights Borders text with rapidly changing colored shapes
Marching Black Ants Borders text with black dotted lines that constantly move to
the right
Shimmer RepeateCly blurs and unblurs text
Sparkle Text Superimposes moving colored sparkles on text
TnxtSffr+{s
Te r:r,.rii t }i B I ir;i: it: g B ;rek-gg.:, r"rn,i Tr"o:t with L.as Vegas Ligl*s Eiftci
i e.f rirril fpari li Te::t ,Tf S- ii qh i{i-r,:hi1[,r;d.&. nt{
Teat v,.ith Sliimrnrr i&i;vitffi{er e i,i;-a $lqq[ $.'l*s f
Fig. 9.23 Word screen with several text effect with the help of Text Effect in Font dialog box tab.
To animate text, select it; press Ctrl+D; choose the Text Effects tab; and choose an animation from the
Animations scroll box. The preview box shows what it will look like.
9.9.10 Drop Caps

Word can easily create large initial capitals, more commonly known as drop
caps, that give your documents a distinct, magazine-style appearance. Drop
caps work extremely well in newsletters, parlicularly those formatted with
columns. Drop caps are so named because usually the first letter or word of a
paragraph, formatted in all capitals, is "d:opped" into the paragraph so that
the first two or three lines are pushed to one side.
Follow these steps to add a drop cap to any paragraph :
1 Highlight the letter(s) or word(s) you want to conveft to a drop cap.
tr Choose Format ) Drop Cap as shown in Ftg.9.24. The Drop Cap
dialog box appears (see Fig. 9.25).
Fig. 9.24 Format Drop Cap option.

lmes m drap; '
3*stence ti**r teslr
Fig.9.25 Drop Cap dialog box.

D Select the position in which yoLi. want your drop cap to appear. Click either Dropped or In
Margin'
E Next you can select a different font tor the drop cap by clicking the arrow next to the Font text box.
D To change the size ofthe drop cap, enter a new value in the Lines To Drop text box'
tr To alter the amount of space between the drop cap alrd the surrounding text, enter a new value in the
Distance From Text box.
D Click OK to see the result as shown in Fig. 9.26.
a shrderrt tf rtass XI A. Iri t.hr first rl,,'eelt crf August f,002" my par*rrts arc
it:g tn afiet:tt a tu.aff1agr frrictinn in #"q4!F.# Eq I rvant a Svt deirs Xearre frr:tn
2- I 2-Zntl3 t* il$-\2"2fr42
Fig.9.26 DroP CaP text in word'

and get a
Word makes your drop cap by putting your selected text into a frame. To alter your options
different look, click the frame with the drop cap and select Format ) Drop Cap again a's shown in Fig' 9 24' To
remove a drop cap, click the frame, select Format ) Drop Cap and choose None, as shown in Fig' 9'25'
9.10 Paragraph Formatting

key while typing' You're
The paragraph is one of the Basic units of a document. Every time you press the Enter
Word
creating u pu.ug.uph. If you press Enter every time the text nears the end of a line instead of letting
":*
tbr \4,rap the text, you end up-with a paragraph for each line rather than a single paragraph with
several lines in
it. wittr-proper formatting, you never need to press Enter in the middle of a paragraph.
jine. For example, a heading of a few words is a paragraph of
Some of the p*ugrupto consist of only one
applies to the
its own, but probably doesn't extend to a second line. A blank line is a paragraph formatting
to have the whole
paragraph as a rvhole. This means that when you apply paragraph fomatting, you don't need
pu.ug.rpt] selected. Clicking to put the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph is all you need'
- ,,rlqr" settings. Although yor, coulcl create a document where every paragraph
Each paragraph can haire
has exactly the same formatting, that need not be the case. In an existing document, You can tell r'vhether some
aspects of paragraph formatting change from paragraph to paragraphs by just watching the ruler'
160
Saraswati lnformatics practices
The ruler displays the indents and tab setting for the
selected paragraphs. As you move to another
paragraph rvith diff-erent settings. the ruler changes.
{?
{f:dentsti*r*
Leh;
c-
Fr*vb*'
Fig.9.Z7 paragraph dialog box.

Word lets you spacing of
on a paragraph-by to keep en
"stick to" the next, same page.
aligninent n o,tiine reveis tr Indertation

Paragraph
Spacing between iines D Spacing befor-e and
?
= Line and page breaks
al
after paragraphs
tr fafs
9.10.1 Paragraph alignment
Paragraph alignment determines how text is positioned
between the left and right indents. word provides four
types of paragraph alignment.
uphs coue in trvo flal'ours: justified and ragged. Justified means lines
up evenly, while
. ,ou'd guess - ending rvherever the last word in the paragraph
, *itir each line a
"nas,
The four paragraph alignmenr types are listed in l_isting
9.2.
Listing 9.2 Paragraph alignment.
Task KeyboardShortcut Uses
Alignleft Crl+I_ Lines of text are flush-left (aligned evenly along
ihe left indent) and ragged-right (aligned unevenly
EditingWord Docunnent 161
aicng the right indent)" l,eft-aligaecl is the default

prragi'aph-a lignm-'nt setring.
Center Ctrl+E Lines of iext are centerecl between the indenrs.
Both the left and right sides of a centercd
paragraph are ragged.
AlignRight Ch1+I{ Lines oftext are flush-right and ragged-letl, the
opposite or left-aligned.
Justify Cr-l+J Lines of text are both flu,qh-left and tlush-right.
in ajustified paragraph, word adjusts the spaeing
betrveen words so that they stretch fiom the leit
indents to the risht indents.
9.10.2 lndenting Text

Word also provides totai control over the way ,you indent ,v"our paragraphs. You cau create the fcrilor,virg ibur
kinds ofindents :
tr Left indents. Adjust the lett ecige of every line in a paragraph.
tr Right indents. Adjust the rigi:t edge of every line in a pai'agraph.
tr Hanging indents. I-eave the first iine alone but move every line beneath it.
D First line indents- Move crnl-1'the 1-rrst line a palagrapi;.
To adjust the left anri,'or right inCeni, use the Left and Right boxes of the Paragraph dialog bcx (refer Fig.
9.2'7).To change the lett indent orJy, in haii-inch iueremeut, you may also use tire
Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons on the Formatting toolbar-or use
the equivalent keyboard shorlcut, Ctrl+M This adtls a 0.5" left indent to ihe
paragraphs you've seLected. If they're alreadv indented, it adds another 0.5".
You can reduce or eliininate the in.Jent by clicking the Decrease Iudent bution or
pressing Ctrl+Shift+Iv{.
The type of indenting you're probably accustomed to" where the frst line
of a paragraph gets indented is called a first-line indent. To creaie a first-line
indent, select the paragraphs you want to indent, chocse Format F Paragraph
as shown in Fig. 9.28 and in the Special br-ix pick First Line.
The other type of indenting vou'll see - rvhere the first line just out to the
left - is called a hanging indent. Used spanngly, it's gr,rrd way to emphasize the
first few words of a paragraph. (It's also corlmcn for bulleteri and m'.mbered
paragraphs, which are discussed later in this chapterl. To create a hanging
indent, select the paragraphs you want to indent, choose Fonaat F Paragraph
and in the Special box pick Hanging.
Fig. 9.28 Forrnat paragraph option.
$-1.1\.i9fi L ea$e Applicetit n.
*?UI e studeflt of class Xl A lrr fu &'st u,'*k of *ugust 20*2, niy pac*rrts
are going tu attend a rnasna3e fcnetiu: * .$p.m.f""e*i 50. I v,ru:t a fire dayo
leare &r-'rrn i-{2"i3-Z,"l0l t0 i}S"13-7flil2^
Th*reftre" I request y*4 plrase ;llnr," nr* ta i*rn &e rrarriage firnntion witf: rny
parerts. .S"n* grari rnr lhe leere for ahorre earti days.
Fig. 9,29 ll'ord window with difTerent indents.
162 Saraswati !nformatics Practices (Xl)
9.10.3 lndenting with the Ruler

If you're visually oriented you may want to use word's ruler to control indents -
much as you mtght have controlled tabs on a typewriter man,v- years ago.
trn Word 2000, the ruler displays by default. If you don't see it, choose View )
Ruler as shown in Fig. 9.30.
in Fig. 9.30, you can take a closer look at the ruier and its indent settings.
Hanging indent
Thb marker First line indent

Fig.9.30 View Ruler option.
Le[t indent
Fig.9.31The Ruler.
To create a new indent using the ruler, first click iu the paragraph you want to change or select multiple
paragraphs. Then drag the upper indent marker to where you want it and release the mouse button.
9.10.4 Spacing between Lines

Line spacing is the vertical distance between lines of text. Two common reasons for increasing the line spacing
of your paragraphs are to leave room for comments on a draft of a document and to make the bodv text easier
to read.
Both of these purposes - readability and editing drafts - have opti, for quick setting in ttre paragraph
^.:
box. For drafts, you can set the line spacing to double-spaced, triple-space or more, adding halflines or full lines
of space at a line. Word has controls for three kinds of spacing :
tl The amount of b]ank space before the first line of a paragraph.
tr The amount of blank space after the last line of a paragraph.
D The amount of space internally, between the lines of a paragraph.
The spacing between paragraphs adds upjust as you would think: the "after" from the first paragraph is
combined with the "before" of the second paragraph. Word ignores the "after" space if a paragraph will fit at
the end of a page; but it includes the "before" space when a pzLragraph starts on a new page.
Listing 9.3 shows the different options in Line Spacing tab.
Listing 9.3 Different options in Line Spacirig tah.
Option Tasks
Single Normal line spacing, which is used by default when you open a normal
document and just stafi typmg.
1.5 lines or double Best when you want to space the lines out a little but aren't worried about
precisely how much.
At least The best option when you're going to set a specific line height for the
paragraph. At ieast guarantees that if you set the line spacing to 12 points
and later change the paragraph to an 18 points font, for example, the tops
of the lines won't be cut off.
163
EditingWord Document
Exactly This option is. best when you want to shrink the line spacing to less than
singie spacing.
Multiple Lets you specify la'ge lifle spacing amounts in increment of half a line at
atllne.
To set the line spacing of a paragraph

O Click in the paragraph you want to format.
tr Choose Paragrapit from the forrnat rnenu and click the Indents and Spacing tab.
tr Select an option from the Line Spacing list'
9.10.5 Spacing tsefore and After Paragraphs

you,ve just learned how to set spacing between Iines in your document (or within seleeted paragraphs)" You
can also add extra space bet',veen paragraphs. as follorvs :
n Right-click inside the first paragraph and choose Para,uraph frorn the shortcuf menu.
D Choose the Indent and Spacing tab as sho'"vn in Fig' 9'32'
both).
D Enter a new vaiue in the Before or After scroil box, (You'Il generally use one or the other, not
D ClickOK.
This is tzy superior to using the old-fashioned technique of pressing Enter twice at the end of each
paragraph. First, you have more precise control. If you only want to add a half-line of space between each
paragraph, it's easy to do so. Second, it's
easier to change the spacing between
paragraphs. If your docurnent is running
slightly long and you decide you want to
cut the space after paragraph from 8 points
to 6, select the entire docume::t, display the
Indents and Spacing tab, enter the new
setting and click OK.
9.10.6 Line and Page Breaks

Each par4graph may also be formatted to
control the way Word breaks pages. The
Paragraph dialog box's I-,ine and Page
Breaks tab as shown in Fig. 9.31, holds these
settings :
tr Widow/Orphan Controi, when

checked, keePs Word from
printing widow (the last line of a
paragraph al1 bY itself at the toP
of a new page) and orPhans (the
first line of a paragraph all by itself
at the bottom of a Page).
Fig.9.32 Setting line spacing in paragraph.
o Keep Lines together ensures that all the lines of the paragraph appear on a singie page.
page'
O Keep with Next forces Word to put this paragraph and the nexi paragraph on the same
O Page Break Before makes Word start the paragraph on a new page'
164
In almost all cases" you'll want to enforce v;iclow

and orphan control. trf you have a p:uagraph
in a report
aring on one page (say, a mission statement or
a
And headings should almost alw,a_ys be fon-natted
v head'
g.10.7 Tabs
you ever learned how to use a typewriter, -vou
trf
know what tabs are - stopping points along a horizontal
oftext that you can use to align rext or nunrbers.
line
'rabs are basically
for aligrung yow paragraph,s. In this secrion, you'It
find five types of tah setting you cail
use in your paragraphs in a word documint,
iaentiri"a tn" *oy tir"y tlr" text: left, center, right, decimal
and Bar' In each case' the tab settingdoes nothing -,y "rign
until you type a tab character and then r).pe some more text.
The tab atrignment determines vi,hat direction theiext
foliorving the tab wiil go.
The five types of tabs userl in Elord 200C.
fI Left Tabs. After you enter a left tab, additionai text begins
at rh.e tab stop and continues to its right.
tr Right rabs' After you entet a right tab, additional text
begins at the rab srop ard continues ro its left.
The more text you enter, the close to the left
margin the t;t moves.
il center'rabs' Alter yeu entgr a certer tab. addirional
text moves to the ieft and right, remaining
centered on [he location where the tab stcp
appears.
n Decirnal rabs' After i'ou entel a clecirnal tab, rows
of numbers that you enter all aligr on the clecimal
point, regardless of how many i.teger and decimai
places they .o*uir.
E Ear Tatrs' v-/ith these auspiciousiy namett tabs, you
have a quick anrl easy way to draw a
extending thr-ough as rnauy horizontal lines line
of text as you want 'ertical
r Ilds is {r{t aligrmd Xa&,

+
I Tkis is xri(t.Ile rlkn*il tab.
&ight align* d {55d AgSffi

l{
6$ 3d5tr.S$&sffie
*
Ea*i:xa! i+h 4.tSg
$55"{{
'34s{1}swl
T*fu is a b*r tah-
Tieis is r bar tah -
Fig.9.33 Displays samplcs of all five types of tabs.

Vy'ord
tab stop at every 0
ruler. (you these tabs in the
key in a blank doc insertion point
0.5" to the e
may need tabs in
can create these' If ,o, yo,
D Using the ruler, which is typically the quickest way ro get the job done.
tr The Tabs dialog box, which offeis more precision-andlives y'ou u.r.r,
to advanced features such as tab leaders and
bar tabs.
9.10.8 Creating Tabs with the Tahs Dialog Box
You can also set tabs from the Tabs dialog box (refer Fig. 9.35). To view this
dialog box, choose Format ) Tabs as shown in Fig. 9.34.
You will see a tab dialog box as shown in Fig. 9.35. Or, if you,re already
working with paragraph formatting, you can click the Tabs button at the bottom
left of the Paragraph dialog box as shown in Fig. 9.27. or doubre-click any tab
you've aiready set on the ruler'.
tr Enter the location where you rvant the tab to appear in the Tab Stop Position text box.
J In the Alignment area, choose the type of tab you want: Left, Center, Rrght, Decimal or Bar.
tr If you want to use a tab leader, select it from the Leader area. You can choose a dot leader. a dash
leader or a solid line leader.
O CLickSet.
A R.epeat steps 1-4 for any additional tabs you wish to set.
tr ClickOK.
Changing Default Tab Stops
As you may recall, Word provides default stops every 0.5" and uses tab stops to determine how far to indent
text when you click the Increase Incient/Decrease Indent buttons on the Formatting tooibar {.or use the equivalent
keyboard shortcuts).
Ycr'.r rnight want to chiinge the default tab stop locations. For example, your document's design might call
for inderrts anci tabs at0.75" increments. To change the ciefault tab stops. choose Format F Tabs as shown in
Fig. 9.33, enter a new value in the Default Tab Stops scroil box, and click OK.
Removing Tabs
You rnay at some point want to remove a tab 1,ou have created manually. To clear all the tab settings in a specific
pat of your document (or in the entire rfticument), select the text or the entire document, choose Format >>
Tabs as shown in Fig. 9.33, then chr:ose Clear All and click OK.
To cleal a specitic tab setting seiect all the paragraphs that contain the tab setting that you want to clear
and drag the tab setting beneath the ruler, so it disappears.
Unfortunately, Word doesn't provide an easy way to know where a tab setting begins and ends in your
doeument, As a result, you may tind eliminating tab settings to be a trial-and-enor process, Here are some tips
that help a lirtlc :
166 Saraswati Inf ormatics Practices (Xl)
o lfall the text you'\'e selected contains the tab setting, the tab setling appears in solid black on your
rrrler.
tr Ifsome ofthe text you've selected contains the tab setting, the tab setting appears in gray on your
ruler. Dragging the tab setting offthe ruler deletes it fol those paragraphs you've selected.
o Ifyou've selected a large number ofparagraphs that starts before you applied the tab setting and end
afterthe tab setting is no longer present, you don't see the tab setting on your ruler evenihough it
is still present in some of the paragraphs you've selected.
Solved Exercises
Ql. l-low will you select the few characters in the docurnents ?
Ans' To select a ferv characters click and drag the cursor across the characters you want to select. you'll notice
that if you drag the cursor across rrore that a couple of words, Word staft to select entire words at a time.
Q2. How will you select the rvhole document ?
Ans. To select the entire document from the edit menu choose the option Select All.
Q3. What is clipboard ?
Ans. Wold has a temporary storage area, called the Clipboard that can be shared alnong all your Windows
applications. When you want to move a paft oftext or graphics ftom one program to another or from one
place in a document to another, you usc the Clipboard. When you cut or copy a selection, it is moved
to
the Clipboard, and it can then be put into another place by pasting.
Q4. What is AutoCorrect ?
Ans. Everybody develops different patterns in his typing. Generally, those patterns include some common
errors. The AutoCorrect fbature allorvs yoLr to tell Word to watch your typing and correct your own
common errors as ),ou type.
Q5. What do you mean by paragraph marks in MS-WORD ?
Ans. 81' dcfault, Word for Windows shows only the text and pictures that will come out of paper when you
print. Special characters such as spaces, tabs and paragraph marks appear as white space in the printed
doculrent. These non-printing characters (so called because they do not appear on pup.. when you
print the document) are often useful to see. This is particularly true when you are working with heavily
formatted documents and need to keep track ofyour tabs, spaces, blank lines, and so on.
Q6. How can you Undo y,our last change ?
Ans. The following steps are used to do Undo your last change :
(a) F'rorn the Edit mentt, choose Undo. The menu shows what your lasi action rvas (for example, Undo
Italic). Or
(b)
Click the Undo button on the Standard loolbar, Or
(c)
Press Ctrl-2.
Q7. FIow can you find special characters in MS-WORD ?
Ans. The following steps are used to find special characters in MS-WORD :
(a) Open the Find dialog box. (Choose Find from the Edit menu)
(6) ClicktheSpecial buttontoseethelistofunusual charactersyoucansearchfor.
(c) Clich the ilfonration you want to find.
Q8. \4t'ite dowu the steps to add a comrnon misspelling of your own to AutoCorrect in MS-WORD.
Ans.(a) From the Tools menu, choose AutoCorrect.
(b) ln the lteplace box, type the rnisspclling that you commonly make. In our example, this would be
standard.
(c) In the With box, type the correct spelling ofthe word. In our exarnple, this would be standard.
(d) ClickttreAddbr"rltou. Sinrilarly,ifyoudon'twanttouseoneoftheiteursinthelist,youcanselectit
ancl click Delete to remove the itern liom the list.
(e) ClickOK.
Q9. Why formaning is necessary ?

Ans. Formatting is necessary to improve the readability and presentation of the documents.
Q10. How will you apply the fonts ?
Ans, To apply fonts we have to follow the following steps :
(a) Select the text you want to change or click where you want to begin typing.
(b) From the Format Menu, choose Font.
Qll. How will you change the color of a text ?
Ans. To change the color of a particular text we have to do the following :
(a) Select the text you want tc change or click where you want to begin typing.
(b) From the Format menu, Choose Font.
(c) From the Color [ist, select a color and click OK.
Ql2. What is meant by formatting a document ?
Ans. The general arrangement of text is called formatting. Formatting provides documents a neat
and more legible outlook. It makes a document as good as it needs to be presentable.
Q13. What do you mean by the term lnsertion pointer in MS-WORD ?
Ans. The blinking cursor of the docunrent is called the insertion point in MS-WORD. The text gets generated
at the position where the insertion pointer is located.
Ql4. How will you indent the entire paragraph ?
Ans. To Indent an entire paragraph flom a dialog box
(a) Click in the paragraph that you want to apply formatting to.
(6) Choose Paragraph liorn the format menu and click the Indents and spacing tab.
(c) ln the Left box, speci! how far to indent the paragraph frorn the left.
(d) In the Right box, specifi how far to indent the right side of the paragraph and click OK.
Ql5. What do you mean by paragraph alignment ?
Ans. Paragraph alignment determines how text is positioned between the left and right indents.
Word provides four types of paragraph alignment.
Ql 6. Defi ne Indentation.
Ans. The distance between the page margins and the text boundaries is called indent, and the process of
providing it is called indentation.
Ql7. What is paragraph aligning ? Narne the types.
Ans. Paragraph alignment determines how text is positioned between the left and right indents.
Word prbvides four types of paragraph alignment. The four paragraph alignment types are :
(a) Left-aligned
(b) Centered
(c) Right-aligned
(d) Justified.
Ql8. How can you add spaces before or after a paragraph ?
Ans. The foliowing steps are used to add spaces before or after a paragraph :
(a) Click in the paragraph you want to format.
(6) Choose Paragraph frorn the Fonnat menu and click the lndents and Spacing.
(c) In the Before and After boxes, specifl the spacing and click OK'
Q19. What do you mean by preventing Widows and Orphans ?
Ans. Widows and orphans, as the names suggest, occur when a single line of a paragraph is left alone at the
bottom of a page (a widow) or at the top of a page (an orphan).
Q20. What is ruler ?
Ans. A ruler is simply a straight line, usually above or below a paragraph. Rulers help to set off headings or
introductory lines from the rest of the text and can also add an elegant effect that makes you look like a
professional.
Saraswati lnfornratics practices (Xl
Review Suestlons
l' w'rite thc main characteristic of copying and moving of text in word.
2' Is there any use of cripboard for copy, cut. and purt" z If yes, justifl your answer.
3' write the methods that how run yo, reverse your rast in worc.
4' What do you mean by fcnt formatting and character formattr:ng
"tranges
? W'rite the steps to change the font and
font size to a selected paragraph.
5' write the difference between setting text effects and animating te><t.
6' write the methods-to align the paragraphs in worrj. what aie the
t-vpes of indenting text available ?
Explain rvith example.
7. What is the use oi Drop Caps and where it generally uses ?
8. What to you mean by iab setting in .$y'ord ? Explain with irs q,pes.
9' what do you inean by format painter? How does it affect to i/riord
text ?
10. Do the follorving :
(a) click start >> programs >> I\,ricrosoft office >> ivlicrosoft word.
(6) Identifo the tulenu bar and Slandard toolbar
(") Type the following lines :
Microsoflt was allovYed to add new features to its windows
scftware so long as it also released a
version that lacked such features.
(@ In the above line, take the mouse pointer just after the
word Microsoft and insert a word ;
Corpcration
(e) Take the pointer before windows and press Der key. see
what happens ?
f) Take the pointer to the end ofthe second line and put a dot (.) and press Enter.
ft') Enter the following new re\r at the end of last line.
Sotne codes of Windows operating system should
also be the same in current edition.
(i) Click on File menu and Save option.
(/) In the Save As windows Fire ,ame box, enter the fire name as : MicRo
A Press Save button.
(k) See the Microsoft Word's title bar.
(D Click on File menu and Exi
ll. Do the following :
(a) click"starr >> prog'ams >> Micr.soft ofifice >> Ir{icrosoft
v/ord.
(5) Open the lrile l,flCRO cr"eated in the above question.
(c) Iusen the follorving text in tLre beginning of the
ciocument.
This is the inkoduction about Microsoft coparation.
Microsoft Coparation is the uSA based comaplry.
($ Fin1t the word Coparation.
(e) Replace the worC Coparation vvith Corporation.
f) Undo the previous operation.
(g) Redo the operation again.
(/) Click the Select All option to complete rhe whole text.
(i) Select the first line of the document.
t) lut the third line of the document and paste at the end.
(E) t-tndo the last operation.
l2' open MS-woRD and write_a letter to your principal for
five days leave and do the following as given
(a) In the lefier, make Boldface to firsifour jines. :
(b) Increase the point size of first four Iines to i4.

(c) Insert a line after the first four lines as :
Sub I Leave Application.
(a) Make BolJfacs and Underline the Subject,
(e) The last three lines of your lener will be Bold and Italic.
A Change the color of the The Principal.
(g) Animate the text Yours Obediently.
(/r) Save the Letter with the name of "LEAVE".
(,) ExitfromMS-WORD.
i!E i= i!= rF;.t. . a. .t

5.
I}e Fnnnipal
ABC Fublic Srhool.
l,lD E l(e,+r Drlhi.
Rreperted $ir,
Thrs is to requ*st 1.4* tkat i harre so6e culhyal functiorr irt my home So i vrill no!
he able to atteld rny clasrer from ?flfig|?fi I tl 34/09/200I
Xtrerefore I requ;styou to give rre leave fu tJ:e above merrtiorred days ;urd oblige
1'ouls Cbediently.
Rajat I{apo+r
UIAB5 - V
Ser A
Open Microsoft Word and type the following as given :
l. Hindi
2. English
3. Mathematics
4. Social Study
5. Geography
6. Science
Select above 6 points and click Bullets button from standard toolbar. Also try to increase the indent using
the standard toolbar button.
(a) Open a new word docurnent.
(b) Type the following :
MAPS
A map is a representation of the earth's surface or part of it on a float surfacp_according to a scale. It has
some advantages and disadvantages as comapared to a globe. Maps cannot be as accurate as globes.
Globe is a small model of the earth.
Both are round in shape, so it is quiie easy to show the shapes and sizes ofthe continents and oceans on
the globe quite accurately.
By
Name : Richa Singh
xlA
(c) Center align the heading 'MAPS'. 'u
(d) Justify the whole text. s-
(e) Right Justifl the Name and class.
(fi Indent the first line ofthe paragraph. \
(g) Use the Ruler to indent from left and right.
(ft) Increase the line spacing as double.
(,) Add a drop cap in the begining of the paragraph.
A Use paragraph style and apply style of your choice.
(t) Use page setup to set the top margin and bottom margin as 2". :
(l) Add the page number in the left corner of the document.
I
Chapter 10
Using Grommqr ond SPell Check
10.'! lntroduction
grammar problems in your
Wor.d's spelling and grammar checkers help you to identify potential spelling and
documenis. They can be set to check text automatically as you type or when you have
finished typing'
dictionary, which
The spelling checker compares the words in a document to the words in its main spelling
custom dictionaries
includes over 100,000 words. If it cannot finda match for a word, it then checks the active
flags the word as unknown so you can
- the dictionary files that you create. If word still cannot find a match, it
act on it.
in the document
The grammar checker works in much the same way. It compares the structure of sentences
with a
with predetermined rules fcr a specific writing style. When it finrJs a sentence or sentence fragment
are highly
potential problem, it identifies it for you so you can act on it. Both the spelling and grammar checkers
customizable so they work the way you want them to.
word. For example, if

Note. The spelling checker cannot identify a misspelled word if it correctly spells another
not find the error. The grammar checker,
you type from when you meant to type form, the spelling checker would
on the other hand, might find this particular error, depending on its usage.
10.2 Automatic Spelling and Grammar Checking

the text to
By default, when you open a file in Word 2000, Word's new automatic language feature checks
in. runs a spell and grammar check on all sectjons that are
determine which language you are writing Then
proofing tools. Since you probably write most documents in your default
written in language fbr which it has
language, Word typically proofs your entire document'
-
word flags all possible errors with wavy underline marks, as shown in Fig. 10'1.
Therefore. i rtquest yoq please allow me to join thr marriage Y1$ II

pflreats, And granttne the leave for above suil days
Thanktng ycu
Yrrurs surrerely.
Sumit Chopra
Hsll No 3$
utass - 'J$ JL
error'
Fig. 10.1 Right ctick feature in word document with spelling and Grammar
ng eIT shortcut menu appears'
ut the ices that dePend on the
word Your choices include :
(171)
172
o rgnore AII' Tells word to ignore

ali occun'ences of the word in
removes the wavy underline the document. Choosing this option
from the words throughout the
document
dictioniv. rr,*,u"v underrine
fil;1tffJ[.tfi""h"-H-Ti"*t*
: Autocorrect" disappears and the word
L-' Enables you to create olorrect eotry for the word usirg
speliings' Choose the appropriate 1.Au
word fiom tt . .rum.ru.'ttr"e
one of the suggested
wora is repraced in the document
y rep you type and
tr in the
you nguage ofthe
E Spel
s
ry'
which offers m
If word shows a sreen wavy underline irdicating a possible grammar elror, right-click
p'opo" to see the grarnmar
:[X.'Jiff:+"Hfl;:: ';;i';',;;';own in Fig n'2;; ;;;.
documenr screen or make generar
I Instruct Word to Ignore rhe sentence

,n:,O.ammar checker to see
H 3fT
tr choose About This st'ttnt"'ioiJ.
more options
-".#"r*ation about trre porenrial error word
has flagged.
fir-st week nf Augurst

hon urfig_qp"gi $n,
e allow rne to jrrin &e rnarriage fifliction with my

rfuov* said,*ays,
Fig. 10.2 Word window with

Grammar shortcut menu.
[ffiH::,
word or sentence again as -.:u bv simpry erJiting the text.
vou move yo* inr*ioiffi;;'#:ff'#:',1;,iJHlf; fJ} word
"#;:fffi,-Y:t""::.i:::*:T1:1,
or the sentence now uses coilect
grammar, the corresponding
checks rhe
UH*i:.J:.li;
wavy underline disappears.
't0"2'1 Enabrin!
or Disabling Autonnatic spe*ing
and Grammar ehecking
If you pref'er to use automatic spell checking
or automatic grammar checking,
yoll rvant' you can easily turn as
off or o, or.-o. uotn of them. ir;r.f..+-*;-,,.,v.--,i ,,-,:*,;:.,
El:,:*":,",:",i*{';:i"'ffi;il,iiE.iX.i,n".appearS,clickthe
spelling and Gramrnar tab to '"r 4ppcars, crrcK the
n ^^^Lr^ -
'l-^ -
dispraf i";;;;r. -.:*t: ,: .
I
i
frJffii:fl::?Hi;ilil;":d;:;'illfin.cn".rspe,ringas
or,
:
Fig. 10"3 Tools Options to

tr
E ro Si:1ll#,i,ll,il*i*"1:*:iii?
ff enable auromatie g**,, checkin!, ::*
r,, "rr'.n" ^lheck
spering as ),ou tvpe check box
or, "^*.-.T.'.Trl-iHf,rl::i#:'"1""".1?:::
[l To ctisable autoruati c grammar checking
turu off the check grammar
m ClickoK. as yor-r check box.
Using Grammar and Spell Gheck f73
By default, Word is set L1p to

automatically check spelling, but not
grarnmar as you type. We explain, how to
set other spellings and grammar
preferences later in this chapter.
10.2.2 Checking Spelling through

the Spelling and Grammar dialog
box
Word provides a powerful spelling and
gramma. checking dialog box that gives you
even mcre options for fixing your current
document and irnproving the way you
check future docurnents. To access it. click
Spelling and Grammar on the Standard
toolbar or press F7 or choose Tools F
Spelling and Crammar nrenu option as
shown in Fig. 10.5.
Fig. 10.4 Options dialog box with Spelling & Gramrnar tatr.
fie?:j*ct ; L*arre Applicatiott,
Fig. 10.5 Spelling and grammar :-t:

option in Tools menu.
A spelling and grammar dialog

box will appear as shorvn
inFig.10.6. tat
Fig. 10.6 Spellingand Grammar dialogbox.
The sentence containing the potential problem appears in the Not in Dictionary scroll box; the incorrect
word appears in red. You now have several options :
D If one of the words shown in the Suggestions list incorrect, click Change; Word changes the spelling
to match that suggestion.
tr If you want Word to change the spelling wherever it appears in the document, click Change All.
D lf you want Word to add the correction to its AutoCorrect database. so Word can fix the error as soon
as you make it llom now on, click AutoCorrect.
D If the word is spelled correctly and you want Word to add it to the custom dictionary (so the word will
never be flagged as wrong again), click Add.
O If Word hasn't made any acceptable suggestions, but you know how to fix the error manually, edit the
word in the Not in Dictionary scroll box, and click Change (or Change Alt or AutoCorect).
1 0.2.3 Spelling Checking Selected Text
Word enables you to check your entire document or any paft of it, including just a single word. [f you don't
want to check your entire docurnent, select only the text you want to check - even if it's just a single word.
You can als6 tell Word to never proof a portion of your document. To do so, select the text you don't want
proofed. Next, choose Tools ) Language, Set Language. The Language diatog box opens. Check the Do Not
Check Spelling or Grammar check box and click OK.
10.2.4 Reproofing a Document you've Already Checked

Ifyou proof a document a second time, Word doesn't recheck the spelling of words (or the syntax of sentences)
you already proofed. If you want Word to catch previously caught errors, reopen the Spetling and Grammar
Options dialog box (either choose Tools ) Options and clickthe Spelling and Grammar tab or click the Options
button inside the Spelling and Grammar dialog box) and click the Recheck Document button. Word asks you to
confirm that you want to recheck text you've already proofed; choose yes.
1 0.2.5 Controlling Spelling Settings
The Spelling and Grammar tab ofthe Options dialog box (refer Fig. 10.4) gives you extensive control over how
you interact with Word's spell checker. You can display this dialog box by clicking the Option button in the
Spelling and Grammar dialog box or by choosing Tools ) Options and clicking the Spelling and Grammar tab.
Word offers you several additional controls :
D Always Suggest Corrections. Word's spelling suggestions are often inaccurate in highly technical
documents or documents that contain a lot of arcane jargon. For such documents, to save time, you
might want to disable Word's suggested spellings feature.
O Suggest from Main Dictionary Only. By default, Word looks in all open dictionaries to make
suggestiops about spelling changes. This can take tirne. It also means that Word may recognize as
coffect certain words that are actually incorrect when read in context. lf you're sure your current
document won't benefit fiom words you added to your custom dictionaries, check this box.
tl lgnore Words in UPPERCASE. No spell checker understands all acronyms. Because most acronyms
are all caps, you can tell Word not to flag words that are all caps. (This feature is turned on by default).
O Ignore Words with Numbers. Some product names combine words and numbers.
Suppose that you sell a 486DX2 computer, a24XCD player. Word might flag each of these as
incorrect - a real problem if you're proofing a long price list. Therefore, by default, Word ignores
word/number combinations.
O lgnore Internet and File Addresses. Until recently, most spell checkers have incorrectly flagged
Internet ltle addresses such as the Web address www.yahoo.com or the filename
c:\windows\config.sys. If you leave this check box checked, Word doesn't spell check addresses
such as these.
10.3 Using the Grammar Command

Word's grammar checker, like all contemporary grammar checkers, follows rules that identifl potential writing
problems. Words' gralnmar checker has gradually been refined; however, it still cannot "understand" your
documents, so it's best to have modest expectations.
As you learned earlier in this chapter, Word flags potential grammar problems as you work, displaying
175
Using Grammar and Spell Chqck
them with a green wavy underline. To get Word's suggestions, right-click anywhere
in the underlined text'
description of what it thinks is wrong. (refer Fig' 10'7)'
Word displays either potential solutions or a general
If you want to take a closer look at your document's grammar, choose Tools ) Spelling and Grammar or
and Grammar dialog box opens, with the questionable
right click the Grammar tab in shortcut menu. The Spelling
phrase displayed in green.
Word displays possible improvements
inthe Suggestions scroll box. The category
of p:oblem it has identified appears above
Xl A
the ftagged text. Often, none of Word's a sfirdert nl rlass
suggestions are ideal; You call then edit the

text manuailY until the green wavY
underlines disappear.
It's also possible that you won't agree
there's problem at all. To tell Word to ignore
the sentence, click Ignore' To tell Word never
to flag problem for the same reason it flagged
this one, click Ignore Rule. To leave the
sentence alone without making anY
decisions, click Next Sentence.
Fig. 10.7 Grammar dialog box.
10.3.1 To Check Grammar as You TYPe

tr Make sure that the automatic grarnmar checking feature has been enabled.
beneath each questionable
tr As you enter text into the document, a green wavy underline appears
word, phrase or sentence.
3 Right-click on a flagged problem. The grammar shortcut fapitslization
menu appeius as in Fig. 10.2. (see Fig' 10'8) CaFitaii?e the firEt word of a Eerrtenta '
Choose the apProPriate oPtions : . lnsread of : '& usuallY srtows in liiovent'er'

. Considerl it usuaiiy snow: in Novernber'
D Suggested corrections appear at the top of the shortcut to
r In$teid oi: dues ths buokbelonq to yotr Dr
-*,r. Chooting one of these corrections changes the the llbrarv?

r Consider: Ooes thls bookbeloog to )'ou or to
text and removes the wavy underline'
the libraryT
tr Ignore. Tells Word to ignore the problem' Choosing this
option removes the wavy underline'
tr Grammar. Opens the Grammar dialog box as shown in
Fig. 10
tr About n about the
grammar rule that causes the sentence to be flagged'
Fig. 10.8 Suggestion after the click of
Aboutthis Sentence'
10.3.2 Choosing which Writing Style to Apply

aside from whether to use it at all - is which writing
The easiest decision you can make grammar checking -
ith the type of documents you create, choose Tools
Writing Style drop-down listbox, choose Standard'
.
'176
10.3.3 Getting and Explanation for a Grammar
Rule
-S.t.rs.
. i,"r .
t! -t'
Coffmo raquirrd hefce liji litt ftEft:

Ftrnctutstio$ r*qried r,rth qr:Dtau
spaces required b€tween strtan.ps;
Gran roall
steps :
F Capltatiaetion
D In the Writing Sryle drop_down box,

|7
17
cotr,ronly rmfused mrds
n d{ornpourdsords
choose the writing style you want to edit. liz r.t
Notice that the Custom writing style l7 Nrc"tion
highlighrs every porential problem excepr

l- uurnEers
P Fassive s*rlerces
the use of first person language. l-
Fig. 10.9 Grammar Settings dialog box.

tr Check the boxes corresponding to rules you
want
the grammar checker to enforce, clear the
boxes
tr When you're finished, click OK.

10.4 Using Word Count
Choose Tools ) Word Count. Word reads your document

and displays the Word Count dialog box
as ,ho*n in Fig.
10.10.
Fig. 10.10 Word Count dialog box.
Solved Exercises
sent ?
I Menu.
anual spell checking ?
works is
to check
Standard
e spelling check. Click a button to tell
the spell checker
eAll?
ust this one.
u exit Word.
Using Grammar and Spell Check 177
Q4. What is the difference between change and change all ?

Ans. Change the word to what you've typed or selected from the list of suggestions. Change All makes this
change automatically, without prompting, whenever this misspelling occurs in this document.
Q5. How will you check the grammatical error in the document ?
,A,ns. To check the grammar and style of a document :
(a) Press Ctrl+Home to move the insertion point to the top of the document; to check portion of a
document, select the text that you wish to check.
(b) Choose Tools, Grammar to open the Grammar dialog box and begin the grammar check.
Q6. How can you correct a misspelling word automatically in MS-WORD using spell checker ?
Ans. (a) Click the right mouse button on the Word you wish to correct that has been underlined with the rvavy
red line. This displays a menu, at the top of which is a list of suggested spellings (if any) for the
offending word. Below the list of suggested words are a few menu options :
lgnore All, Add, and Spelling. The ignore All and Add options are also available through the manual
spell-checker; both options are discussed in the list of options following the discussion of manual
spell-checking. The Spelling option opens the spelling dialog box, which is also displayed when you
run the manual spell-checker.
(6) Choose the correct spelling ftom the menu, or choose one of the menu options.
Q7. What is Thesaurus in MS-WORD ?
Ans. The thesaurus provides both synonyms (words with similar meanings) and antonyms (words with opposite
meanings). Having a powerful and lightning-fast electronic thesaurus at your fingerlips can greatly
enhance the quality of the writing in your documents.
Q8. What do you mean by spell checking a document in MS-WORD ? How is it actually done ?
Ans. Spell checking means applying the spell check features of the word processor in a document. lt helps in
producing error free documents. Spell check is a word processor like MS-WORD is actually done with the
help of available dictionaries.
Review Questions
1. How can automatic spelling and gramrnar checking be helpful in Word document ? Explain.
2. Write down the controlling spelling settings in Word.
3. What is a "Style Sheet" in Word ? Discuss its applications.
4. How do lou use Thesaurus in Word ?
(a) Create a new word document.

(6) Type the following :
A word proceor is a sotware packge which hlps you to entr text on a compoter from the keybosrd. We
mainly use wrd procesing for leter typing, prparing mailing lists, creting documnts and reports, either
at office or at home. Word processing soltware has refored the way we crete text-based docuents.
Rather thn committing each chracters to paer as you type - as you would do with a tyewriter - word
procesing enables you to entr documnts on scren, edit and format them as you work and save them
for futre referece or revision. Thus, documents created on a word processor can be made accurate,
given beter looks, and prepared and printed in a very litle time.
(c) Use the spelling feature to correct the mistakes in the above typed material.
(d) Find the synonyms of the word'processing'.
(e) Use the thesaurus to find the more accurate word for the 'sotware'.
0) Create a Auto text entry for 'Word Processing'.
G) Add the word sotware in the autocorrect to make it software.
(fi) Appty autoformat to your document.
(,) Count the number of words in your document.
Chapter 11
Mqil Merge qnd Word Wizord
11.1 lntroduction
Mail merge is the process of creating special type of documents like merged letters, mailing addresses. labels,
envelopes, e/c. These documents have unique information with standard text to create a set of unique documents
- typically, one for every recipient. Word's mail merge feature gives you the power to customize your message
for.lust a few people - or for thousands at the same time. This feature merges fields or categories of database
information with static text to produce merged documents.
Mail merge uses two special kinds of document :
O Main Document. Contains the information that remains the same for each version of the merged
document. In a form letter, for example, the main document would contain the text that appears in
every letter.
fI Data Source Document. Contains the information that changes for each version of merged document.
In a form lettel the data source would contain the names and addresses of the people to receive the
letter. For example, consider a letter. When the postman drops a letter, he just looks the address and
then searches the location to deliver the letter. The address may contain name, address, State, pin-
code, etc., as given below :
Rahul Sharma B-101/LodhiRoad NewDelhi 1 10002

VipulVerma Pkt-Al, C-90, Vikash Puri NewDelhi I 10045
S-l/320, Karol NewDelhi l 10002
From the above table, Name, Address, State and Pin-code are considered as a field; and the complete
information of a perion (a row) is called a record. All the records in the above table are called a source file or data
source document.
The results of a mail merge can be sent directly to the printer or saved as a separate file on disk.
11.2 Basic Concepts of Merging Documents

If you wish to send call letters for the interview to 30 persons, then what will you do ? For this you have to type
same letter for every individual. This is a tedious task for you. While you are using MS-Word, you can make
thisjob easier by using mail merge. To mail merge, we will use two files. The first corrrains the complete text of
the letter except the name and address of the person. This file is called main document or n,aster document.
Another file is used to store the name and address of the person to whom the letter is to be sent. This file is
called the datafile or the data source.
Mail merge uses the main document and picks up the first address from the data file and print the first leffer.
Then it picks up the next address from the data file to print the second letter and so on. Now, your letter is ready
for every person whom the letter is to be sent.
(178)
11.3 Create a Master Document
your first step in preparing a mail merge is to create your main document - the document that contains any
which kind of
boilerplate teit that shoulJ appear in all your merged documents, as well as instructions about
information should be merged into them. A main document has tvro components :
that remains
tr Static Text that does not change. In a form letter, for example, static text is the information
the same for each individual who will get the letter. For example, the contents of lettet, etc.
J Mail merge flrelds. These are the variable names generally given to name, address, telephone nurrrber,
should be
etc. whichcan be changed during mail merge. This indicates what data source information
the static text Dear might be
merged into the document and where it should go. In a form letter,
FirstName field are merged
followed by the field <<First Name>>. When merged, the contents of the
into the document after the word Dear to result irt Dear Sidharth, Dear Aakriti, etc.
11.4 To Create a Main Document

D Open a document on which you want to base the main document as sholvn
in Fig. 11.1.
Dear l\{rs.l$$9.
l rraould orr th€ sehchon of your w*rd

like to eaoglatr;late you
ABS Public School, Shaliraar p.+8b" $9g Delhi' llelSha has been
irr
allotted for srurmmirrg cornpetitiorr.
I hope that your war,J erterirg th* portal +f ihe schoot tarill lnave at as a
respc,tisibie r;itizento sarrre thr tratiol atld huurauity'
Thankrng You,
Principel
ABS Publie School
Fig. 11.1 A main document for mail merge'

Or,
D Create a new document.
choose Tools )> Mail Merge as shown in Fig. I 1.2 to display the Mail Merge
Helper'
tr
Mail Merge Helper dialog box as shown in Fig' 1 1 '3 '
tr In the Main Document section of the
&lail ld+rg+ ru$ppf1;*,
i .
& .,i,
:
L4rtguffi :)
ta:-,
1)
Fig. 11.2 Mail merge option in

'\ ql- i toolsmenu.
l,
Fig 11.3 The mail merge helper dialog box.

From the above Fig. 11.3, click create, a list of options appears, as shown
in Fig. 11.3.
D Choose the type of main document you want to create :
From Letters, Mailing Labels, Envelopes or Catalog.
D You've now asked whether you want to build your main document from the
document already
displayed in your active window or whether you want to create a new one
as shown in Fig. 11.4.
Fig. 11.4 The dialog box with options for Active Window or New Main Document.
O If you have already opened the docurnentyou want to use as your main document, click Active
Window; otherwise click New Main Document. After you make your choice, Word
adds a new
button to the Mail Merge Helper : the Edit button.
tr If you are creating a form letter, you can choose the document's name from the Edit rnenu within
the Mail Merge Helper dialog box to add or edit the main document's static
rext.
If you have just created a form letter or a catalog, Word gives you two choices what to
do nert. you can edit
your main document to include the boilerplate text, graphics or other
elements you want to include in it. Or you
can work on creating or choosing your data source.
11.5 Working with Data Source

You need to create or select a data source hle to accompany your main document. your
data soutce must
contain the information that changes in each of your merged documents.
Mail Merge and Word \Itlizard 181
A data sourcs document has two components :
tr Fields. Fields are categories of information. In a form letter, for example, LastName and Cit;' might be
trvo fields. Each fieid has a unique name, which identifies it in both the main document and data
source document.
tr Records. Records are collections of information for individual items. In a form letter, the Sidharth
record would include all fields for Sidharth - his name, address, city, state and postal code"
11.5 1 To Create a Data Ssurce
Word's Mail Merge Helper can help you wdk
through the process of creating a data source in
Word. Tc create a data source in Word :
D Create a main document as instructed
earlier in this unit. Make it the active
document window.
tr Choose Create Data Source from the
Get Data menu to display the Create
I)ata Source dialog box as shown in
Fig. 1l.5. It lists commonly used fields
names for form letters, mailing labels
and envelopes.
Fig. 11.5 Create data source dialog box.
D Edit the Field names in header row list to include only the field names that you want in your data
source document, in the order that you want them to appear.
D To remove a field name from the list, click to select it, then click the Remove Field Name button.
tr To add a field narne, enter it in the Field name text box, then click the Adri Field Name button,
tr To move a field name up or down in the list, click to select it, then click one of the Move buttons
to the right of the list.
3 When you have finished selecting fields, click OK.
J A Save As dialog box appears. Use it to name and save the data source file.
Note. It's good idea to save the data source file in the same folder in which you have saved or will save the main
docurnent. This makes it easy to find the data source document when merging the main document.
0 A dialog box in Fig. below appears next as shown in Fig. 11.6.
<t
"\
Edll Mairr Dotun:ent
Fig. 11.6 Dialog box with Edit Data option.

tr Click the Edit Main Document button to add merge fields to the main document.
tr Click the Edit Data Source button to add records to the data source document.
tr AfterclickingonEditDataSourcebuttonaDataFormwirdowopensasshowninFig. ll.7,enter
your recorcls in that window. After inserting all tl,e records click on OK.
11.6 Attaching an Existing Data Source
,\ttaching the data source [o the main document identifies the data source as the one to be used for the variable
information when the two documents are merged. N{ake sure that the main document is open when you attach
ilie rlata source.
182
ryatilnformaticg
iletx Scm*l
3,i300, G-4, 5e{t!1rt5, Rohini
11'TDataFormdialogbox'
11.6.1 To rnseft a Merge Fierd
tr Display the main document. If you have been viewing the data source document, click the Mail
Merge main document button. If necessary, reopen the main document.
o Click to place the insertion point where you want a merge field to appear.
D Click the Insert Merge Field button on the Mail Merge toolbar as shown in Fig. 11.8. Word
displays the merge fields available to your main document. These are the same merge fields that
appear in the data source or heading source document you have chosen.
' : ,\ ..: .J? )
FeS. i laqat Wqr#Fr*i
Fig. 11.8 Insert Merge Field button in mail merge tcolbar

O Choose the merge held you want to insert. Word places the merge field in your document at the
location of the iasertion point.
tr Format your merge field using any character formatting you want to apply to your merged text when
you run your merge.
D Repeat these steps tbr each merge field you need to place in your document.
O Save the main docunient.
Each merge field starts and end with chevron symbol : <<>>. You can't insert a merge field from the
keyboard : You have to use the Insert Merge Field button. Place each of your merge fields in the correct
location. Don't forget to include spaces between merge helds if they a'e separate words. And remember the
punctuation that needs to appear in the finished document. Fig. 11.9 shows the letter with attached merge
fields.
11.7 Get Ready to Merge

Now that you've edited your main document, set up your data source, and piace merge fields in your main
document, you're nearly ready to run your merge. If you're in the main document, click on the Mail Merge
button on the Mail Merge toolbar to display the Merge dialog box, as shown in Fig. 1l.10. (you can display the
same dialog box by displaying the Mail Merge Helper dialog box and clicking Merge in step 3.)
Mail Merge and Word Wizard 183
kfrs rtVftr <Pname:>

<Adilress*
<Cig+>
<Hr>
<Sectior'*:*
Iq,c,uld like to congr.atr.rlatr you or: the sebcii+rr *f your ward nSldarrren rn
d,BS Publie il,:hool, Shalimar P:eCif N-q1y Eelhi He/She ha:: bern allotted
lor s'wit"rrrning corrrg.etriiorr
i hope thai ycur ward errtering the portal oi the schoal wili leave at as a
respctrsrbk citizen tc serve thr narion atrd humanity-
!i:; '-'1, r. i': i,
'$r ,;
1' 5e€ I
Fig. 11.9 Letter with attached merge fields.
f EM bltr& h€ !fiqo data neB$ ale q'Fc}', . ;,
tur 4rr]. DFtrax t!r?e 14$ sEi.
Fig 11.10 Creating merge letter from Merge dialog box'

(to
D From here, you can make key decisions about how to run your merge, including where to merge
handle empty data fields'
a new document, your printer or email); which record to merge; and how to
11.8 To View Merged Data on Screen
Before you actually merge, you can preview sample-merged documents on screen by clicking the View
Merged
Data button on the Maii M".g" tootUar in the main document. The merge field names are replaced with the
contents of the first record in the data source as shown in Fig' I 1 ' 1 I '
184
DearLllr.s.rffi., S. K. Ra*at
B-3I3S0, S_4, SECTTIR*?5_?5, RSHII.fl
DBLHI
t1&085
D
te corr yorr r:n the s*iection *l v+ur wxd

ic Sch ha
irrrar p3.6.[, J,,I.5;vDelhi Ileltthe ,J
g Eotrr
I h+pa that your rararel enraring the portal af the scho(,I ruli leare
at a"q a
responsitrln citlrqn to serre the nation anrl htrrnanity.
d ,&-,.d'.a:
Fig. 11.11 Previewing merge document.
ly to the right of the View Merged Data button to change

the large merge, previewing a random sample can.save you
lots proceed further.
11.9 Wizard and Template
They also work well for people who
than showing you how to do things
ke stationery. [?ren you create a new document you
create a new document based on one or rhese remplates,

have a perfectly formatted documert with your customized
il[';f:::#:iliffi,ffi1tffi: J.iil I;;
information in it.
11.10 Using Wizard
A wizard, like an extra-fast administrative assistant, uses
an interview to find out what you need. A wizard asks
whai type of information to include in a document and offers
you stylistic options that you can preview before
you decide.
Note' In most wizards, if you just want to use the standard
options, you can click Finish to go straight to the
end' otherwise, you can follow step by step and go back
to ir"riom ootions if you change your mind"
11.10.1 Using Wizard to Create a !-etter
The key to making the word f'etter wiziud generate
decent-looking letters lies in understanding what it can
cannot do and how it interacts with the letter itselt. and
Mai! Merge and Word Wizard 185
o Choose File ) New

tr The New dialog box appears as shown in Fig. 1l.12, select the Letters & Faxes tab.
o Select the Letter wizard icon.
tr ClickOK.
r tr iJ ,,r.
li%o.e' :pilrhbclhns {'s i-iueexa** |
CBBlernFoi,Ery
F*x
fn'r€lcFe
Wiz€rd
Frofelsronal
FaX
(te;le ll*r,r
G Duti;,;eni i- trer;Ftr.1:i
Fig. 11.12 New dialog box with LetterS & Faxes tab.
o The Office Assistant appears on the screen as shown in Fig. 1 1 . I 3. If you Wekonre to the
want to create a letter with the help of Mail Merge feature, click the second Letter \Yiaard"
one, otherwise cLick on send one letter. * 5end LrfiB
!etter
5*nci iahiers
tr; o m"-.ilina
hsl
Fig. 11.13 Offlrce Assistant.
Fig. 11.14 Letter wizard with Letter Format tab.

tr The Letter wizard opens. You have 4

different steps to create your letter with
iattevfur.t:et e*lpl,*il*1'p I eitf,*r **o',ertu'| .xrr*or,f, |,',
the help of letter wizard.
I#gr$r(titrr *baat hle p*yswx y(qr are eefldlfiq q.b(!qr.r+ - . - .' -: . ..;
tr In Step 1 of 4 as shown in Fig. 11.14, the
Letter Format tab, options available to
determine the general appearance and style
of your letter. In choose a page design
option; select the desired page design for
your letter. If you have a pre-printed
letterhead click on pre-printed letterhead
option.
a ClickNext, in Step 2 of 4, you have Recipient
Info in which you have to enter the name,
address and salutation for person you are
sending the letter too as shown in Fig.
11.15.
tr Click Next, in Step 3 of 4, you have other
element tab, in which you include reference
line, mailing instructions, attention, subj ect
and Cc options as shown in Fig. I 1 .1 7.
Fig. 11.15 Letter wizard rvith Recipient Info tab.
17 rutationl lAtertloa: jI.n'
jj
Fig. 11.16 Letter wizard with Other elements tab.
tr Ciick Next, in Step 4 of 4, yctl have Sender Info tab for entering the information about Lhe sender as
shown in Fig. 11.17. Following are the options available in this tab :
d Sender's name
fr Return address
fi Closings -u[tgr
}..*ul*** u*o ] .oqr", rt*r+idt
.!ai6s 11"6ot.,1,, ."
fl Enclosures
PEinqt
.jnFsrmetien
&ar* 6a pr.sqtrer{rnp.a I*i*r ;.," -.
,.,;;";
The preview box available in this tab shows the
result of your selection. . ?iic$heretq{$s.8d*esrso}h;
. . ffi.:{ . !:i :r,. ,i t.
IBxd*nh fiaE]€;
.Epil.rfi ,*di**ssr
tr- tcqit
Sfurt:61:/,
EaEi.rl
.l.ElftH3$Uret
;n
A"" - ,,i""*'l ,iC.4. l.;i,:,,1",."1 Ei{r<h
Fig. 11.17 Letter wizard with Sender trnfo tab.

tr Click Finish to generate Letter. The sample letter will look like as shown in Fig. 1 l.l 8.
: EG Edt giew fu6rt FesrftS lods Tebh wrdow S&
Fig. 11.18 Letter generate after Letter Wizard.

188
11.11 UsingTemplate
As yoti have learned in the iast section, awizard asks you intervierv qLrestions
and then produces a fornratted
document that reflects 1'our options and supplied inforrration. A
template, on the other hand, supplies a sample
docurnent with the sb,les and formatting. Flowever, you need to do the
typing yourself.
A Template is a stored file that contains boilerpiate text and/or special formatting
information. lt serves as
a kind of skeleton or blueprint, providing your documents v,rith
an uuderlying structirre. Template also includes
styles, which contain special character and paragraph forrnats.
Word comes with a numbcr of useful templates, each designed fol a specific
kind of document. For
exanrple' the Blanl< dctcument ternplate is used to create a standard
document, while the different styles of memo
template can be used to create a business memo.
The prirmarv benefit of using a template or a wizard is that all or at least
some of the documents characteristics
have been defined in advance. This enables you to create docru.nents that
have similar charaeter and paragraph
fornrats, as well as similar page setups, without havingto speciS, each paranreter
for each document.
in tnost of the templates, you simply select the u,ords you want to replace and type
over them with your
own information. The supplied formatting stal's the same, so you can take arJvantage
of it. These templates
irrclude in their body text instructions for their own use, so even ilyou
don't understand all of the fbrmatting
and features they inciude, you can slili use thern.
'l'ernplates don't necessarill'have
to include sample text. However. r,vhen you first open the New dialog
box, you may notice the B lank Document telnplate under the General
tab. This template (also cailed the Normal
template) doesn't contain any text, only style formatting. The reason
is that when you,re making a new
document, you don't alwal'5 want to staft at with someonselse's text
in it. The normal iemplate lets you start
0ut with a clean state.
11.11.1 Selecting Template for a New Document
When you create a new document using File ) New dialog box, you're
actually choosing a template on which
yout'document r'vill be based. The default Blank Docum"rt t.rnilut.
that most people use is based on Word,s
Normal template, an especially important Word template.
i'\'ord cornes with nearll' 30 ternplates for the documents
you're most likely to create. These temp!ates can
be used to create letters. f-axes, nremos, teports resumes, Web pages,
brochures, manuals and many other
documetlts' To select a template, display the Nerv dialog box, tnen ctict<
thc tab containing the template you
rvant and dcuble-click the tenrpiate.
11 .'l 1 -2 Creatin g a Temp!ate

Now that you'vc lea.rned ivhat icmplatcs are and how to use thc ones Word provides, it's time to stam creating
vout'otvn. Wc,rd gives ,\iou two wals to do so :
n From Scratch or.
tr By Saving an existing docurnent fi!e as a ternplate.
To create a template based on an existlng document

O Open the existing docunrent.
O Edit the ciocutneut to elirrinate the specific references that you won't want
to appear in other similar
docurne nis.
D Add any stvles. AutoText e'ntries, t5otbars or keyboard shortcuts
.you want (or copy existing ones
frorr other templates, using the Organizer).
i-l Choose File F Save As.
tr Choose Document'Ienrplate in the Save as type drop-down box.
When you do, Word changes t5e
current folder to the one wltere it saves tempiates, typically \Windowswpplication
Data\l\4 i crosoft\Te rnp i ates.
C Ente r a nanre for lhe template in thc File Name te:it box.
If you want to save your template in that f.-:lder, so it appears in the General tab of the New dialog box, click
Save. Ifyou want it to appear in a different tab in the New dialog box, double-click that folcler and click Save.
To create a template from scratch

You can also create a new template from scratch, much as you create a new document. To do so,
tr Choose File )
New and make sure Blank Document is selected in the General tab.
tr Choose Ternplate from the Create New section in the lower-right corner of the clialog box.
tr ClickOK.
If you follow this procedure to create a template file, you can save the file as a ternplate only, not as a Word
document. Once you've done so, you can add content, styles and other elements and save the finished
template as you would save any other ternplates.
To create a template based on an existing ternplate !
Sometimes you may not have a document that's an adequate model for a template, but Wordjust might. You can
browse thc tabs in the New dialog box to find out. Click on a template. In the Preview box, S'ord displays a
thumbnail sketch of a sample document based on it.
If you find a template you'd iike to use. click Template to indicate that you want to create a new template
rather than a document. Then click OK. A new template open, containing all the contents of V,/ord's builrin
template. Adjust it any way you like and save it under a new name or in a differeni folder.
To create a document with readymade template

D Choose File ) New.
O In the New dialog box that appears, select the tab that includes the template you want to use. (Here
we use Memos tab).
D Select the Professional Memo icon as shown in Fig. 11.19.
D ClickOK.
j t--e.P**r*xes $ny |otno o*,*.*u | ruure**, i *a
*qffi
5,d w
Itr ffilHil
i!4iMi;-)"^:- ----
Eleganl Memo Menro'r^ii:erd rl ,?
-}
,i,t: !:-,,. r_ir

.
a :,,i. ;,;,
di: .j-t)
rA)
atr?.;
Fig. 11.19 The New dialog box with Memos tab.

190 Saraswatilnformatics Practices(Xt)
A docunrent based on the template that you have selected appears in Fig. 11.20. Follow the instructions in
the template to replace placeholder text with your text.
FJte
e?C, tJ
im a/
l
', !.;
Fig. 11.20 A document based on template.
11.12 Copying Styles with the Help of Organizer

Word includes a handy tool called the Organizer, which
allows you to copy styles, toolbars, other styles and macro
project between documents and templates. The Organizer
also lets you copy AutoText entr-ies, but these can move
only from template to template, f ar;-tqi*riryy qBd*u Aoo*ut* *p6u,'r
ghb .,
11.12.1 Steps to Copy a Style from One {h [:aded.
Document to Another
tr Choose Tools ) Templates, Add-Ins as shown
inFig. 11.21.
Fig. 11.21 Templates, Add-Ins in Tools menu.

a
tr Click tlre Organizer button. You see the Organizer dialog box as shown inFig. 11.22.
l" $
t Autofext
':a
a&41''' it
aull Far*qraph FnnL

ltlnrmal
ai"it Fsr,+graph Font

LEUtrI
e
:.1 A
sry&s agaiiabl* inr
boc,:menta (D*cumertti
f
$l;tifiedi tk* t+ecine at.lqg:-t *.Ati.EfY I.},

._{te, {-. . ,,,rg.,
Fig.ll.22 Organizer dialog box.

tr Make sure the "from" and ''to" files - documents or templates - are referenced in the Styles Available
in boxes. If you have the wrong files. click Close File, then Open File and select the correct ones.
3 Select Styles, AutoText, Toolbars, and Macro Project Items, depending on which setting you want
to manipulate. Note that AutoText items may reside onl;' in templates'
tr Select the individual and click Copy, Delete or Rename, as appropriate'
Solved Exercises
Ql. What is mail merge ?

Ans. Mail Merge feature combines a list of data (typically a file of names and addresses) with a document
(commonly a form letter) to create a new document. The names anrl addresses are entered (merged) into
the form letter in the blank spaces provided. The result is a personalized fom letter.
Q2. Give the important points for naming fields in data files.
Ans. Important guidelines for naming fields in data files :
(a) Each field name must be unique'
(b) It must begin with a letter.
(c) It can contain upto 40 characters.
(d) It can contain letters, numbers and underscore characters, howeveq it cannot contain spaces.
Q3. How rvill you sofi the data in a table ?
Ans. Following steps are to be taken to sort the data in a table :
(a) Select all of the text in tlte column that you want to sort; do not select headings or blank lines'
(b) Choose Table, Sort.
(c) Under Sort By, select the desired column nurnber from the drop-down list box'
(rD In the Type drop-down list boxes, select the type of sort: Text, Number or Date'
(e) Select a sort order : Ascending or Descending.
A ClickOK.
Q4. Narne the minimum required files for rnail merge.
Ans. NlaiI nrerge usually requires the use of two files
: a main document and a data source.
Q5. Name the ways to merge documents in MS-woRD using Mail Merge toolbar.
Ans. There are three ways to merge documents in MS-WORD using the Mail Merge toolbar :
(a) Click on the Merge to New Document button, in Mail Merge Helper dialog box to save the merged
files in a single, new file.
(6) Click on the Merge to Printer button, in Mail Merge Helper dialog box to print the resulting merged
documents.
(c) Click on the Mail Merge button to specif, a range of data records to be merged or to choose ot6er
options in the Merge dialog box.
Review Questions
1. what is rnail merge ? Explain how can it be used in MS-word by giving an example ?
2. Dehne the use of main document.
3. How can you create a Data Source in MS-Word to do mail merge ?
4. r&'hat do you mean by mailing label ? How can you customize it ?
5. Write dorvn the steps for mail merge.
6. How will you use mailmerge fields ?
7. Write down the steps to change data source.
8. Write down the steps to run the merge.
9. Create two documents as :
(a) A document containing letter for all iliends about Diwali festival.
(6) A data source file containing your best l0 friends' names and addresses.
Try to merge the data source file into the document file as given in this unit. Also take printouts of
all rnerged letters with printer.
10. Write the steps to create a letter through Letter Wizard in Word.
1I. What do you mean by template ? Write down the different ways to create templates.
12. What do you mean by Word organizer ?
(a) Use the wizards to create your biodata.
(b) Use templates to send a invitation for the sports competition to DAV public school by your schoot.

Informatics Practices I

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Informatics Practices I

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONTENTS

Chapter - 4 Operati S1'stem 49_66

4.5.5.2 Shonest-Job-First Scheduling (SJF S) """"""""""' 60

8.9.2 Using the I\,lost-Recently Used Eile List ............:............................................,.......

9.3 SelectingText ................. ..................... l4i

9.8.5 To Repeat the Last Action ....................... 152

9.9.1 Changing the Font and Font Size .....'.'..... 153

9.9.3 Selecting Font [Jndertin ing ............ 154

9.9.5 Setting a Custom Font Color.... 155

9.9.6 Setting Text Effects 1s6

9.9.7 Changing Case ......... 157

9.9.8 Character Spacing .... 157

9.9.9 Animating Texts ....... t58

9. 10 Paragraph Formatting t59

9. 10.2 Indenting Text l6l

9. 10.7 Tabs 1&

Solved Exercises r66

Chapter - 10 flsing Grammar and Spell Check........ l7l-177

10.3.3 GettingandExplanationforaGrammarRule ..."""""" 176

Solved Exercises ..-....--.,...,.. 176

Chapter - 11 Mail Merge and Word Wizard . .....178-192

I 1.2 Basic Concepts of Merging Documents .'..........'.... 178

I1.3 CreateaMasterDocuntent ..........'..... 119

I1.4 To Create a Main Document ..........'... 179

I I .5 Working with Data Source '........"...'... 180

I 1.5.1 To Create a Data Source ............,.'.'.'...... l8l

11.6.1 To lirsert a Merge Field ..... lA

I L8 To View Merged Data on Screen ........ 183

12.3 Application of Business Computing inIndustries ..,.....,.............. 194

13' l Introduction """ """"'

14.4.2 Logical Opcrators """"" ll0

14.4.2.2 Logical OR ... '... '.. '... '

14.4.231-ogicalNO'l " """" '-Zll

I4.5.1 Dr,v Run'.............

Review Questions """""""' 2 t5

- 15 Starti Visual Basic ......... 216-230

15.1 Introduction..........,... " "' " 216

" ' " """"'

l5.3 TheObject-Oriented Programriiing (OOP) Paradignl """ """" """""' 217

l5.4 Event Driven Programming ..... "" 218

15.5 fiistory cf Visual Basic ..... """ "" 218

15.8.7 IIS Application '' 225

l5.S.SActiveXDocumentDLLandEXE "..."." "' "" " "' '225

15.2.5 Form l-a1,6u1 Windo.,i, ... ..244

16.4 ' i;,;,.;:::,: Docking .;

17.8.7 The Date Data Type ......'.....- 210

17.8.8 The Object Data TYPe 214

I 7.8. 13'l-he Drror Value........".'...'...

11 .12.4 PrintaBlankLiue .... ....'..... """""' :216

I 8 I tntroduction ............... .............. 28-5

18.3 Printingal,ineofTextontheFortr """"' " 285

i8.9'l-inrerControl ............ """" """' 310

Chapter - 22 Database C and ADO Controls ......... 479__504

223 Advantages of Database Management System ...... 4g0

Chapter - 24 Starting with SQL ...................... ..... 510-536

24.3 Featuresof SQL """ "" 510

24.6RulesforSQlCommands '.... """""" 513

24.7 Executing SQL Statements ................ .-......'....'.'....., 513

24.8 Database Objects .......'.. 513

24.9Database ObjectNaming R.ules .......'. 513

24.10 DataDefinition Language (DDL) ..." 513

Chapter - 26 SQL Functions 579-605

Chapter - 27 Multiple Tables and Sub-Queries 606-633